USVI Public Records

Document text

CENSUS OF POPULATION AND HOUSING SERIES CPH (5) SUMM. SOCIAL ECONOMIC, & HOUSING CHAR. LIBRARY BUREAU OF THE CI * ' ; BpU3IAI^Y BJ ap iC 'SBDIUIOUODg 'S91BIDOS sbdi;su9;dbjb3 ap uauinsaa 0661 9P BpU9TAlA X upp^igoj ap osu33 eS-S-HdO 0661 06, OSN33 OSN33 IHd OaVIDOOHN SEonsipBjsg A. Bituouoog ap uppeajsiuiuipv Q -3 SOI 3P 0I0J3UI03 3P OJU9UIBJJBd3Q U.S. Department of Commerce Economics and Statistics Administration BUREAU OF THE CENSUS 1990 CPH-5-55 hO CENSUS '90 Li 1990 Census of Population and Housing Summary Social, Economic, and Housing Characteristics Virgin Islands of the United States I BUREAU C E CENSUS ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The Decennial Planning Division, Susan M. Miskura, Chief, coordinated and directed all census operations. Patricia A. Berman, Assistant Division Chief for Content and Data Products, and Lourdes N. Flaim, Chief, Puerto Rico and Outlying Areas Branch, developed, directed, and coordinated the 1990 Census of the Virgin Islands of the United States (Virgin Islands). Other assistant division chiefs were Robert R. Bair, Rachel F. Brown, James L. Dinwiddie, Allan A. Stephenson, and Edwin B. Wagner, Jr. The following other branch chiefs made significant contributions: Cheryl R. Landman, Adolfo L. Paez, A. Edward Pike, and William A. Starr. Other important contributors were Judy G. Belton, Kimberly K. Giesbrecht, Paulette Lichtman-Panzer, and Gloria J. Porter. Data Collection and associated field operations were carried out by the government of the Virgin Islands through a special agreement between the Census Bureau and Governor Alexander A. Farrelly. Dr. Frank L. Mills was appointed Census Manager by the Governor and was assisted by Gerard Emanuel. The Census Bureau designated one of its employees, Leon D. Martin, as Census Advisor to provide technical advice and oversee the data collection activities. The Decennial Operations Division, Arnold A. Jackson, Chief, was responsible for processing and tabulating census data. Assistant division chiefs were: Donald R. Dalzell, Kenneth A. Riccini, Billy E. Stark, and James E. Steed. Processing offices were managed by Alfred Cruz, Jr., Earle B. Knapp, Jr., Judith N. Petty, Mark M. Taylor, Russell L. Valentine, Jr., Carol A. Van Horn, and C. Kemble Worley. The following branch chiefs made significant contributions: Jonathan G. Ankers, Sharron S. Baucom, Catharine W. Burt, Vickie L Cotton, Robert J. Hemmig, George H. McLaughlin, Carol M. Miller, Lorraine D. Neece, Peggy S. Payne, William L. Peil, Cotty A. Smith, Dennis W. Stoudt, and Richard R. Warren. Other important contributors were Roy D. Ashley, Jr., Eleanor I. Banks, Miriam R. Barton, Danny L. Burkhead, J. Kenneth Butler, Jr., Albert A. Csellar, Donald H. Danbury, Judith A. Dawson, Donald R. Dwyer, Beverly B. Fransen, Katherine H. Gilbert, Lynn A. Hollabaugh, Ellen B. Katzoff, Jeong S. Kim, Randy M. Klear, Frank J. Korpusik, Norman W. Larsen, Peter J. Long, Sue Love, Patricia O. Madson, Mark J. Matsko, John R. Murphy, Dan E. Philipp, Antoinette J. Ralston, Maria E. Reed, Willie T. Robertson, Barbara A. Rosen, Sharon A. Schoch, Imelda B. Severdia, Emmett F. Spiers, and Jess D. Thompson. The Housing and Household Economic Statistics Division, Daniel H. Weinberg, Chief, developed the questionnaire content, designed the data tabulations, and reviewed the data for the economic and housing charac- teristics. Gordon W. Green, Jr., Assistant Division Chief for Economic Characteristics, and Leonard J. Norry, Assistant Division Chief for Hous- ing Characteristics, directed the development of this work. The following branch chiefs made significant contributions: William A. Downs, Peter J. Fronczek, Patricia A. Johnson, Enrique J. Lamas, Charles T. Nelson, and Thomas S. Scopp. Other important contributors were Eleanor F. Baugher, Jeanne C. Benetti, Robert L Bennefield, Robert W. Bonnette, Ester A. Buckles, Higinio Feliciano, Cynthia J. Harpine, Selwyn Jones, Leatha H. Lamison, Gordon H. Lester, Mark S. Littman Wilfred T. Masumura, John M. McNeil, Diane C. Murphy, Mary L Naifeh, George F. Patterson, Thomas J. Palumbo, Kirby G. Posey, John Priebe, and Carmina F. Young. The Population Division, Paula J. Schneider, Chief, developed the questionnaire content, designed the data tabulations, and reviewed the data for the demographic and social characteristics of the population Philip N. Fulton, Assistant Division Chief for Census Programs, directed the development of this work. Other assistant division chiefs were Nampeo R. McKenney and Arthur J. Norton. The following branch and staff chiefs made significant contributions: Jorge H. del Pinal, Campbell J Gibson Roderick J. Harrison, Donald J. Hernandez, Jane H. Ingold! Martin TO Connell, Marie Pees, J. Gregory Robinson, Phillip A. Salopek Paul M. Siegel, Robert C. Speaker, Gregory K. Spencer, and cyntnia M. Taeuber. Other important contributors were Celia G. Boertlein Rosalind R. Bruno, Janice A. Costanzo, Rosemarie C. Cowan, Arthur R.Cresce Larry G. Curran, Carmen DeNavas, Robert O. Grymes, Kristin A. Hansen, Mary C. Hawkins, Rodger V. Johnson, Michael j! 2J. na nL Paisan°' ^erry B. Pollock, Stanley J. Rolark, A. Dianne Schmidley, Denise I. Smith, and Nancy L. Sweet. The Data User Services Division, Marshall L. Turner, Jr., Chief, directed the development of data product dissemination and information to increase awareness, understanding, and use of census data. Marie G. Argana, Assistant Chief for Data User Services, directed preparation of electronic data products and their dissemination. Alfonso E. Mirabal, Assistant Chief for Group Information and Advisory Services, directed activities related to the National Services Program, State Data Centers, and preparation of training materials. The following branch chiefs made significant contributions: Deborah D. Barrett, Frederick G. Bohme, Larry W. Carbaugh, James P. Curry, Samuel H. Johnson, John C. Kavaliunas, and Forrest B. Williams. Other important contributors were Molly Abramowitz, Barbara J. Aldrich, Delores A. Baldwin, Ramala Basu, Geneva A. Burns, Carmen D. Campbell, James R. Clark, Virginia L. Collins, George H. Dailey, Jr., Barbara L. Hatchl, Paul T. Manka, John D. McCall, Jo Ann Norris, David M. Pemberton, Charles J. Wade, Joyce J. Ware, and Gary M. Young. The Geography Division, Robert W. Marx, Chief, directed and coor- dinated the census mapping and geographic activities. Jack R. George, Assistant Division Chief for Geoprocessing, directed the planning and development of the TIGER System and related software. Robert A. LaMacchia, Assistant Division Chief for Planning, directed the planning and implementation of processes for defining 1990 census geographic areas. Silla G. Tomasi, Assistant Division Chief for Operations, managed the planning and implementation of 1990 census mapping applications using the TIGER System. The following branch chiefs made significant contributions: Frederick R. Broome, Linda M. Franz, David E. Galdi, Dan N. Harding, Donald I. Hirschfeld, Peter Rosenson, Joel Sobel, and Brian Swanhart. Other important contributors were Gerard Boudriault, Desmond J. Carron, Anthony W. Costanzo, Paul W. Daisey, Beverly A. Davis, Carl S. Hantman, Christine J. Kinnear, Terence D. McDowell, Wendell McManus, Linda M. Pike, Rose J. A. Quarato, Lourdes Ramirez, Janemary G. Rosenson, Daniel L Sweeney, Timothy F. Trainor, and Phyllis S. Willette. The Statistical Support Division, John H. Thompson, Chief, directed the application of mathematical statistical techniques in the design and conduct of the census. John S. Linebarger, Assistant Division Chief for Quality Assurance, directed the development and implementation of operational and software quality assurance. Henry F. Woltman, Assis- tant Division Chief for Census Design, directed the development and implementation of sample design, disclosure avoidance, weighting, and variance estimation procedures. Howard Hogan, Assistant Chief for Coverage Measurement, and David V. Bateman, Chief, Coverage Stud- ies and Evaluation Staff, were contributing assistant division chiefs. The following branch chiefs made significant contributions: Deborah H. Griffin, Richard A. Griffin, Michael L. Mersch, and Jimmie B. Scott. Other important contributors were Maribel Aponte, James E. Hartman, Alfredo Navarro, and Amy L. Tillman. The Administrative and Publications Services Division, Walter C. Odom, Chief, provided direction for the census administrative services, publications, printing, and graphics functions. Michael G. Garland was a contributing assistant division chief. The following branch and staff chiefs made significant contributions: Bernard E. Baymler, Albert W. Cosner, Gary J. Lauffer, Gerald A. Mann, Clement B. Nettles, Russell Price, and Barbara J. Stanard. Other important contributors were Barbara M. Abbott, Robert J. Brown, David M. Coontz, and John T. Overby. The Data Preparation Division, Joseph S. Harris, Chief, provided management of a multi-operational facility including kit preparation, procurement, warehousing and supply, and census processing activities. Plummer Alston, Jr., and Patricia M. Clark were assistant division chiefs. The Field Division, Stanley D. Matchett, Chief, directed the census data collection and associated field operations. Richard L. Bitzer, Richard F. Blass, Karl K. Kindel, and John W. Marshall were assistant division chiefs. Sheila H. Grimm was the director of the New York Regional Office with responsibility for the Virgin Islands. The Personnel Division, David P. Warner, Chief, provided manage- ment direction and guidance to the staffing, planning pay systems, and employee relations programs for the census. Colleen A. Woodard was the assistant chief. 1990 CPH-5-55 1990 Census of Population and Housing Summary Social, Economic, and Housing Characteristics Virgin Islands of the United States Issued March 1993 *&<* t *t*T£8& U.S. Department of Commerce Ronald H. Brown, Secretary John Rollwagen, Deputy Secretary Economics and Statistics Administration Jeffrey Mayer, Acting Under Secretary for Economic Affairs BUREAU OF THE CENSUS Harry A. Scarr, Acting Director i\L/ "10 LIST OF STATISTICAL TABLES [An asterisk (*) indicates that the table was omitted because there were no qualifying geographic area(s) or population group(s)] Table Page Table Page 1. 2. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Selected Social Characteristics: 1990 Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict Place Selected Social Characteristics: 1990 Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict and Place Education and Veteran Status: 1990 Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict Place Education and Veteran Status: Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict and Place 1990 Employment Status and Journey to Work Characteristics: 1990 Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict Place Employment Status and Journey to Work Characteristics: 1990 Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict and Place Disability Status: 1990 Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict Place Disability Status: 1990 Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict and Place 9. Income and Poverty Status in 1989: 1990 Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict Place 10. Income and Poverty Status in 1989: 1990 Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict and Place 11. Structural, Plumbing, and Equipment Characteristics: 1990 Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict Place 12. Structural, Plumbing, and Equipment Characteristics: 1990 Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict and Place 13. Fuels and Equipment Characteristics: 1990 Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict Place 14. Fuels and Equipment Characteristics: 1990 Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict and Place 15. Homeowner and Renter Characteristics: 1990 Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict Place 16. Homeowner and Renter Characteristics: 1990 Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict and Place 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 iv CONTENTS HOW TO USE THIS CENSUS REPORT CONTENTS Contents of the Appendixes 1-3 Graphics 1-3 How to Find Geographic Areas and Subject-Matter Data 1-1 How to Use the Statistical Tables I-2 User Notes I-3 INTRODUCTION Data from the 1990 census are presented in several different report series. These series are published under the following three subject titles: 1. 1990 Census of Population (1990 CP) 2. 1990 Census of Housing (1990 CH) 3. 1990 Census of Population and Housing (1990 CPH) The types of data and the geographic areas shown in reports differ from one series to another. In most series, there is one report for each State, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and the Virgin Islands of the United States (Virgin Islands), plus a United States summary report. Some series include reports for American Indian and Alaska Native areas, metropolitan areas, and urbanized areas. See appendix F for detailed information about the various report series; additional 1990 census data prod- ucts such as computer tapes, microfiche, and laser disks; other related materials; and sources of assistance. The data from the 1990 Census of the Virgin Islands were derived from questions asked of the entire population and about every housing unit. There were no questions asked of only a portion or sample of the population and housing units. Although data were collected on a 100- percent basis, data products for the Virgin Islands are separated to include subjects that are comparable to those shown in the 100-percent and sample data products for the United States. Appendix F lists the subjects that are included in the 1990 Census of the Virgin Islands. Legal provision for this census, which was conducted as of April 1, 1990, was made in the Act of Congress of August 31, 1954 (amended August 1957, December 1975, and October 1976), which is codified in Title 13, United States Code. HOW TO FIND GEOGRAPHIC AREAS AND SUBJECT-MATTER DATA This report includes a table finding guide to assist the user in locating those statistical tables that contain the data that are needed. The table finding guide lists alphabetically, by geographic area, the subjects shown in this report. To determine which tables in this report show data for a particular topic, find the subject in the left-hand column of the table finding guide and then look across the columns using the headings at the top for the desired type of geographic area. Below is an example of a table finding guide. Tables identified in the table finding guide with a refer- ence letter in parentheses after the table number present characteristics for racial groups or persons of Hispanic origin. The tables without reference letters contain data for the total population only. The table finding guide does not include cross-classifications of subject-matter items, nor does it distinguish among tables presenting data for all persons or housing units and tables presenting data for subgroups (for example, persons under 1 8 years or renter- occupied housing units) unless it is necessary to locate the subject. Additional information to locate data within specific reports often is provided in the headnote at the top of the table finding guide and in the footnotes at the bottom of the guide. TABLE FINDING GUIDE Subjects by Type of Geographic Area and Table Number [Subjects covered in this report are shown on the left side, and types of geographic areas are shown at the top. For a description of area classifications, see appendix A. For definitions and explanations of subject characteristics, see appendix B] Subject POPULATION CHARACTERISTICS Age Families and family characteristics . Group quarters Hispanic origin Households and household character- istics Population density Race Sex HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS Contract rent Hispanic origin of householder . . . Meals included in rent Persons per occupied unit Persons per room Race of householder Rooms Tenure Units in structure Vacancy characteristics Value LAND AREA Virgin Islands 7,8,9,10, 9,10, 7,8,9,10, 1,2 5,6 5,6 3,4 5,6 15,16 3,4 3,4 11,12 13,14 11,12 11,12 7,8 13,14 11,12 11,12 11,12 7,8 9,10 7.8,9, 9, 7,8,9, 1,2 5,6 5,6 3,4 5,6 15,16 3,4 3,4 11.12 13,14 11,12 10,11,12 7.8 13,14 10,11,12 10,11,12 10.11,12 7.8 9,10 By island and census sub- district 11 13 11 9,11 7 13 7,9,11 9,11 7,9,11 7 Alpha- beti- cally for the Virgin Islands 12 10,12 8 14 1,10,12 10,12 1,10,12 Census subdistrict By island 11 13 11 9.11 7 13 7,9,11 9,11 7,9.11 7 9 Alpha- betically for the Virgin Islands 12 14 12 10,12 8 14 8,10,12 10,12 8,10,12 HOW TO USE THIS CENSUS REPORT 1-1 HOW TO USE THE STATISTICAL TABLES Parts of a Statistical Table The census data included in printed reports are arranged in tables. Each table includes four major parts: (1) heading, (2) boxhead, (3) stub, and (4) data field. A typical census report table is illustrated below. The heading consists of the table number, title, and headnote. The table number indicates the position of the table within the report, while the title is a brief statement indicating the classification, nature, and time reference of the data presented in the table. The headnote is enclosed in brackets and is located under the title. It contains statements that qualify, explain, or provide information pertaining to the entire table. In some tables showing racial and Hispanic origin groups, the headnote includes infor- mation that data are presented only when certain population- size criteria (thresholds) are met. (For more information on thresholds, see the "User Notes" section.) The boxhead is under the heading. This portion of the table, which contains the individual column heads or captions, describes the data in each vertical column. In the PARTS OF A STATISTICAL TABLE Table number and tltte Hooding —J _~* i*wnwtOBMBaaMc mv \_mmmmm*—'w^—»—»«—Mfc Column bead Spanner Sidehead—£—•— XftSSCSfc Boxhead Data feu Report tm» boxhead of many tables, a spanner appears across and above two or more column heads or across two or more lower spanners. The purpose of a spanner is to classify or qualify items below it or separate the table into identifiable blocks in terms of major aspects of the data. The stub is located at the left edge of the table. It includes a listing of line or row captions or descriptions. At the top of the stub is the stubhead. The stubhead is considered to be an extension of the table title and usually shows generic geographic area designations and restric- tions. In the stub, several features are used to help the user better understand the contents of the table. Usually, a block of data lines is preceded by a sidehead. The sidehead, similar to a spanner, describes and classifies the stub entries following it. The use of indentation in a stub indicates the relationship of one data line to another. Indented data lines represent subcategories that in most instances, sum to a total. Occasionally in tables, it is desirable to show one or more single-line subcategories that do not sum to the total. The unit of measure, such as dollars, is shown when it is not clear from the general wording of the data line. The data field is that part of the table that contains the data. It extends from the bottom of the boxhead to the bottom of the table and from the right of the stub to the right-hand edge of the page. Both geographic and subject-matter terms appear in tables. It is important to read the definitions of the terms used in the tables because census terms often are defined in special ways that reflect the manner in which the questions were asked and the data were tabulated. Defi- nitions of geographic terms are provided in appendix A. Subject-matter terms are defined in appendix B. Symbols and Geographic Abbreviations The following symbols are used in the tables and explanations of subjects covered in this report: • A dash "-" represents zero or a percent that rounds to less than 0.1. • Three dots "..." mean not applicable. • (NA) means not available. • The prefix "r" indicates that the count has been revised since publication of 1 980 reports or that the area was erroneously omitted or not shown in the correct geo- graphic relationship in the 1980 census reports. This symbol appears only in the 1 990 CPH-2, Population and Housing Unit Counts reports. • A dagger "t" next to the name of a geographic area indicates that there has been a geographic change(s) (for example, a name change) since the information published for the 1 980 census for that area. This symbol 1-2 HOW TO USE THIS CENSUS REPORT appears only in the 1 990 CPH-2, Population and Hous- ing Unit Counts reports. The geographic change infor- mation for the entities in the Virgin Islands is shown in the "User Notes" section of 1990 CPH-2, Population and Housing Unit Counts report. The information for all States and the Virgin Islands appears in the "User Notes" section of the technical documentation for Sum- mary Tape Files 1 and 3. • A plus sign "+" or a minus sign "-" following a figure denotes that the median falls in the initial or terminal category of an open-ended distribution. (For more infor- mation on medians, see the discussion under "Derived Measures" in appendix B.) • A minus sign "—" preceding a figure denotes decrease. The following geographic abbreviations are used in the tables and explanations of subjects covered in this report: • A "(pt.)" next to the name of a geographic area in a hierarchical presentation indicates that the geographic entity is only partially located in the superior geographic entity. For example, a "(pt.)" next to a place name in a census subdistrict-place hierarchy indicates that the place is located in more than one census subdistrict. Other geographic entities also can be "split" by a higher-level entity. The exception is a tabulation block, which is unique within all geographic entities in census products. • BG is block group. • BNA is block numbering area. • CDP is census designated place. Census tables often include derived measures such as medians, means, percents, and ratios. More detailed infor- mation about derived measures is provided in appendix B. GRAPHICS Charts, statistical maps, and other graphic summaries are included in some 1 990 census reports. If graphics are shown in a report, they are presented immediately after the "User Notes" section. USER NOTES User notes include corrections, errata, and related explanatory information. This section appears directly before the statistical tables in census reports unless graphics are shown. It presents information about unique characteris- tics of the report and changes or corrections made too late to be reflected in the text or tables themselves. CONTENTS OF THE APPENDIXES Appendix A—Provides definitions of the types of geo- graphic areas and related information used in census reports. Appendix B—Contains definitions for the subject-matter items used in census reports, including explanations of derived measures, limitations of the data, and comparabil- ity with previous censuses. The subjects are listed alpha- betically. In reports that contain both population and housing characteristics, the population characteristics are described first, followed by the explanations of the housing subjects. Appendix C—Provides information on confidentiality of the data, allocations and substitutions, and sources of errors in the data. Appendix D—Explains the residence rules used in count- ing the population and housing units, presents a brief overview of data collection operations, and describes processing procedures used to convert data from unedited questionnaires to final 1990 publications and tapes. This appendix also clarifies the procedures used to collect data for persons abroad at the time of the census, where persons away at school were counted, and how data were collected for persons in institutions. Appendix E—Presents a facsimile of the 1990 census questionnaire pages. Appendix F—Summarizes the 1 990 census data products program by describing the information available in printed reports and in other sources, such as microfiche or com- puter tape; and provides information on where to obtain assistance. Appendix G—Contains maps depicting the geographic areas shown in this report. HOW TO USE THIS CENSUS REPORT 1-3 TABLE FINDING GUIDE Subjects by Type of Geographic Area and Table Number [Subjects covered in this report are shown on the left side, and types of geographic areas are shown at the top. For a description of area classifica- tions, see appendix A. For definitions and explanations of subject characteristics, see appendix B] Subject Virgin Islands Island Place By island and census subdistrict Alphabetically for the Virgin Islands Census subdistrict By island Alphabetically for the Virgin Islands POPULATION CHARACTERISTICS Disability Educational attainment Family type and presence of own children Income in 1989 Labor force status For persons 16 to 19 years by school enrollment and educational attainment Labor force status in 1989— Weeks and hours worked Language spoken at home and ability to speak English Means of transportation to work Nativity Place of birth Poverty status in 1 989 Residence in 1 985 School enrollment and type of school Veteran status HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS Bedrooms Condominium Cooking fuel Gross rent Kitchen facilities Mortgage status and selected monthly owner costs Plumbing facilities Purchase of water from water vendor Sewage disposal Source of water Telephone in unit Tenure Vehicles available Year householder moved into unit Year structure built 7,8 3,4 1,2 9,10 5,6 3,4 5,6 1,2 5,6 1,2 1,2 9,10 1,2 3,4 3,4 11,12 11,12 13,14 15,16 11,12 15,16 11,12 13,14 11,12 11,12 13,14 15,16 13,14 15,16 11,12 7,8 3,4 1,2 9,10 5,6 3,4 5,6 1,2 5,6 1,2 1,2 9,10 1,2 3,4 3,4 11.12 11,12 13,14 15,16 11,12 15,16 11,12 13,14 11,12 11,12 13,14 15,16 13,14 15,16 11,12 11 11 13 15 11 15 11 13 11 11 13 15 13 15 11 8 4 2 10 6 2 6 2 2 10 2 4 4 12 12 14 16 12 16 12 14 12 12 14 16 14 16 12 11 11 13 15 11 15 11 13 11 11 13 15 13 15 11 8 4 2 10 6 2 6 2 2 10 2 4 4 12 12 14 16 12 16 12 14 12 12 14 16 14 16 12 TABLE FINDING GUIDE 11-1 USER NOTES Additional information concerning this 1990 census product may be available at a later date. If you wish to receive these User Notes, contact: Data User Services Division Customer Services Bureau of the Census Washington, DC 20233 301-763-4100 Questions concerning the content of this report may be directed to: Housing and Household Economic Statistics Division Bureau of the Census Washington, DC 20233 Population Division Bureau of the Census Washington, DC 20233 ADDITIONAL DEFINITIONS AND EXPLANA- TIONS OF DATA GENERAL User Note 1 censuses where age was typically derived from respond- ent data on year of birth and quarter of birth. (For more information on the design of the age question, see the discussion on comparability under "Age" in appendix B.) User Note 2 The user should note that there are limitations to many of these data. Please refer to the text provided with this report for further explanations on the limitations of the data. User Note 3 The data shown in this product for persons enumerated in "visible in street locations" are incorrect and should not be used. Only the 1 00-percent data shown in data prod- ucts, such as Summary Tape Files (STF's) 1 and 2 and in the 1990 CP-1, General Population Characteristics State reports should be used for persons enumerated at "visible in street locations." During "Shelter and Street Night Enumeration," all visible persons on the streets were asked only the basic 1 00-percent population questions (age, sex, marital status, race, and Hispanic origin). During census processing of sample data, information from the long-form questionnaire was inadvertently assigned to a very small percentage of the visible in street popula- tion. Age Reporting—Review of detailed 1990 information indicated that respondents tended to provide their age as of the date of completion of the questionnaire, not their age on April 1, 1990. In addition, there may have been a tendency for respondents to round up their age if they were close to having a birthday. It is likely that approximately 10 percent of persons in most age groups are actually 1 year younger. For most single years of age, the misstatements are largely offsetting. The problem is most pronounced at age because persons lost to age 1 may not have been fully offset by the inclusion of babies born after April 1, 1 990, and because there may have been more rounding up to age 1 to avoid reporting age as years. (Age in completed months was not collected for infants under age 1 .) The reporting of age 1 year older than age on April 1 , 1990, is likely to have been greater in areas where the census data were collected later in 1 990. The magnitude of this problem was much less in the three previous User Note 4 The estimated population totals for persons in group quarters, specifically by group quarters type, that are based on census sample tabulations may differ from comparable figures shown in 1 00-percent tabulations. Such differences result, in part, from sampling variability which occurs because information was obtained from a sample of the population rather than from all persons. Differences also occur because of nonsampling errors which affect the 100-percent and sample data. Examples of nonsampling errors include respondent and enumerator errors, process- ing errors, and nonresponse. The 1 00-percent data are the official counts and should be used as the source for data on group quarters type when the primary focus is on counts of the population in group quarters, especially for small areas such as census tracts/BNA's or blocks. When the group quarters popula- tion is shown by characteristics covered only on a sample USER NOTES 1-1 basis (for example, education, labor force status, income, etc.), the sample figures should be used within the context of the sampling variability associated with them. For more information on the limitations of 1 00-percent and sample data for persons in group quarters and the classification of group quarters type, see appendix B. Reasons for the differences between 100-percent and sample totals will be an important focus of post-census research and evaluation. User Note 5 Estimated population and housing unit totals based on tabulations from only the sample questionnaires (sample tabulations) may differ from the official counts as tabulated from every census questionnaire (1 00-percent tabulations). Such differences result, in part, because the sample tabulations are based on information from a sample of households rather than from all households (sampling error). Differences also can occur because the interview situation (length of questionnaire, effect of the interviewer, etc.) and the processing rules differ between the 100- percent and sample tabulations. These types of differ- ences are referred to as nonsampling errors. (For more information on nonsampling error, see appendix C.) The 100-percent data are the official counts and should be used as the source of information on population and housing items collected on the 100-percent questionnaire, such as age, race, Hispanic origin, number of rooms, and tenure. This is especially appropriate when the primary focus is on counts of the population or housing units for small areas such as census tracts/BNA's, and block groups. For estimates of counts of persons and housing units by characteristics asked only on a sample basis (such as education, labor force status, income, and source of water), the sample estimates should be used within the context of the error associated with them. Many users are interested in tabulations of items col- lected on the sample cross-classified by items collected on a 100-percent basis such as age, race, sex, Hispanic origin, and housing units by tenure. Given the way the weights were applied during sample tabulations, generally, there is exact agreement between sample estimates and 100-percent counts for total population and total housing units for most geographic areas. At the State level and higher geographic levels, sample estimates and 100-percent counts for population by age, sex, race, and Hispanic origin and for housing units by tenure, number of rooms and so on would be reasonably similar and, in some cases, the same. At smaller geographic levels, including census tract/ BNA, there is still general agreement between 100-percent counts and sample estimates of total population or hous- ing units. At smaller geographic levels, however, there will be expected differences between sample estimates and 1 00-percent counts for population by age, sex, race, and Hispanic origin and for housing units by tenure, number of rooms and so on. In these cases, users may want to consider using derived measures (such as means and medians) or percent distributions. Whether using absolute numbers or derived measures for small population groups and for a small number of housing units in small geo- graphic areas, users should be cautioned that the sampling error associated with these data may be large. Even though the differences between sample estimates and 1 00-percent counts for these categories are generally small, the differences for the Hispanic origin populations are relatively larger than for other groups. The following provides some explanation for these differences. For the Hispanic origin population, sample estimates at the State level are generally lower than the corresponding 100-percent counts. The majority of difference is caused by the 1 00-percent and sample processing of the Hispanic question on the sample questionnaire when the respond- ent did not mark any response category. When processing the sample, written entries in race or Hispanic origin as well as responses to questions only asked on the sample, such as place of birth. These procedures led to a lower propor- tion of persons being assigned as Hispanic in sample processing than were assigned during 100-percent pro- cessing. The Census Bureau will evaluate the effective- ness of the 1 00-percent and sample procedures. As in previous censuses, the Census Bureau will eval- uate the quality of the data and make this information available to data users. In the meanwhile, both 100- percent and sample data serve very important purposes and, therefore, should be used within the limitations of the sampling and nonsampling errors. User Note 6 Data presented in tables 1 5 and 1 6 for "Median selected monthly owner costs as a percentage of household income in 1989" (With a mortgage), "Median selected monthly owner costs as a percentage of household income in 1989" (Not mortgaged), and "Median gross rent as a percentage of household income in 1989" are inconsistent with the explanations for derived measures in appendix B. Specifically, when the median falls in the lower interval of the tabulation distribution, the estimated value obtained by linear interpolation is shown rather than the upper value of the category followed by a minus sign (-). The lower interval has an assumed range of 0.0 to 19.9 percent. 111-2 USER NOTES Table 1. Selected Social Characteristics: 1990 [ For definitions of terms ond meanings of symbols, see text] Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict Place All persons Total Percent foreign bom Bom in U.S. Virgin Islands Percent bom on island of residence Persons 5 years and over Percent living in different house in 1985 Persons who speak a language other than English at home Persons 5 to 17 yeors Percent who do not speak English "very well" Persons 18 years ond over Percent who do not speak English "very well" Family households Percent with own children under 18 yeors Married-couple family Percent with own children under 18 years Female householder, no husband present Percent with own children under 18 years Vlrjln Islands St. Croix Island Anna's Hope Village subdistrict Christiansted town (pt.) Christiansted subdistrict Christiansted town (pt.) East End subdistrict Frederiksted subdistrict Frederiksted town Frederiksted Southeast CDP Northcentral subdistrict Northwest subdistrict Grove Place CDP Sion Farm subdistrict Christiansted town (pt.) Southcenrral subdistrict Southwest subdistrict St. John Island Central subdistrict Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) Coral Bay subdistrict Cruz Bay subdistrict Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) East End subdistrict St. Thomas Island Charlotte Amalie subdistrict Charlotte Amalie town Charlotte Amalie East CDP Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) . East End subdistrict Northside subdistrict Southside subdistrict Tutu subdistrict Anna's Retreat CDP Water Island subdistrict Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) . West End subdistrict 101 809 50 139 3 663 9 3 199 2 546 1 740 4 066 1 064 3 002 5 495 4 828 2 655 11 883 7 425 7 840 3 504 621 363 2 469 2 466 51 48 166 20 589 12 331 2 836 5 422 5 927 6 404 4 668 9 084 9 084 172 1 322 31.3 28.9 30.6 31.0 32.4 16.4 28.7 39.8 24.7 27.3 36.5 46.9 27.1 30.0 28.4 25.2 16.1 9.1 30.3 30.3 7.8 34.1 39.4 40.5 38.8 37.3 37.6 21.7 36.4 30.2 30.2 17.4 18.1 49 839 25 194 1 543 6 1 661 1 346 471 2 367 466 1 901 2 877 2 264 1 257 5 957 3 815 4 239 1 391 224 220 932 930 15 23 254 10 196 6 106 1 537 2 553 2 389 2 327 2 016 5 616 5 616 702 93.9 95.9 95.1 100.0 95.8 95.8 95.1 95.4 94.2 95.6 95.3 96.7 96.7 95.4 96.9 96.5 27.7 26.3 31.8 26.6 26.7 53.3 95.7 94.9 95.2 95.6 93.8 96.9 95.4 95.9 96.5 96.5 100.0 95.6 92 579 45 403 3 398 8 2 890 2 286 1 651 3 632 985 2 647 4 972 4 320 2 356 10 773 6 624 7 143 3 219 564 321 287 285 47 43 957 18 690 11 255 2 526 4 909 5 471 6 002 4 218 8 176 8 176 169 1 231 39.4 40.0 31.9 44.0 42.0 55.4 41.7 48.0 39.4 36.0 30.8 25.9 45.3 48.0 30.6 54.8 80.3 40.5 50.0 50.0 76.6 37.7 39.1 37.0 41.2 42.8 43.0 49.1 37.6 23.3 23.3 62.7 29.0 4 788 3 749 161 130 104 54 234 60 174 488 248 95 797 886 751 74 2 3 68 68 1 965 486 296 76 114 102 112 141 99 99 2 30.7 33.3 35.4 25.4 26.0 24.1 33.3 38.3 31.6 26.8 21.0 12.6 24.3 42.7 41.8 22.4 23.3 25.3 13.2 24.6 23.5 18.8 26.2 18.2 18.2 13.0 17 349 11 030 826 3 522 410 345 681 275 406 1 316 1 046 454 2 613 1 865 1 816 398 23 27 343 343 5 5 921 2 735 1 699 275 761 806 1 027 688 483 483 17 165 29.2 31.8 26.0 33.3 32.6 33.4 13.3 39.8 55.6 29.1 31.4 21.6 15.2 28.8 43.6 33.4 10.6 33.3 9.6 9.6 25.5 28.7 29.4 28.0 27.5 29.7 16.4 30.5 19.5 19.5 5.9 8.5 23 012 11 201 849 2 692 541 469 848 211 637 1 211 1 082 593 2 728 1 557 1 765 769 146 77 536 535 10 11 042 4 643 2 767 647 1 229 1 394 1 568 1 039 2 018 2 018 49 331 56.7 59.9 55.2 55.3 57.3 38.4 63.3 57.8 65.1 60.0 61.2 68.1 55.8 71.0 63.6 51.1 63.0 41.6 49.4 49.3 40.0 53.9 55.2 54.4 59.7 54.8 52.2 46.4 57.0 57.1 57.1 18.4 53.8 13 197 6 529 603 2 331 255 380 327 106 221 749 549 220 1 675 871 1 044 495 41 358 358 6 173 2 242 1 288 289 665 932 1 207 594 940 940 39 219 53.8 56.6 55.4 52.0 52.5 33.9 59.6 53.8 62.4 58.2 55.6 62.7 52.8 68.7 61.8 45.9 48.9 43.9 45.5 45.5 37.5 51.4 53.7 51.6 61.6 54.4 49.0 46.5 54.0 53.7 53.7 17.9 55.3 7 693 3 678 178 287 228 62 435 85 350 353 439 331 833 538 553 204 51 25 126 125 2 3 811 1 911 1 168 296 447 316 221 350 924 924 7 82 63.3 66.6 59.0 57.1 60.5 61.3 67.8 64.7 68.6 62.3 70.8 73.4 62.3 78.1 68.2 66.2 90.2 36.0 62.7 62.4 50.0 60.0 59.1 59.5 59.5 57.9 63.6 53.4 63.1 61.6 61.6 28.6 54.9 SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES 1 Table 2. Selected Social Characteristics: 1990 [For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text] Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict and Place All persons Total Percent foreign born Born in U.S. Virgin Islands Total Percent born on island of residence Persons 5 years and over Total Percent living in different house in 1985 Persons who speak a language other than English at home Persons 5 to 17 years Total Percent who do not speak English "very well" Persons 18 years and over Percent who do not speak English "very Total well* Family households Total Percent with own children under 18 years Married-couple family Total Percent with own children under 18 years Female householder, no husband present Total Percent with own children under 18 years Virgin Islands ISLAND St. Croix Island St. John Island St. Thomas Island CENSUS SUBDISTRICT AND PLACE Anna's Hope Village subdistrict, St. Croix Island Anna's Retreat CDP, St. Thomas Island ... Central subdistrict, St. John Island Charlotte Amalie town, St. Thomas Island . Charlotte Amalie subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Charlotte Amolie East CDP, St. Thomas Island Charlotte Amalie West CDP, St. Thomas Island Christiansted town, St. Croix Island Christiansted subdistrict, St. Croix Island .. Coral Bay subdistrict, St. John Island Cruz Bay CDP, St. John Island Cruz Bay subdistrict, St. John Island East End subdistrict, St. Croix Island East End subdistrict, St. John Island East End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Frederiksted town, St. Croix Island Frederiksted subdistrict, St. Croix Island ... Frederiksted Southeast CDP, St. Croix Island Grove Place CDP, St. Croix Island... Northcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island... Northside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island— Northwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island Sion Farm subdistrict, St. Croix Island Southcentrol subdistrict, St. Croix Island... Southside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island... Southwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island Tutu subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Water Island subdistrict, St. Thomas Island West End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island 101 809 50 139 3 504 48 166 3 663 9 084 621 12 331 20 589 2 836 5 422 2 555 3 199 363 2 466 2 469 1 740 51 5 927 1 064 4 066 3 002 2 655 5 495 6 404 4 828 11 883 7 425 4 668 7 840 9 084 172 1 322 31.3 28.9 25.2 34.1 30.6 30.2 16.1 40.5 39.4 38.8 37.3 32.3 31.0 9.1 30.3 30.3 16.4 7.8 37.6 39.8 28.7 24.7 46.9 27.3 21.7 36.5 27.1 30.0 36.4 28.4 30.2 17.4 18.1 49 839 25 194 1 391 23 254 1 543 5 616 224 6 106 10 196 1 537 2 553 1 352 1 661 220 930 932 471 15 2 389 466 2 367 1 901 1 257 2 877 2 327 2 264 5 957 3 815 2 016 4 239 5 616 8 702 93.9 95.9 27.7 95.7 95.1 96.5 26.3 95.2 94.9 95.6 93.8 95.9 95.8 31.8 26.7 26.6 95.1 53.3 96.9 94.2 95.4 95.6 96.7 95.3 95.4 96.7 95.4 96.9 95.9 96.5 96.5 100.0 95.6 92 579 45 403 3 219 43 957 3 398 8 176 564 11 255 18 690 2 526 4 909 2 294 2 890 321 2 285 2 287 1 651 47 5 471 985 3 632 2 647 2 356 4 972 6 002 4 320 10 773 6 624 4 218 7 143 8 176 169 1 231 39.4 40.0 54.8 37.7 31.9 23.3 80.3 37.0 39.1 41.2 42.8 41.8 44.0 40.5 50.0 50.0 55.4 76.6 43.0 48.0 41.7 39.4 25.9 36.0 49.1 30.8 45.3 48.0 37.6 30.6 23.3 62.7 29.0 4 788 3 749 74 965 161 99 2 296 486 76 114 104 130 3 68 68 54 1 102 60 234 174 95 488 112 248 797 886 141 751 99 2 23 30.7 33.3 8.1 22.4 35.4 18.2 25.3 23.3 13.2 24.6 26.0 25.4 24.1 23.5 38.3 33.3 31.6 12.6 26.8 18.8 21.0 24.3 42.7 26.2 41.8 18.2 13.0 17 349 11 030 398 5 921 826 483 23 1 699 2 735 275 761 413 522 27 343 343 345 5 806 275 681 406 454 1 316 1 027 1 046 2 613 1 865 688 1 816 483 17 165 29.2 31.8 10.6 25.5 26.0 19.5 29.4 28.7 28.0 27.5 33.4 32.6 33.3 9.6 9.6 13.3 29.7 55.6 39.8 29.1 15.2 31.4 16.4 21.6 28.8 43.6 30.5 33.4 19.5 5.9 8.5 23 012 11 201 769 11 042 849 2 018 146 2 767 4 643 647 1 229 543 692 77 535 536 469 10 1 394 211 848 637 593 1 211 1 568 1 082 2 728 1 557 1 039 1 765 2 018 49 331 56.7 59.9 51.1 53.9 55.2 57.1 63.0 54.4 55.2 59.7 54.8 57.1 55.3 41.6 49.3 49.4 38.4 40.0 52.2 57.8 63.3 65.1 68.1 60.0 46.4 61.2 55.8 71.0 57.0 63.6 57.1 18.4 53.8 13 197 6 529 495 6 173 603 940 88 1 288 2 242 289 665 257 331 41 358 358 380 8 932 106 327 221 220 749 1 207 549 1 675 871 594 1 044 940 39 219 53.8 56.6 45.9 51.4 55.4 53.7 48.9 51.6 53.7 61.6 54.4 52.1 52.0 43.9 45.5 45.5 33.9 37.5 49.0 53.8 59.6 62.4 62.7 58.2 46.5 55.6 52.8 68.7 54.0 61.8 53.7 17.9 55.3 7 693 3 678 204 3 811 178 924 51 1 168 1 911 296 447 228 287 25 125 126 62 2 316 85 435 350 331 353 221 439 833 538 350 553 924 7 82 63.3 66.6 66.2 60.0 59.0 61.6 90.2 59.5 59.1 59.5 57.9 60.5 57.1 36.0 62.4 62.7 61.3 50.0 63.6 64.7 67.8 68.6 73.4 62.3 53.4 70.8 62.3 78.1 63.1 68.2 61.6 28.6 54.9 2 VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS Table 3. Education and Veteran Status: 1990 (For definitions of terms ond meanings of symbols, see text) Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict Place Persons 3 years and over enrolled in school Persons 16 to 19 years Persons 25 years am over Civilian veterans 16 years and over Preprimary school Elementary or high school College Total Not enrolled n school and not high school graduate Total Percent high school graduate or higher Percent with bach- elor's degree or higher Total Percent in private Total school Total Employed Unem- ployed Not in labor force 65 years and over Virgin Islands 1 919 842 54 64 53 29 83 19 64 71 78 32 214 118 131 64 15 10 39 39 1 013 426 234 71 121 107 125 102 224 224 29 26 062 18.7 13 643 20.5 899 40.4 781 20.9 632 20.1 268 57.8 1 226 9.7 253 8.7 973 10.0 1 470 16.2 1 377 15.0 894 9.3 3 003 27.1 2 237 14.9 2 382 16.9 677 12.9 125 15.2 51 11.8 495 12.3 494 12.3 6 16.7 11 742 17.0 5 173 13.5 3 122 11.9 828 12.2 1 223 18.5 1 357 22.2 1 020 39.3 1 162 17.5 2 711 11.0 2 711 11.0 11 81.8 308 26.6 4 677 1 996 183 107 74 75 153 35 118 195 204 102 550 256 273 84 8 11 63 63 2 2 597 1 122 561 152 409 318 362 220 446 446 3 126 7 581 3 886 261 188 148 77 335 60 275 455 362 239 921 589 698 181 21 14 142 142 4 3 514 1 490 874 220 396 417 334 355 823 823 5 90 1 269 728 36 35 29 2 62 12 50 90 56 41 172 136 139 41 3 4 34 34 500 208 124 29 55 57 28 69 128 128 2 8 453 209 10 6 5 2 13 2 11 19 12 7 59 44 44 23 1 22 22 221 93 62 12 19 32 20 29 44 44 1 2 186 125 4 4 4 9 2 7 22 12 9 26 21 27 4 1 1 2 2 57 26 14 8 4 9 5 15 15 2 628 392 22 25 20 38 8 30 49 32 25 87 71 68 14 1 3 10 10 222 89 48 9 32 16 8 35 69 69 1 4 55 639 26 285 2 148 8 1 826 1 425 1 265 1 906 614 1 292 2 819 2 438 1 152 6 490 3 496 3 897 2 232 389 240 1 567 1 566 36 27 122 11 340 7 001 1 391 2 948 3 529 4 462 2 500 4 369 4 369 145 777 56.5 51.4 64.3 37.5 45.9 40.6 85.7 41.3 41.0 41.4 48.0 45.7 33.2 59.6 39.0 44.3 66.8 81.0 62.1 63.6 63.5 88.9 60.6 53.1 49.6 54.9 60.4 61.4 81.7 59.4 53.0 53.0 97.2 86.9 15.1 13.0 19.9 12.5 8.3 5.7 34.5 9.7 13.2 8.0 8.8 12.8 6.1 16.4 7.0 8.9 25.3 32.6 25.0 23.3 23.2 36.1 16.4 10.3 9.4 6.2 14.3 20.4 32.9 18.2 7.3 7.3 46.2 31.4 4 879 2 212 202 1 148 114 232 137 44 93 218 198 54 648 150 279 257 52 18 177 177 10 2 410 790 469 67 254 334 630 205 275 275 42 134 738 343 Anna's Hope Village subdistrict 37 Christiansted town (pt.) 29 Christiansted town (pt.) 23 53 22 Frederiksted town 1 Frederiksted Southeast COP 21 33 Northwest subdistrict 27 Grove Place CDP 7 91 Christiansted town (pt.) 11 Southwest subdistrict 40 St. John Island 41 8 Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) Coral Bay subdistrict 3 Cruz Bay subdistrict 27 Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) 27 East End subdistrict 3 354 Charlotte Amalie subdistrict 119 77 Charlotte Amalie East CDP 7 Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) 35 50 Northside subdistrict 105 Southside subdistrict 32 Tutu subdistrict 23 Anna's Retreat CDP 23 Water Island subdistrict 12 Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) 13 SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES 3 Table 4. Education and Veteran Status: 1990 [For definitions of terms ond meanings of symbols, see text] Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict and Place Persons 3 years and over enrolled in school Preprimary school Elementary or high school Total Percent in private school College Persons 1 6 to 19 years Total Not enrolled in school and not high school graduate Total Employed Unem- Not in ployed labor force Persons 25 years and over Percent high school graduate Total or higher Percent with bach- elor's degree or higher Civilian veterans 1 6 years and over Total 65 years and over Virgin Islands ISLAND St. Croix Island St. John Island St. Thomas Island CENSUS SUBDISTRICT AND PLACE Anna's Hope Village subdistrict, St. Croix Island Anna's Retreat COP, St. Thomas Island .. Central subdistrict, St. John Island Charlotte Amalie town, St. Thomas Island Charlotte Amalie subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Charlotte Amalie East CDP, St. Thomas Island Charlotte Amalie West CDP, St. Thomas Island Christiansted town, St. Croix Island Christiansted subdistrict, St. Croix Island .. Coral Bay subdistrict, St. John Island Cruz Bay CDP, St. John Island ._. Cruz Bay subdistrict, St. John Island East End subdistrict, St. Croix Island East End subdistrict, St. John Island East End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Frederiksted town, St. Croix Island Frederiksted subdistrict, St. Croix Island... Frederiksted Southeast CDP, St. Croix Island Grove Place CDP, St. Croix Island Northcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island... Northside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island... Northwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island Sion Farm subdistrict, St. Croix Island Southcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island... Southside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Southwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island Tutu subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Water Island subdistrict, St. Thomas Island West End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ... 1 919 B42 64 1 013 54 224 15 234 426 121 53 64 10 39 39 29 107 19 83 64 32 71 125 78 214 118 102 131 224 29 26 062 13 643 677 11 742 899 2 711 125 3 122 5 173 826 1 223 632 781 51 494 495 268 6 1 357 253 1 226 973 894 1 470 1 020 1 377 3 003 2 237 1 162 2 382 2 711 11 308 18.7 20.5 12.9 17.0 40.4 11.0 15.2 11.9 13.5 12.2 18.5 20.1 20.9 11.8 12.3 12.3 57.8 16.7 22.2 8.7 9.7 10.0 9.3 16.2 39.3 15.0 27.1 14.9 17.5 16.9 11.0 81.8 26.6 4 677 1 996 84 2 597 183 446 8 561 1 122 152 409 74 107 II 63 63 75 2 318 35 153 118 102 195 362 204 550 256 220 273 446 3 126 7 581 3 886 181 3 514 261 823 21 874 1 490 220 396 148 188 14 142 142 77 4 417 60 335 275 239 455 334 362 921 589 355 698 823 5 90 1 269 728 41 500 36 128 3 124 208 55 29 35 4 34 34 2 57 12 62 50 41 90 28 56 172 136 69 139 128 2 453 209 23 221 10 44 1 62 93 22 22 2 32 2 13 11 7 19 20 12 59 44 29 44 44 1 2 186 125 4 57 12 26 21 5 27 15 628 392 14 222 55 639 26 285 2 232 27 122 2 148 4 369 389 7 001 11 340 1 391 2 948 1 433 1 826 240 1 566 1 567 1 265 36 3 529 614 1 906 1 292 1 152 2 819 4 462 2 438 6 490 3 496 2 500 3 897 4 369 145 777 56.5 51.4 66.8 60.6 64.3 53.0 81.0 49.6 53.1 54.9 60.4 40.5 45.9 62.1 63.5 63.6 85.7 88.9 61.4 41.0 41.3 41.4 33.2 48.0 81.7 45.7 59.6 39.0 59.4 44.3 53.0 97.2 86.9 15.1 13.0 25.3 16.4 19.9 7.3 32.6 9.4 10.3 6.2 14.3 5.7 8.3 25.0 23.2 23.3 34.5 36.1 20.4 13.2 9.7 8.0 6.1 32.9 12.8 16.4 7.0 18.2 8.9 7.3 46.2 31.4 4 879 2 212 257 2 410 202 275 52 469 790 254 115 148 18 177 177 232 10 334 44 137 93 54 218 630 198 648 150 205 279 275 42 134 738 343 41 354 37 23 8 77 119 7 35 23 29 3 27 27 53 3 50 1 22 21 7 33 105 27 91 11 32 40 23 12 13 4 VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS Table 5. Employment Status and Journey to Work Characteristics: 1990 [For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text] Persons 1 6 years and over Total Female Labor force Worked in 1989 Females with own children under 6 years Virgin Islands Island Percent in labor force Civilian labor force Workers Total Worked 40 or more weeks in 1989 Percent in labor Totol force Census Subdistrict Place Total Female Percent unem- Total ployed Total Means of transportation to work Usually worked 35 or more hours per week, 50 to 52 Total weeks Own chil- dren under 6 years in families and sub- families, all parents in household in labor force Percent Percent using using car. Percent public truck, or in car- tronspor- van pools totion Virgin Islands 70 323 36 961 33 556 17 498 2 631 1 295 8 3 2 221 1 165 1 743 907 1 421 674 2 554 1 427 758 383 1 796 1 044 3 642 1 876 3 135 1 680 1 589 934 8 201 4 255 4 621 2 362 5 130 2 764 2 627 1 322 438 227 273 143 1 874 930 1 873 929 42 22 34 140 18 141 14 423 7 864 8 732 4 709 1 811 1 017 3 880 2 138 4 342 2 161 5 124 2 507 3 221 1 695 5 910 3 350 5 910 3 350 158 66 962 498 67.6 61.4 62.6 54.0 68.8 63.0 50.0 33.3 63.0 55.1 61.4 52.8 67.5 58.6 54.2 46.5 69.4 60.8 47.8 41.3 63.3 53.6 63.5 54.9 59.0 53.2 66.1 58.3 58.5 48.9 58.9 49.2 78.0 74.3 80.1 77.5 71.4 67.8 78.8 75.1 78.8 75.0 59.5 50.0 71.8 67.7 68.3 63.8 68.2 64.5 69.3 65.2 68.1 61.6 76.6 73.0 78.5 73.5 73.1 67.6 69.5 68.3 69.5 68.3 67.1 59.1 76.8 76.1 47 443 6.7 20 950 9.2 1 809 5.3 4 1 397 12.4 1 070 13.2 954 4.4 1 377 8.8 525 8.8 852 8.8 2 301 9.7 1 985 10.6 935 13.9 5 411 7.8 2 700 13.1 3 016 9.6 2 048 2.8 351 2.3 195 8.7 1 477 2.2 1 476 2.2 25 4.0 24 445 4.9 9 836 5.6 5 948 5.2 1 255 8.5 2 633 4.9 3 322 4.4 4 007 2.1 2 344 4.9 4 094 6.7 4 094 6.7 106 1.9 736 2.2 41 769 17 856 1 618 4 1 146 870 879 1 209 449 760 1 896 1 663 752 4 628 2 243 2 574 1 855 333 163 1 336 1 335 23 22 058 8 754 5 301 1 048 2 405 3 Oil 3 746 2 108 3 665 3 665 102 672 73.7 22.9 11.7 77.4 18.9 11.7 90.1 20.3 3.6 100.0 50.0 63.8 21.0 12.7 59.5 20.1 14.0 86.5 15.7 .7 52.5 12.2 26.7 47.9 14.5 28.7 55.3 10.9 25.5 82.2 19.1 7.2 70.8 18.9 21.4 65.0 19.5 30.7 80.2 19.0 8.5 75.3 18.9 14.3 81.5 20.7 13.3 63.4 18.7 8.8 65.2 18.6 10.8 77.9 31.9 2.5 60.9 16.9 9.3 60.9 16.9 9.3 78.3 30.4 71.5 26.5 12.0 58.2 21.9 17.7 54.1 21.2 16.0 59.0 20.9 21.6 67.1 23.9 19.7 75.8 27.6 8.8 90.9 29.6 1 .6 72.2 27.3 12.5 77.2 31.5 13.0 77.2 31.5 13.0 26.5 13.7 9.8 91.8 35.6 2.7 47 630 20 738 1 815 4 1 360 1 034 1 033 1 339 499 840 2 281 1 992 918 5 443 2 520 2 955 2 142 375 209 1 528 1 527 30 24 750 9 835 5 930 1 226 2 679 3 347 4 122 2 372 4 190 4 190 114 770 36 770 29 07S 15 089 11 439 1 454 1 098 3 3 1 000 790 752 600 796 626 914 714 369 297 545 417 1 620 1 267 1 372 928 563 303 4 01 1 3 045 1 692 1 228 2 230 1 743 1 651 1 168 291 197 150 102 1 191 864 1 190 863 19 5 20 030 16 471 7 915 6 540 4 797 3 964 963 805 2 155 1 771 2 654 2 132 3 453 2 772 1 879 1 471 3 391 2 954 3 391 2 954 83 53 655 549 6 508 66.3 3 290 56.2 201 68.7 1 100.0 201 57.7 169 54.4 80 66.3 287 46.7 57 63.2 230 42.6 350 59.4 356 58.1 215 58.6 777 60.1 553 50.5 485 50.7 219 79.0 44 72.7 26 61.5 147 85.0 146 84.9 2 2 999 76.4 1 375 76.9 796 78.6 219 74.4 360 74.4 330 81.5 328 73.2 298 71.5 586 75.3 586 75.3 3 33.3 79 88.6 6 720 2 997 Anna's Hope Village subdistrict 223 Christiansted town (pt.) 1 Christiansted subdistrict 199 Christiansted town (pt.) 165 71 Frederiksted subdistrict 228 58 Frederiksted Southeast CDP 170 Northcentral subdistrict 341 324 Grove Place CDP 189 746 Christiansted town (pt.) Southcentral subdistrict 449 Southwest subdistrict 416 257 Central subdistrict 45 Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) 34 178 Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) 177 East End subdistrict _ St. Thomas Island 3 466 1 598 Charlotte Amalie town Charlotte Amalie East CDP 936 261 Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) East End subdistrict 401 417 328 327 708 Anna's Retreat CDP 708 1 Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) 87 SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES 5 Table 6. Employment Status and Journey to Work Characteristics: 1990 [For definitions of terms ond meanings of symbols, see text] Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict and Place Virgin Islands ISLAND St. Croix Island St. John Island St. Thomas Island CENSUS SUBDISTRICT AND PLACE Anna's Hope Village subdistrict, St. Croix Island Anna's Retreat CDP, St. Thomas Island ... Central subdistrict, St. John Island Charlotte Amalie town, St. Thomas Island . Charlotte Amalie subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Charlotte Amalie East COP, St. Thomas Island Charlotte Amalie West CDP, St. Thomas Island Christiansted town, St. Croix Island Christiansted subdistrict, St. Croix Island .. Coral Bay subdistrict, St. John Island Cruz Bay CDP, St. John Island _. Cruz Bay subdistrict, St. John Island East End subdistrict, St. Croix Island East End subdistrict, St. John Island East End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Frederiksted town, St. Croix Island Frederiksted subdistrict, St. Croix Island Frederiksted Southeast CDP, St. Croix Island Grove Place CDP, St. Croix Island Northcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island ... Northside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ... Northwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island Sion Farm subdistrict, St. Croix Island Southcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island... Southside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island... Southwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island Tutu subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Water Island subdistrict, St. Thomas Island West End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island- Persons 1 6 years and over Total Female 70 323 36 961 33 556 17 498 2 627 1 322 34 140 18 141 2 631 5 910 438 8 732 1 295 3 350 227 4 709 14 423 7 864 1 811 1 017 3 880 1 751 2 221 273 1 873 1 874 1 421 42 4 342 758 2 554 1 796 1 589 3 642 5 124 3 135 8 201 4 621 3 221 5 130 5 910 158 962 2 138 910 1 165 143 929 930 674 22 2 161 383 1 427 I 044 934 1 876 2 507 1 680 4 255 2 362 1 695 2 764 3 350 66 498 Labor force Percent in labor force Total Female 67.6 62.6 54.0 78.0 74.3 71.8 67.7 68.8 69.5 80.1 68.2 68.3 69.3 68.1 61.4 63.0 71.4 78.8 78.8 67.5 59.5 76.6 69.4 54.2 47.8 59.0 63.3 78.5 63.5 66.1 58.5 73.1 58.9 69.5 67.1 76.8 63.0 68.3 77.5 64.5 63.8 65.2 61.6 52.7 55.1 67.8 75.0 75.1 58.6 50.0 73.0 60.8 46.5 41.3 53.2 53.6 73.5 54.9 58.3 48.9 67.6 49.2 68.3 59.1 76.1 Ovilian labor force Total 47 443 20 950 2 048 24 445 1 809 4 094 351 5 948 9 836 1 255 2 633 1 074 1 397 195 1 476 1 477 954 25 3 322 525 1 377 852 935 2 301 4 007 1 985 5 411 2 700 2 344 3 016 4 094 106 736 Percent unem- ployed 6.7 9.2 2.8 4.9 5.3 6.7 2.3 5.2 5.6 8.5 4.9 13.1 12.4 8.7 2.2 2.2 4.4 4.0 4.4 13.9 9.7 2.1 10.6 7.8 13.1 4.9 9.6 6.7 1.9 2.2 Workers Total 41 769 17 856 1 855 22 058 1 618 3 665 333 5 301 8 754 1 048 2 405 874 1 146 163 1 335 1 336 879 23 3 Oil 449 1 209 760 752 1 896 3 746 1 663 4 628 2 243 2 108 2 574 3 665 102 672 Means of transportation to work Percent Percent using using car, Percent public truck, or in car- transpor- van pools tation 73.7 77.4 63.4 71.5 90.1 77.2 65.2 54.1 58.2 59.0 67.1 59.7 63.8 77.9 60.9 60.9 86.5 78.3 75.8 47.9 52.5 55.3 65.0 82.2 90.9 70.8 80.2 75.3 72.2 81.5 77.2 26.5 91.8 22.9 18.9 18.7 26.5 20.3 31.5 18.6 21.2 21.9 20.9 23.9 20.3 21.0 31.9 16.9 16.9 15.7 30.4 27.6 14.5 12.2 10.9 19.5 19.1 29.6 18.9 19.0 18.9 27.3 20.7 31.5 13.7 35.6 11.7 11.7 8.8 12.0 3.6 13.0 10.8 16.0 17.7 21.6 19.7 14.0 12.7 2.5 9.3 9.3 .7 28.7 26.7 25.5 30.7 7.2 1.6 21.4 8.5 14.3 12.5 13.3 13.0 9.8 2.7 Worked in 1989 Total 47 630 20 738 2 142 24 750 1 815 4190 375 5 930 9 835 1 226 2 679 1 038 1 360 209 1 527 1 528 1 033 30 3 347 499 1 339 840 918 2 281 4 122 1 992 5 443 2 520 2 372 2 955 4 190 114 770 Worked 40 or more weeks in 1989 Total Usually worked 35 or more hours per week, 50 to 52 weeks 36 770 29 078 15 089 11 439 1 651 1 168 20 030 16 471 1 454 3 391 291 4 797 1 098 2 954 197 3 964 7 915 6 540 963 2 155 755 1 000 150 1 190 1 191 796 19 2 654 369 914 545 563 1 620 3 453 1 372 4 Oil 1 692 1 879 2 230 3 391 83 655 805 1 771 603 790 102 863 864 626 5 2 132 297 714 417 303 1 267 2 772 928 3 045 1 228 1 471 1 743 2 954 53 549 Females with own children under 6 years Percent in labor Total force 6 508 3 290 219 2 999 201 586 44 796 1 375 219 360 170 201 26 146 147 80 2 330 57 287 230 215 350 328 356 777 553 298 485 586 3 79 66.3 56.2 79.0 76.4 68.7 75.3 72.7 78.6 76.9 74.4 74.4 54.7 57.7 61.5 84.9 85.0 66.3 81.5 63.2 46.7 42.6 58.6 59.4 73.2 58.1 60.1 50.5 71.5 50.7 75.3 33.3 88.6 Own chil- dren under 6 years in families and sub- families, all parents in household in labor force 6 720 2 997 257 3 466 223 708 45 936 1 598 261 401 166 199 34 177 178 71 417 58 228 170 189 341 328 324 746 449 327 416 708 1 87 6 VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS Table 7 Disability Status: 1990 [For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text] Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict Ovilian noninsttrutionalized persons 16 to 64 yeors Civilian non nsfitutionalized over persons 65 years and Percent in labor force of civilian noninsfifutionalized persons 1 6 to 64 yeors with— Total Percent with a work disability Percent with a mobility or limitation self-ca re Total Percent with a mobility or self-care limitation A work disability No work disability A mobility limitation Place Prevented from Total working Total Mobility limitation Self-care limitation Total Mobility limitation Self-care limitation No mobility limitation Virgin Islands 63 413 30 221 2 328 5 1 943 1 529 1 246 2 280 684 1 596 3 335 2 871 1 464 7 453 4 110 4 655 2 414 414 234 1 731 1 730 35 30 778 12 602 7 439 1 627 3 536 4 004 4 696 3 017 5 430 5 430 129 900 5.2 2.8 5.7 3.4 3.7 1.9 5.7 3.7 6.0 3.8 3.9 2.3 7.9 4.2 5.6 2.3 8.8 5.0 5.9 3.7 5.2 3.0 5.4 3.6 6.1 3.3 5.5 3.6 5.5 3.9 4.6 1.6 3.6 .5 7.7 3.0 4.5 1.7 4.5 1.7 2.9 2.9 4.7 2.4 5.0 2.6 4.9 2.5 6.7 3.4 4.4 2.4 4.3 1.8 3.8 1.5 4.2 2.1 5.7 3.3 5.7 3.3 .8 .8 2.9 1.8 2.3 3.0 1.8 2.7 2.9 2.4 1.5 1.8 1.4 4.9 2.1 2.0 3.0 3.6 2.9 1.0 .7 1.7 1.0 1.0 2.9 1.8 1.6 1.7 1.7 1.4 2.0 2.0 1.8 2.3 2.3 .8 1.1 1.5 1.8 1.2 1.6 1.7 1.6 1.4 1.5 1.3 3.4 1.5 1.7 1.2 2.2 1.9 .9 .5 1.7 .8 .8 2.9 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.6 1.1 1.6 .8 1.1 1.5 1.5 .8 .9 1.8 2.4 1.2 2.0 2.0 1.9 1.0 1.0 1.0 4.3 1.7 1.7 2.5 2.7 2.4 .7 .5 1.3 .6 .6 2.9 1.3 1.1 1.2 1.2 .8 1.3 1.7 1.2 1.7 1.7 .6 6 349 2 986 248 3 275 213 170 267 73 194 297 258 122 723 290 458 213 24 39 143 143 7 3 150 1 675 1 157 184 334 335 390 194 468 468 29 59 14.5 15.1 10.9 20.7 21.6 15.9 8.2 17.8 4.6 18.2 13.2 14.8 12.9 8.3 24.9 9.4 4.2 10.3 9.8 9.8 14.3 14.3 14.6 13.8 25.5 11.1 16.7 10.5 14.4 15.8 15.8 6.9 6.8 12.8 12.4 10.9 19.3 20.2 11.8 7.9 16.4 4.6 17.2 12.8 14.8 10.4 7.9 14.8 9.4 4.2 10.3 9.8 9.8 14.3 13.4 13.6 12.9 23.9 10.5 16.1 9.5 13.4 15.2 15.2 6.9 5.1 9.9 10.8 7.7 11.6 12.2 10.0 6.7 13.7 4.1 12.8 8.1 10.7 8.2 5.5 22.1 6.1 7.7 7.0 7.0 9.4 9.8 9.8 15.8 6.6 9.0 8.2 9.8 10.3 10.3 3.4 3.4 36.1 32.0 36.8 30.9 31.5 22.4 29.1 50.0 23.4 32.5 34.7 29.1 37.4 31.6 23.6 58.0 73.3 55.6 56.4 56.4 39.2 40.0 41.7 34.9 39.6 52.0 45.6 38.6 28.2 28.2 26.9 75.0 70.0 77.2 80.0 72.0 70.4 75.9 61.2 76.2 54.6 70.2 69.7 65.3 73.0 66.7 66.2 84.1 84.7 78.2 84.9 84.9 73.5 79.2 77.3 78.7 78.5 74.0 82.5 84.5 77.9 76.5 76.5 81.3 82.4 25.1 24.) 10.3 21.9 19.2 25.0 12.9 10.0 14.3 51.3 18.6 12.0 12.0 20.0 18.0 23.8 25.0 21.4 21.4 100.0 26.5 27.4 28.2 19.2 30.8 33.8 38.9 35.3 13.1 13.1 73.7 68.6 Anna's Hope Village subdistrict 76.5 80.0 Christionsted subdistrict 70.4 68.9 74.6 59.3 75.7 Frederiksted Southeast CDP 52.3 68.6 68.6 64.2 71.6 - 65.8 64.7 St. John Island 83.4 84.7 Cruz Boy CDP (pt.) - 77.4 84.2 Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) 84.1 70.6 78.0 Charlotte Amalie subdistrict Charlotte Amalie town Charlotte Amalie East CDP 76.1 77.5 76.5 Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) 73.0 82.0 83.4 76.7 74.7 Anna's Retreot CDP 74.7 81.3 Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) West End subdistrict 81.5 SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES 7 Table 8. Disability Status: 1990 [For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text] Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict and Place Civilian noninstitutionalized persons 16 to 64 years Total Percent with a work disability Total Prevented from working Percent with a mobility or self-care limitation Mobility Self-care Total limitation limitation Civilian noninstitutionalized persons 65 years and over Total Percent with a mobility or self-care limitation Mobility Self-care Total limitation limitation Percent in labor force of civilian noninstitutionalized persons 1 6 to 64 years with— A work No work A mobility No mobility disability disability limitation limitation Virgin Islands ISLAND St. Croix Island St. John Island St. Thomas Island CENSUS SUBDISTRICT AND PLACE Anna's Hope Village subdistrict, St. Croix Island Anna's Retreat CDP, St. Thomas Island ... Central subdistrict, St. John Island Charlotte Amalie town, St. Thomas Island . Charlotte Amalie subdistrict, St. Thomos Island Charlotte Amalie East CDP, St. Thomas Island Charlotte Amalie West CDP, St. Thomas Island Christiansted town, St. Croix Island Christiansted subdistrict, St. Croix Island _. Coral Bay subdistrict, St. John Island Cruz Bay CDP, St. John Island Cruz Bay subdistrict, St. John Island East End subdistrict, St. Croix Island East End subdistrict, St. John Island East End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Frederiksted town, St. Croix Island Frederiksted subdistrict, St. Croix Island Frederiksted Southeast CDP, St. Croix Island Grove Place CDP, St. Croix Island Northcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island... Northside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island... Northwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island Sion Farm subdistrict, St. Croix Island Southcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island... Southside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island... Southwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island Tutu subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Water Island subdistrict, St. Thomas Island West End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ... 63 413 30 221 2 414 30 778 2 328 5 430 414 7 439 12 602 1 627 3 536 1 534 1 943 234 1 730 1 731 1 246 35 4 004 684 2 280 1 596 1 464 3 335 4 696 2 871 7 453 4 110 3 017 4 655 5 430 129 900 5.2 5.7 4.6 4.7 3.7 5.7 3.6 4.9 5.0 6.7 4.4 6.0 5.7 7.7 4.5 4.5 3.9 2.9 4.3 5.6 7.9 5.4 5.9 3.8 5.2 6.1 5.5 4.2 5.5 5.7 .8 2.9 2.8 1.9 3.3 .5 2.5 2.6 3.4 2.4 3.8 3.7 3.0 1.7 1.7 2.3 2.9 1.8 2.3 4.2 5.0 3.6 3.7 1.5 3.0 3.3 3.6 2.1 3.9 3.3 2.3 3.0 1.0 1.8 1.8 2.3 .7 1.7 1.6 1.4 2.9 2.7 1.7 1.0 1.0 2.4 2.9 2.0 1.8 1.5 1.4 2.0 4.9 2.0 2.1 3.0 3.6 1.8 2.9 2.3 .8 1.1 1.5 .9 1.3 1.2 1.5 .5 1.4 1.3 1.6 1.1 1.7 1.6 1.7 1.6 2.9 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.7 3.4 1.5 1.2 2.2 1.1 1.9 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.0 1.3 .6 .6 1.9 2.9 1.3 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.7 4.3 1.7 1.7 2.5 2.7 1.2 2.4 1.7 6 349 2 986 213 3 150 248 468 24 1 157 1 675 184 334 216 275 39 143 143 170 7 335 73 267 194 122 297 390 258 723 290 194 458 468 29 59 14.5 15.1 9.4 14.3 10.9 15.8 4.2 13.8 14.6 25.5 11.1 21.3 20.7 10.3 9.8 9.8 15.9 14.3 16.7 17.8 8.2 4.6 14.8 18.2 10.5 13.2 12.9 8.3 14.4 24.9 15.8 6.9 6.8 12.8 12.4 9.4 13.4 10.9 15.2 4.2 12.9 13.6 23.9 10.5 19.9 19.3 10.3 9.8 9.8 11.8 14.3 16.1 16.4 7.9 4.6 14.8 17.2 9.5 12.8 10.4 7.9 13.4 14.8 15.2 6.9 5.1 9.9 10.8 6.1 9.4 7.7 10.3 9.8 9.8 15.8 6.6 12.0 11.6 7.7 7.0 7.0 10.0 9.0 13.7 6.7 4.1 10.7 12.8 8.2 8.1 8.2 5.5 9.8 22.1 10.3 3.4 3.4 36.1 32.0 58.0 39.2 36.8 28.2 73.3 41.7 40.0 34.9 39.6 31.5 30.9 55.6 56.4 56.4 22.4 52.0 50.0 29.1 23.4 29.1 32.5 45.6 34.7 37.4 31.6 38.6 23.6 28.2 26.9 75.0 70.0 84.1 79.2 77.2 76.5 84.7 78.7 77.3 78.5 74.0 70.4 72.0 78.2 84.9 84.9 75.9 73.5 82.5 76.2 61.2 54.6 65.3 70.2 84.5 69.7 73.0 66.7 77.9 66.2 76.5 81.3 82.4 25.1 24.1 23.8 26.5 10.3 13.1 28.2 27.4 19.2 30.8 19.2 21.9 25.0 21.4 21.4 25.0 100.0 33.8 10.0 12.9 14.3 12.0 51.3 38.9 18.6 12.0 20.0 35.3 18.0 13.1 73.7 68.6 83.4 78.0 76.5 74.7 84.7 77.5 76.1 76.5 73.0 68.9 70.4 77.4 84.1 84.2 74.6 70.6 82.0 75.7 59.3 52.3 64.2 68.6 83.4 68.6 71.6 65.8 76.7 64.7 74.7 81.3 81.5 8 VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS Table 9. Income and Poverty Status in 1989: 1990 [For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text) Virgin Islands Island Per capita income in 1989 (dollars) Median income in 1989 (dollars) Persons for whom poverty status is determined Families with income in 1989 below poverty level House- holds Families Nonfamih/ house- holds Total Income in 1989 below poverty level Number Census Subdistrict Place All ages Related children Persons 65 years and over Number Percent Under 18 years 5 to 17 years Number Percent Number Percent Number ercent Percent of all families Virgin Islands 9 440 8 058 11 152 10 925 7 607 6 530 18 962 5 387 7 770 4 543 6 967 7 549 4 926 9 767 5 706 6 479 13 443 14 645 10 794 13 606 13 610 9 742 10 587 8 063 7 942 6 639 9 081 12 333 18 881 12 928 7 256 7 256 22 735 14 953 22 050 19 340 28 415 11 250 14 937 13 359 34 217 11 806 13 988 11 009 19 460 17 380 12 634 23 919 14 841 17 080 26 295 26 250 18 611 27 076 27 055 22 917 24 619 19 282 18 337 18 045 21 926 29 116 39 348 25 050 23 466 23 466 38 738 40 249 24 036 20 835 31 682 43 750 16 481 15 610 40 097 12 172 17 578 11 250 21 170 18 346 13 112 25 970 15 992 18 539 31 277 27 500 22 250 33 320 33 347 20 000 26 661 21 443 20 790 19 896 24 052 31 498 44 680 26 505 24 472 24 472 40 470 44 443 15 262 12 493 20 850 3 750 11 017 10 068 22 443 9 756 11 HI 8 333 11 506 11 667 6 736 15 781 8 684 10 653 19 812 23 750 14 688 20 179 20 179 23 750 16 902 12 596 12 146 12 260 14 872 18 333 28 828 18 636 13 558 13 558 34 271 25 455 100 689 49 581 3 604 9 3 177 2 527 1 734 3 990 1 049 2 941 5 461 4 814 2 646 11 843 7 169 7 789 3 487 618 358 2 460 2 457 51 47 621 20 154 12 139 2 831 5 184 5 908 6 370 4 645 9 054 9 054 170 1 320 27 334 16 686 507 1 1 215 1 029 223 2 021 376 1 645 1 659 1 840 1 295 3 022 3 273 2 926 523 120 84 309 309 10 10 125 5 170 3 255 810 1 105 901 569 1 197 2 191 2 191 10 87 27.1 33.7 14.1 11.1 38.2 40.7 12.9 50.7 35.8 55.9 30.4 38.2 48.9 25.5 45.7 37.6 15.0 19.4 23.5 12.6 12.6 19.6 21.3 25.7 26.8 28.6 21.3 15.3 8.9 25.8 24.2 24.2 5.9 6.6 12 722 7 917 189 490 414 50 1 015 150 865 763 903 676 1 420 1 713 1 374 196 59 28 107 107 2 4 609 2 297 1 434 418 445 353 136 589 1 198 1 198 1 35 36.6 43.1 16.2 46.6 48.3 14.1 63.2 46.9 67.3 36.9 48.4 57.3 34.3 55.8 45.2 20.9 30.9 31.8 16.5 16.6 18.2 29.7 33.9 36.1 37.1 26.5 20.0 9.5 37.0 33.9 33.9 7.1 8.6 9 264 5 832 151 345 285 37 755 116 639 584 667 503 1 010 1 243 1 040 132 37 16 79 79 3 300 1 615 1 033 298 284 257 97 421 880 880 1 29 36.0 42.6 16.8 45.9 47.1 13.8 63.4 47.5 67.5 37.6 48.9 56.8 33.2 54.5 44.1 19.9 27.0 32.0 16.8 169 29.0 32.9 35.4 36.5 24.2 19.6 9.3 36.6 33.4 33.4 9.1 9.2 1 956 1 066 50 1 118 97 24 109 26 83 110 104 69 211 145 195 46 5 6 34 34 1 844 530 374 58 98 66 73 50 114 114 11 30.8 35.7 20.2 33.3 42.9 45.5 14.1 40.8 35.6 42.8 37.0 40.3 56.6 29.2 50.0 42.6 21.6 20.8 15.4 23.8 23.8 14.3 26.8 31.6 32.3 31.5 29.3 19.7 18.7 25.8 24.4 24.4 18.6 5 349 3 308 103 247 207 45 397 67 330 310 366 267 608 639 593 89 26 15 46 46 2 1 952 1 031 653 166 212 165 88 233 416 416 1 18 23.2 29.5 Anna's Hope Village subdistrict 12.1 35.7 38.3 9.6 46.8 31.8 Frederiksted Souttieast CDP 51.8 25.6 33.8 45.0 22.3 - 41.0 33.6 St. John Islond 11.6 17.8 Cruz Boy CDP (pt.) - 19.5 Cruz Bay subdistrict Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) 8.6 8.6 20.0 17.7 Charlotte Amalie subdistrict Charlotte Amalie town Charlotte Amalie East CDP 22.2 23.6 25.7 Chorlofte Amalie West CDP (pt.) 17.2 11.8 5.6 Southside subdistrict 22.4 20.6 Anna's Retreat CDP 20.6 2.0 Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) West End subdistrict 5.4 SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES 9 Table 10. Income and Poverty Status in 1989: 1990 [For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text] Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict and Place Per capita income in 1989 (dollars) Median income in 1989 (dollars) House- holds Nonfamily house- Families holds Persons for whom poverty status is determined Total Income in 1989 below poverty level All ages Number Percent Related children Under 1 8 years Number Percent 5 to 17 years Number Percent Persons 65 years and over Number Percent Families with income in 1989 below poverty level Percent of Number all families Virgin Islands ISLAND St. Croix Island St. John Island St. Thomas Island CENSUS SUBDISTRICT AND PLACE Anna's Hope Village subdistrict, St. Croix Island Anna's Retreat COP, St. Thomas Island ... Central subdistrict, St. John Island Charlotte Amalie town, St. Thomas Island . Charlotte Amalie subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Charlotte Amalie East CDP, St. Thomas Island Charlotte Amalie West CDP, St. Thomas Island Christiansted town, St. Croix Island Christiansted subdistrict, St. Croix Island .. Coral Bay subdistrict, St. John Island Cruz Bay CDP, St. John Island Cruz Bay subdistrict, St. John Island East End subdistrict, St. Croix Island East End subdistrict, St. John Island East End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Frederiksted town, St. Croix Island Frederiksted subdistrict, St. Croix Island Frederiksted Southeast CDP, St. Croix Island Grove Place CDP, St. Croix Island Northcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island... Northside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island... Northwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island Sion Farm subdistrict, St. Croix Island Southcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island... Southside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island- Southwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island Tutu subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Water Island subdistrict, St. Thomas Island West End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ... 9 440 8 058 13 443 10 587 11 152 7 256 14 645 7 942 8 063 6 639 9 081 6 545 7 607 10 794 13 610 13 606 18 962 9 742 12 333 7 770 5 387 4 543 4 926 6 967 18 881 7 549 9 767 5 706 12 928 6 479 7 256 22 735 14 953 22 050 24 036 15 262 19 340 26 295 24 619 28 415 23 466 26 250 18 337 21 926 13 333 14 937 18 611 27 055 27 076 34 217 22 917 29 116 13 988 11 806 11 009 12 634 19 460 39 348 17 380 23 919 14 841 25 050 17 080 23 466 38 738 40 249 20 835 12 493 31 277 19 812 26 661 16 902 31 682 24 472 27 500 20 790 24 052 15 610 16 481 22 250 33 347 33 320 40 097 20 000 31 498 17 578 12 172 11 250 13 112 21 170 44 680 18 346 25 970 15 992 26 505 18 539 24 472 40 470 44 443 20 850 13 558 23 750 12 146 19 282 21 443 12 596 18 045 19 896 12 260 14 872 10 034 11 017 14 688 20 179 20 179 22 443 23 750 18 333 11 111 9 756 8 333 6 736 11 506 28 828 11 667 15 781 8 684 18 636 10 653 13 558 34 271 25 455 100 689 49 581 3 487 47 621 3 604 9 054 618 12 139 20 154 2 831 5 184 2 536 3 177 358 2 457 2 460 1 734 51 5 908 1 049 3 990 2 941 2 646 5 461 6 370 4 814 11 843 7 169 4 645 7 789 9 054 170 1 320 27 334 16 686 523 10 125 507 2 191 120 3 255 5 170 810 1 105 1 030 1 215 84 309 309 223 10 901 376 2 021 1 645 1 295 1 659 569 1 840 3 022 3 273 1 197 2 926 2 191 10 87 27.1 33.7 15.0 21.3 14.1 24.2 19.4 26.8 25.7 28.6 21.3 40.6 38.2 23.5 12.6 12.6 12.9 19.6 15.3 35.8 50.7 55.9 48.9 30.4 8.9 38.2 25.5 45.7 25.8 37.6 24.2 5.9 6.6 12 722 7 917 196 4 609 189 1 198 59 1 434 2 297 418 445 414 490 28 107 107 50 2 353 150 1 015 865 676 763 136 903 1 420 1 713 589 1 374 1 198 1 35 36.6 43.1 20.9 29.7 16.2 33.9 30.9 36.1 33.9 37.1 26.5 48.2 46.6 31.8 16.6 16.5 14.1 18.2 20.0 46.9 63.2 67.3 57.3 36.9 9.5 48.4 34.3 55.8 37.0 45.2 33.9 7.1 8.6 9 264 5 832 132 3 300 151 880 37 1 033 1 615 298 284 285 345 16 79 79 37 257 116 755 639 503 584 97 667 1 010 1 243 421 1 040 880 1 29 36.0 42.6 19.9 29.0 16.8 33.4 27.0 35.4 32.9 36.5 24.2 47.1 45.9 32.0 16.9 16.8 13.8 19.6 47.5 63.4 67.5 56.8 37.6 9.3 48.9 33.2 54.5 36.6 44.1 33.4 9.1 9.2 1 956 30.8 5 349 1 066 35.7 46 21 .6 844 26.8 50 114 5 374 530 58 98 98 118 6 34 34 24 1 66 26 109 83 69 110 73 104 211 145 50 195 114 20.2 24.4 20.8 32.3 31.6 31.5 29.3 45.4 42.9 15.4 23.8 23.8 14.1 14.3 19.7 35.6 40.8 42.8 56.6 37.0 18.7 40.3 29.2 50.0 25.8 42.6 24.4 18.6 103 416 26 653 1 031 166 212 207 247 15 46 46 45 2 165 67 397 330 267 310 88 366 608 639 233 593 416 1 18 23.2 3 308 29.5 89 11.6 1 952 17.7 12.1 20.6 17.8 23.6 22.2 25.7 17.2 38.1 35.7 19.5 8.6 8.6 9.6 20.0 11.8 31.8 46.8 51.8 45.0 25.6 5.6 33.8 22.3 41.0 22.4 33.6 20.6 2.0 5.4 10 VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS Table 11. Structural, Plumbing, and Equipment Characteristics: 1990 [For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text] All housing units Percent Virgin Islands Island Year structure built Bedrooms Condominium Lacking com- plete plumbing facilities With public water system only With public sewer Census Subdistrict Place 1980 to March 1990 1939 or earlier None or 1 4 or more Lacking complete kitchen facilities Virgin Islands 39 290 18 937 1 378 3 1 378 1 032 1 143 1 493 501 992 2 242 1 724 811 4 759 2 344 2 476 1 920 326 199 1 367 1 366 28 18 433 7 648 4 741 951 1 956 2 647 3 149 1 759 2 542 2 542 165 523 26.8 26.3 18.7 14.9 9.9 43.5 22.4 4.0 31.7 29.6 22.8 13.9 21.8 43.2 23.7 52.1 60.4 44.2 52.0 52.0 17.9 24.5 16.5 15.0 14.1 21.4 35.6 37.0 34.5 12.6 12.6 24.2 35.8 5.9 5.2 4.2 15.5 19.2 2.4 23.0 55.1 6.8 3.1 3.9 1.0 1.6 4.8 .8 2.8 2.5 9.0 1.7 1.7 17.9 6.9 15.6 24.8 1.0 .5 1.2 .8 3.0 26.1 21.5 17.9 33.3 29.8 34.7 19.2 34.6 46.3 28.6 15.6 20.4 14.2 23.6 17.6 17.5 42.4 42.0 41.2 42.9 43.0 32.1 29.1 34.6 37.0 23.6 34.1 33.5 31.8 23.8 10.7 10.7 31.5 18.4 10.5 10.8 12.0 33.3 7.1 7.2 14.1 8.6 7.8 9.0 9.1 8.9 9.5 12.7 10.6 11.0 5.4 3.7 6.5 5.6 5.6 7.1 10.8 7.0 7.1 9.8 5.4 10.4 8.5 14.3 23.1 23.1 6.7 11.5 7.7 7.0 7.1 7.0 15.7 4.0 1.9 .2 13.6 3.4 3.8 12.0 .6 16.8 16.8 7.9 2.8 2.3 5.4 18.1 15.0 7.6 6.5 6.5 6.0 6.4 2.0 4.2 3.9 1.4 8.4 16.2 4.4 10.3 11.6 5.8 5.1 8.4 4.6 10.4 12.0 27.6 7.5 7.5 14.3 5.2 6.1 6.7 8.7 3.4 4.3 2.6 13.4 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.9 20.7 25.1 3.6 33.3 44.3 48.4 .9 61.0 57.5 62.8 23.9 14.1 12.3 24.1 30.4 21.6 .1 .1 .1 18.4 31.6 30.1 32.7 34.5 .6 1.5 18.8 22.0 22.0 10.9 1.0 50.2 46.6 32.2 66.7 93.5 95.5 15.0 77.4 91.6 70.2 43.3 37.4 65.6 51.0 36.9 34.2 19.5 25.8 1.5 21.1 21.1 57.1 88.6 91.4 92.4 80.0 15.6 11.5 53.0 76.4 76.4 19.3 6.0 6.0 2.8 4.9 Christionsted town (pt.) East End subdistrict 6.2 3.1 Frederiksted subdistrict 9.3 Frederiksted town 20.0 Frederiksted Southeast COP 3.9 10.6 Northwest subdistrict 10.2 Grove Place CDP 6.2 Sion Farm subdistrict 3.5 6.9 4.6 St. John Island 10.2 Central subdistrict 10.4 Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) . _ Coral Bay subdistrict 29.6 Cruz Bay subdistrict 7.4 Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) 7.4 East End subdistrict 7.1 5.6 7.7 9.4 Charlotte Amalie East CDP 5.5 Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) East End subdistrict . 4.6 4.8 Northside subdistrict 2.7 Southside subdistrict 10.1 Tutu subdistrict 1.7 Anna's Retreat CDP 1.7 Water Island subdistrict .6 Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) 1.9 SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES 1 1 Table 12. Structural, Plumbing, and Equipment Characteristics: 1990 [For definitions of terms ond meonings of symbols, see text] Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict and Place All housing units Percent Yeor structure built 1980 to Morch 1990 1939 or earlier Bedrooms None or 1 4 or more Lacking com- With public plete plumbing water system Condominium facilities only With public Lacking complete sewer kitchen facilities Virgin Islands ISLAND St. Croix Island St. John Island St. Thomas Island CENSUS SUBDISTRICT AND PLACE Anna's Hope Village subdistrict, St. Croix Island Anna's Retreat CDP, St. Thomas Island .. Central subdistrict, St. John Island Charlotte Amalie town, St. Thomas Island Charlotte Amalie subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Charlotte Amalie East COP, St. Thomos Island Charlotte Amalie West CDP, St. Thomas Island Christiansted town, St. Croix Island Christiansted subdistrict, St. Croix Island .. Coral Bay subdistrict, St. John Island Cruz Bay CDP, St. John Island Cruz Bay subdistrict, St. John Island East End subdistrict, St. Croix Island East End subdistrict, St. John Island East End subdistrict, St. Thomos Island Frederiksted town, St. Croix Island Frederiksted subdistrict, St. Croix Island... Frederiksted Southeast CDP, St. Croix Island Grove Place CDP, St. Croix Island Northcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island... Northside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ... Northwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island Sion Farm subdistrict, St. Croix Island Southcenrrol subdistrict, St. Croix Island... Southside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Southwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island Tutu subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Water Island subdistrict, St. Thomas Island West End subdistrict, St. Thomos Island ... 39 290 18 937 1 920 18 433 1 378 2 542 326 4 741 7 648 951 1 956 1 035 1 378 199 1 366 1 367 1 143 28 2 647 501 1 493 992 811 2 242 3 149 1 724 4 759 2 344 1 759 2 476 2 542 165 523 26.8 26.3 52.1 24.5 18.7 12.6 60.4 15.0 16.5 14.1 21.4 9.9 14.9 44.2 52.0 52.0 43.5 17.9 35.6 4.0 22.4 31.7 13.9 29.6 37.0 22.8 21.8 43.2 34.5 23.7 12.6 24.2 35.8 5.9 4.2 2.5 24.8 15.6 1.0 19.1 15.5 9.0 1.7 1.7 2.4 17.9 .5 55.1 23.0 6.8 1.0 3.1 1.2 3.9 1.6 4.8 3.0 26.1 21.5 42.4 29.1 17.9 10.7 42.0 37.0 34.6 23.6 34.1 34.7 29.8 41.2 43.0 42.9 19.2 32.1 33.5 46.3 34.6 28.6 14.2 15.6 31.8 20.4 23.6 17.6 23.8 17.5 10.7 31.5 18.4 10.5 10.8 5.4 10.8 12.0 23.1 3.7 7.1 7.0 9.8 5.4 7.2 7.1 6.5 5.6 5.6 14.1 7.1 10.4 7.8 8.6 9.0 9.5 9.1 8.5 8.9 12.7 10.6 14.3 11.0 23.1 6.7 11.5 7.7 7.0 12.0 7.9 7.1 6.5 .6 2.3 2.8 5.4 7.0 16.8 16.8 15.7 18.1 .2 4.0 15.0 1.9 13.6 3.4 7.6 3.8 6.5 6.0 6.4 10.4 5.2 2.0 1.8 12.0 6.7 6.1 8.7 3.4 3.9 4.2 27.6 7.5 7.5 1.4 14.3 4.3 16.2 8.4 4.4 5.8 10.3 2.6 11.6 5.1 8.4 13.4 4.6 1.8 1.8 1.9 20.7 25.1 .1 18.4 3.6 22.0 30.1 31.6 32.7 34.5 48.3 44.3 .1 .1 .9 .6 57.5 61.0 62.8 12.3 23.9 1.5 14.1 24.1 30.4 18.8 21.6 22.0 10.9 1.0 50.2 46.6 19.5 57.1 32.2 76.4 25.8 91.4 88.6 92.4 80.0 95.5 93.5 1.5 21.1 21.1 15.0 15.6 91.6 77.4 70.2 65.6 43.3 11.5 37.4 51.0 36.9 53.0 34.2 76.4 19.3 6.0 6.0 10.2 5.6 2.8 1.7 10.4 9.4 7.7 5.5 4.6 6.2 4.9 29.6 7.4 7.4 3.1 7.1 4.8 20.0 9.3 3.9 6.2 10.6 2.7 10.2 3.5 6.9 10.1 4.6 1.7 .6 1.9 12 VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS Table 13. Fuels and Equipment Characteristics: 1990 (For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text] Virgin Islands Island All occupied housing units Percent with— Cooking fuel Water pur- chased from a vendor Vehicles available Census Subdistrict Place Gas Fuel oil, Electricity sene kero- , etc. Other or none None 1 2 or more No telephone in unit Virgin Islands St. Croix Island 32 020 15 045 1 164 3 1 101 B61 698 1 256 411 845 1 560 1 466 734 3 647 1 963 2 190 1 330 259 134 918 917 19 15 645 6 771 4 178 842 1 751 1 936 2 550 1 461 2 404 2 404 86 437 65.2 69.0 70.4 100.0 74.4 77.7 56.9 69.3 65.5 71.2 82.2 51.2 26.4 60.5 69.8 84.9 78.7 69.5 83.6 80.5 80.5 84.2 60.4 66.5 65.6 73.4 65.6 67.6 56.3 45.7 53.0 53.0 26.7 54.2 32.9 29.2 28.6 22.3 18.1 41.8 28.0 30.2 27.0 15.3 46.0 72.1 38.5 28.7 13.5 18.1 27.0 11.9 16.6 16.6 15.8 37.7 30.7 31.1 25.7 31.9 30.3 42.7 53.0 46.5 46.5 73.3 44.9 .3 .3 .1 .5 .7 .1 .2 .2 .3 .4 .4 .2 .4 .2 1.1 1.5 1.2 1.2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .2 .1 .2 .2 1.6 1.5 .9 2.8 3.5 1.1 2.5 4.4 1.5 2.2 2.4 1.1 .9 1.2 1.3 2.0 1.9 4.5 1.7 1.7 1.5 2.4 2.8 1.0 1.9 1.3 .9 1.2 .3 .3 .9 32.3 33.3 50.9 22.7 24.3 51.3 20.9 10.7 25.8 30.6 25.3 18.1 40.6 29.7 28.7 33.8 12.4 30.6 40.8 40.9 10.5 31.3 27.2 26.3 39.3 23.6 43.1 38.2 35.5 24.3 24.3 15.1 28.1 26.8 26.0 9.7 33.3 42.4 48.0 4.3 48.5 50.1 47.7 21.7 30.9 43.5 20.3 32.3 23.8 25.6 22.8 21.6 27.3 27.4 5.3 27.7 42.9 48.1 40.4 32.0 16.3 6.6 24.0 22.1 22.1 30.2 6.6 43.7 42.8 42.1 66.7 41.8 39.3 38.5 38.0 39.4 37.3 43.8 42.3 41.6 42.6 43.0 47.3 50.1 49.4 47.8 50.5 50.5 52.6 44.1 40.9 38.9 42.5 44.8 44.9 47.1 44.4 48.8 48.8 39.5 47.6 29.5 31.3 48.2 15.8 12.8 57.2 13.5 10.5 15.0 34.5 26.8 15.0 37.1 24.6 28.9 24.4 27.8 30.6 22.1 22.1 42.1 28.2 16.2 13.1 17.1 23.2 38.8 46.4 31.6 29.1 29.1 30.2 45.8 18.5 22.1 Anna's Hope Village subdistrict 12.2 Christiansted town (pt.) Christiansted subdistrict 31.6 Christiansted town (pt.) East End subdistrict 35.2 11.7 Frederiksted subdistrict 35.7 36.0 Frederiksted Southeast CDP 35.5 Northcentral subdistrict 20.1 19.4 Grove Place CDP 15.9 20.0 Christiansted town (pt.) 28.6 18.8 20.7 Central subdistrict 27.0 Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) Coral Bay subdistrict 22.4 18.5 Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) 18.5 26.3 14.9 19.3 20.4 Charlotte Amalie East CDP 18.4 Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) 17.2 14.3 Northside subdistrict 10.4 Southside subdistrict 15.7 8.7 Anna's Retreat CDP 8.7 Water Island subdistrict 15.1 Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) 6.2 SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES 13 Table 14. Fuels and Equipment Characteristics: 1990 [For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text] Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict and Place All occupied housing units Percent with— Cooking fuel Gas Electricity Fuel oil, kero- sene, etc. Other or none Water pur- chased from a vendor Vehicles available None 2 or more No telephone in unit Virgin Islands ISLAND St. Croix Island St. John Island St. Thomas Island CENSUS SUBDISTRICT AND PLACE Anna's Hope Village subdistrict, St. Croix Island Anna's Retreat CDP, St. Thomas Island ... Central subdistrict, St. John Island Charlotte Amalie town, St. Thomas Island . Charlotte Amalie subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Charlotte Amalie East CDP, St. Thomas Island Charlotte Amalie West CDP, St. Thomas Island ;. Christiansted town, St. Croix Island Christiansted subdistrict, St. Croix Island .. Coral Boy subdistrict, St. John Island Cruz Bay CDP, St. John Island Cruz Bay subdistrict, St. John Island East End subdistrict, St. Croix Island East End subdistrict, St. John Island East End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Frederiksted town, St. Croix Island Frederiksted subdistrict, St. Croix Island... Frederiksted Southeast CDP, St. Croix Island Grove Place CDP, St. Croix Island Northcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island... Northside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island ... Northwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island Sion Farm subdistrict, St. Croix Island Southcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island... Southside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Southwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island Tutu subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Water Island subdistrict, St. Thomas Island West End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island... 32 020 15 045 1 330 15 645 1 164 2 404 259 4 178 6 771 842 1 751 864 1 101 134 917 918 698 19 1 936 411 1 256 845 734 1 560 2 550 1 466 3 647 1 963 1 461 2 190 2 404 86 437 65.2 69.0 78.7 60.4 70.4 53.0 69.5 65.6 66.5 73.4 65.6 77.8 74.4 83.6 80.5 80.5 56.9 84.2 67.6 65.5 69.3 71.2 26.4 82.2 56.3 51.2 60.5 69.8 45.7 84.9 53.0 26.7 54.2 32.9 29.2 18.1 37.7 28.6 46.5 27.0 31.1 30.7 25.7 31.9 18.1 22.3 11.9 16.6 16.6 41.8 15.8 30.3 30.2 28.0 27.0 72.1 15.3 42.7 46.0 38.5 28.7 53.0 13.5 46.5 73.3 44.9 .3 1.1 .3 .1 .2 1.5 .5 1.2 1.2 .1 1.6 .9 .3 1.9 2.8 2.4 1.0 1.9 3.5 2.8 4.5 1.7 1.7 1.1 1.3 4.4 2.5 1.5 1.1 2.2 .9 2.4 .9 1.2 1.2 1.3 .3 32.3 33.3 33.8 31.3 50.9 24.3 12.4 26.3 27.2 39.3 23.6 24.2 22.7 30.6 40.9 40.8 51.3 10.5 43.1 10.7 20.9 25.8 18.1 30.6 38.2 25.3 40.6 29.7 35.5 28.7 24.3 15.1 28.1 26.8 26.0 25.6 27.7 9.7 22.1 22.8 48.1 42.9 40.4 32.0 47.9 42.4 21.6 27.4 27.3 4.3 5.3 16.3 50.1 48.5 47.7 43.5 21.7 6.6 30.9 20.3 32.3 24.0 23.8 22.1 30.2 6.6 43.7 42.8 50.1 44.1 42.1 48.8 49.4 38.9 40.9 42.5 44.8 39.4 41.8 47.8 50.5 50.5 38.5 52.6 44.9 39.4 38.0 37.3 41.6 43.8 47.1 42.3 42.6 43.0 44.4 47.3 48.8 39.5 47.6 29.5 31.3 24.4 28.2 48.2 29.1 27.8 13.1 16.2 17.1 23.2 12.7 15.8 30.6 22.1 22.1 57.2 42.1 38.8 10.5 13.5 15.0 15.0 34.5 46.4 26.8 37.1 24.6 31.6 28.9 29.1 30.2 45.8 18.5 22.1 20.7 14.9 12.2 8.7 27.0 20.4 19.3 18.4 17.2 35.1 31.6 22.4 18.5 18.5 11.7 26.3 14.3 36.0 35.7 35.5 15.9 20.1 10.4 19.4 20.0 28.6 15.7 18.8 8.7 15.1 6.2 14 VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS Table 15. Homeowner and Renter Characteristics: 1990 [For definitions of terms ond meanings of symbols, see text] All owner-occupied housing units Specified owner-occupied housing units All renter-occupied housing units Virgin Islands Total Percent with house- holder moved into unit— With a mortgage Not mortgaged Total Percent with house- holder moved into unit— Specified renter paying cash rent Island Census Subdistrict Place 1989 to March 1969 or 1990 earlier Total Median selected monthly owner costs (dollars) Median selected monthly owner costs as a percent- age of household income in 1989 Total Median selected monthly owner costs (dollars) Median selected monthly owner costs as a percent- age of household income in 1989 1989 to March 1969 or 1990 earlier Median gross rent (dol- lars) Median gross rent as a per- centage of household income in 1989 Virgin Islands St. Croix Island 14 272 7 271 800 2 228 150 450 295 65 230 957 589 188 1 960 740 1 252 604 103 79 412 412 10 6 397 1 867 1 146 165 556 1 on 1 324 558 1 279 1 279 38 320 10.3 23.3 10.8 20.1 7.4 18.1 100.0 12.7 50.9 12.7 52.7 21.8 14.9 7.8 39.3 6.2 53.8 8.3 35.2 8.4 20.4 13.1 23.3 10.6 26.6 9.9 18.8 13.5 17.7 10.1 15.2 9.1 22.5 11.7 10.7 11.4 36.7 8.3 22.8 8.3 22.8 20.0 9.9 26.9 9.4 45.5 10.0 52.9 4.2 34.5 9.7 33.6 12.2 20.3 13.8 15.9 12.9 23.8 3.0 21.8 3.0 21.8 10.5 18.4 10.9 11.3 5 512 2 794 343 44 27 168 79 7 72 341 169 46 880 242 528 134 21 16 96 96 1 2 584 372 217 21 134 301 564 233 930 930 1 183 411 356 396 440 450 673 357 375 355 289 395 383 353 358 301 667 638 633 700 700 850 488 490 485 517 491 611 857 532 327 327 750 535 16.8 16.1 16.0 19.5 18.0 22.1 15.0 17.5 14.8 14.4 16.8 16.4 15.5 18.4 16.0 18.2 16.2 16.7 19.0 19.0 17.5 20.7 21.5 16.7 20.3 20.8 22.6 17.6 14.2 14.2 22.5 15.1 5 628 3 545 343 2 100 71 186 164 32 132 523 334 118 804 451 640 267 56 52 151 151 8 1 816 639 480 15 144 345 355 147 231 231 34 65 100- 100- 100- 100 100- 100- 138 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 119 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 10.5 10.4 10.5 10.0 11.2 11.0 10.9 10.3 10.8 10.3 10.2 10.7 10.8 10.4 10.4 10.3 10.4 10.2 10.3 10.6 10.6 10.0 10.6 10.6 10.6 10.0 10.6 10.5 11.0 10.4 10.9 10.9 10.0 10.3 17 748 7 774 364 1 873 711 248 961 346 615 603 877 546 1 687 1 223 938 726 156 55 506 505 9 9 248 4 904 3 032 677 1 195 925 1 226 903 1 125 1 125 48 117 33.9 3.6 37.8 3.1 52.2 1.9 31.0 5.2 27.3 5.9 66.5 2.8 35.4 5.1 38.2 2.3 33.8 6.7 38.3 7.0 26.7 2.3 14.8 1.8 46.9 2.3 38.1 1.4 27.1 1.8 45.7 2.5 53.2 1.3 34.5 3.6 44.9 2.6 44.8 2.6 33.3 11.1 29.7 4.0 23.4 6.2 22.7 7.6 18.2 1.9 28.1 4.9 45.5 1.8 49.7 2.0 32.1 1.9 18.2 .8 18.2 .8 66.7 2.1 38.5 1.7 324 240 436 90 237 224 546 197 237 175 246 157 119 331 176 204 412 311 363 438 438 325 386 340 311 357 391 498 664 354 287 287 525 541 21.1 18.7 Anna's Hope Village subdistrict Christiansted town (pt.) 19.8 22.5 19.2 19.1 22.3 Frederiksted subdistrict 20.4 Frederiksted town 19.6 Frederiksted Southeast CDP 21.1 18.1 15.6 15.0 Sion Farm subdistrict 19.6 Christiansted town (pt.) 17.1 20.4 St. John Island 22.4 18.8 Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) __ Coral Bay subdistrict 18.5 Cruz Bay subdistrict 23.8 Cruz Bay CDP (pt.) 23.8 20.0 22.5 22.4 21.5 Charlotte Amalie East CDP 24.1 Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) East End subdistrict 23.4 23.7 Northside subdistrict 24.3 21.6 Tutu subdistrict 21.4 Anna's Retreat CDP 21.4 Water Island subdistrict 20.3 Charlotte Amalie West CDP (pt.) West End subdistrict 22.2 SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES 15 Table 16. Homeowner and Renter Characteristics: 1990 [For definitions of terms and meanings of symbols, see text] Virgin Islands Island Census Subdistrict and Place AH owner-occupied housing units Total Percent with house- holder moved into unit— 1989 to March 1990 1969 or earlier Specified owner-occupied housing units With a mortgage Median selected monthly owner Median costs as selected a percent- monthly age of owner household costs income in tal (dollars) 1989 Total Not mortgaged Median selected monthly owner Median costs as selected a percent- monthly age of owner household costs income in ol (dollars) 1989 All renter-occupied housing units Total Percent with house- holder moved into unit 1989 to March 1990 1969 or earlier Specified renter paying cash rent Median gross rent (dol- lars) Median gross rent as a per- centage of household income in 1989 Virgin Islands ISLAND St. Croix Island St. John Island St. Thomas Island CENSUS SUBDISTRICT AND PLACE Anna's Hope Village subdistrict, St. Croix Island Anna's Retreat CDP, St. Thomas Island ... Central subdistrict, St. John Island Charlotte Amalie town, St. Thomas Island Charlotte Amalie subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Charlotte Amalie East CDP, St. Thomas Island Charlotte Amalie West COP, St. Thomas Island Christiansted town, St. Croix Island Christiansted subdistrict, St. Croix Island ., Coral Bay subdistrict, St. John Island Cruz Bay CDP, St. John Island Cruz Bay subdistrict, St. John Island East End subdistrict, St. Croix Island East End subdistrict, St. John Island East End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Frederiksted town, St. Croix Island Frederiksted subdistrict, St. Croix Island... Frederiksted Southeast CDP, St. Croix Island Grove Place CDP, St. Croix Island Northcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island.. Northside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island .. Northwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island Sion Farm subdistrict, St. Croix Island Southcentral subdistrict, St. Croix Island.. Southside subdistrict, St. Thomas Island... Southwest subdistrict, St. Croix Island Tutu subdistrict, St. Thomas Island Water Island subdistrict, St. Thomas Island West End subdistrict, St. Thomas Island... 14 272 7 271 604 6 397 800 1 279 103 1 146 1 867 165 556 152 228 79 412 412 450 10 1 Oil 65 295 230 188 957 1 324 589 1 960 740 558 1 252 1 279 38 320 10.3 10.8 9.1 9.9 7.4 3.0 11.7 10.0 9.4 4.2 9.7 12.5 12.7 11.4 8.3 8.3 21.8 12.2 6.2 7.8 8.3 10.6 8.4 13.8 13.1 9.9 13.5 12.9 10.1 3.0 10.5 10.9 23.3 20.1 22.5 26.9 18.1 21.8 10.7 52.9 45.5 34.5 33.6 53.3 50.9 36.7 22.8 22.8 14.9 20.0 20.3 53.8 39.3 35.2 26.6 20.4 15.9 23.3 18.8 17.7 23.8 15.2 21.8 18.4 11.3 5 512 2 794 134 2 584 372 356 667 488 490 517 16.8 16.1 18.2 17.5 343 396 16.0 930 327 14.2 21 638 16.2 217 485 21.5 20.7 16.7 134 491 20.3 27 450 18.0 44 440 19.5 16 633 16.7 96 700 19.0 96 700 19.0 168 673 22.1 1 850 _ 301 611 20.8 7 375 17.5 79 357 15.0 72 355 14.8 46 383 16.4 341 289 14.4 564 857 22.6 169 395 16.8 880 353 15.5 242 358 18.4 233 532 17.6 528 30! 16.0 930 327 14.2 1 750 22.5 183 535 15.1 5 628 3 545 267 1 816 343 231 56 480 639 144 73 100 52 151 151 186 8 345 32 164 132 118 523 355 334 804 451 147 640 231 34 65 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 138 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 119 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 100- 10.5 10.4 10.4 10.6 10.5 10.9 10.2 10.6 10.6 10.0 10.6 11.0 11.2 10.3 10.6 10.6 10.9 10.0 10.5 10.8 10.3 10.3 10.8 10.2 11.0 10.7 10.4 10.4 10.4 10.3 10.9 10.0 10.3 17 748 7 774 726 9 248 364 1 125 156 3 032 4 904 677 1 195 712 873 55 505 506 248 9 925 346 961 615 546 603 1 226 877 1 687 1 223 903 938 1 125 48 117 33.9 37.8 45.7 29.7 52.2 18.2 53.2 22.7 23.4 18.2 28.1 27.2 31.0 34.5 44.8 44.9 66.5 33.3 45.5 38.2 35.4 33.8 14.8 38.3 49.7 26.7 46.9 38.1 32.1 27.1 18.2 66.7 38.5 3.6 3.1 2.5 4.0 1.9 .8 1.3 7.6 6.2 1.9 4.9 5.9 5.2 3.6 2.6 2.6 2.8 11.1 1.8 2.3 5.1 6.7 1.8 7.0 2.0 2.3 2.3 1.4 1.9 1.8 .8 2.1 1.7 324 436 287 311 311 340 357 391 224 237 363 438 438 546 325 498 237 197 175 119 246 664 157 331 176 354 204 287 525 541 21.1 240 18.7 412 22.4 386 22.5 19.8 21.4 18.8 21.5 22.4 24.1 23.4 19.1 19.2 18.5 23.8 23.8 22.3 20.0 23.7 19.6 20.4 21.1 15.0 18.1 24.3 15.6 19.6 17.1 21.6 20.4 21.4 20.3 22.2 16 VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES SUMMARY SOCIAL, ECONOMIC, AND HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS APPENDIX A. Area Classifications CONTENTS Area Measurement A-1 Block A-2 Block Group (BG) A-2 Block Numbering Area (BNA) A-2 Boundary Changes A-2 Census Block (See Block) Census Code (See Geographic Code) Census Designated Place (CDP) (See Place) Census Geographic Code (See Geographic Code) Census Region and Census Division A-2 Census Subdlstrict (See Island Subdivision) Congressional District A-2 County (See Island) County Subdivision (See Island Subdivision) Crews of Vessels (See Area Measurement, see Block, see Block Numbering Area) Farm (See Urban and Rural) Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) Code (See Geographic Code) Geographic Block Group (See Block Group) Geographic Code A-3 Geographic Presentation A-3 Hierarchical Presentation (See Geographic Presentation) Historical Counts A-3 Incorporated Place (See Place) Internal Point A-4 Inventory Presentation (See Geographic Presentation) Island A-4 Island Subdivision A-4 Land Area (See Area Measurement) Latitude (See Internal Point) Longitude (See Internal Point) Minor Civil Division (See Island Subdivision) Outlying Areas of the United States (See State, see United States) Place A-4 Population or Housing Unit Density A-4 Rural (See Urban and Rural) State A-4 Tabulation Block Group (See Block Group) TIGER A-5 Town (See Place) United States A-5 United States Postal Service (USPS) Code (See Geographic Code) Urban and Rural A-5 Virgin Islands (See State) Water Area (See Area Measurement) These definitions are for all geographic entities and concepts that the Census Bureau will include in its stand- ard 1 990 census data products for the Virgin Islands of the United States (Virgin Islands). Not all entities and concepts are shown in any one 1990 census data product. For a description of geographic areas included in each data product, see appendix F. AREA MEASUREMENT Area measurements provide the size, in square kilome- ters (also in square miles in printed reports), recorded for each geographic entity for which the Census Bureau AREA CLASSIFICATIONS tabulates data in general-purpose data products (except crews-of-vessels entities). (Square kilometers may be divided by 2.59 to convert an area measurement to square miles.) Area was calculated from the specific set of boundaries recorded for the entity in the Census Bureau's geographic data base (see "TIGER"). On machine-readable files, area measurements are shown to three decimal places; the decimal point is implied. In printed reports and listings, area measurements are shown to one decimal. The Census Bureau provides measurements for both land area and total water area for the 1 990 census; the water figure for the Virgin Islands includes inland, coastal, and territorial water. (For the 1980 census, the Census Bureau provided area measurements for land and inland water.) The Census Bureau will provide measurements for the component types of water for the affected entities in a separate file. "Inland water" consists of any lake, reser- voir, pond, or similar body of water that is recorded in the Census Bureau's geographic data base. It also includes any river, creek, canal, stream, or similar feature that is recorded in that data base as a two-dimensional feature (rather than as a single line). The portions of the ocean, related large embayments, and the Caribbean Sea that belong to the United States and its territories are consid- ered to be "coastal" and "territorial" waters. Streams and bays that empty into these bodies of water are treated as "inland water" from the point beyond which they are narrower than one nautical mile across. Identification of land and inland, coastal, and territorial waters is for statis- tical purposes, and does not necessarily reflect legal definitions thereof. By definition, census blocks do not include water within their boundaries; therefore, the water area of a block is always zero. Land area measurements may disagree with the information displayed on census maps and in the TIGER File because, for area measurement purposes, features identified as "intermittent water" are reported as land area. For this reason, it may not be possible to derive the land area for an entity by summing the land area of its component census blocks. In addition, the water area measurement reported for some geographic entities includes water that is not included in any lower-level geographic entity. Therefore, because water is contained only in a higher-level geographic entity, summing the water mea- surements for all the component lower-level geographic entities will not yield the water area of that higher-level entity. This occurs, for example, where water is associated with an island subdivision but is not assigned to any block A-1 numbering area. Crews-of-vessels entities (see "Block Numbering Area" and "Block") do not encompass territory and therefore have no area measurements. The accuracy of any area measurement figure is limited by the inaccuracy inherent in (1) the location and shape of the various boundary features in the data base, and (2) rounding affecting the last digit in all operations that compute and/or sum the area measurements. BLOCK Census blocks are small areas bounded on all sides by visible features such as streets, roads, and streams, and by invisible boundaries such as town limits, property lines, and short, imaginary extensions of streets and roads. Tabulation blocks, used in census data products, are in most cases the same as collection blocks, used in the census enumeration. In some cases, collection blocks have been "split" into two or more parts required for data tabulations. Tabulation blocks do not cross the boundaries of census subdistricts, towns, or block numbering areas (BNA's). The 1990 census is the first for which the Virgin Islands is block-numbered. Blocks are numbered uniquely within each BNA. A block is identified by a three-digit number, sometimes with a single alphabetical suffix. Block numbers with suffixes generally represent collection blocks that were "split" in order to identify separate geographic entities that divide the original block. For example, when a town limit runs through data collection block 101, the data for the portion inside the town is tabulated in block 101 A and the portion outside, in block 101B. A block number with the suffix "Z" represents a crews-of-vessels entity for which the Census Bureau tabulates data, but that does not represent a true geographic area; such a block is shown on census maps associated with an anchor symbol and a BNA with a .99 suffix. Some block group records may not have any block numbers associated with them; this occurs where the entire area of the block group consists only of water. BLOCK GROUP (BG) Geographic Block Group A geographic block group (BG) is a cluster of blocks having the same first digit of their identifying numbers within a block numbering area (BNA). For example, BG 3 within a BNA includes all blocks numbered between 301 and 397. In most cases, the numbering involves substan- tially fewer than 97 blocks. Geographic BG's never cross BNA boundaries, but may cross the boundaries of census subdistricts and places. BG's in the Virgin Islands were structured to generally contain approximately 200 housing units. Local officials delineated BG's for the 1990 census, using Census Bureau guidelines. Tabulation Block Group In the data tabulations, a geographic BG may be split to present data for every unique combination of census subdistrict and place shown in the data product; for example, if BG 3 is partly in a town and partly outside the town, there will be separate tabulated records for each portion of BG 3. BG's are used in tabulating decennial census data throughout the Virgin Islands in the 1990 census. For purposes of data presentation, BG's are a substitute for the enumeration districts (ED's) used for reporting data throughout the Virgin Islands for previous decennial censuses. BLOCK NUMBERING AREA (BNA) Block numbering areas (BNA's) are small statistical subdivisions of an island for grouping and numbering blocks in the Virgin Islands. Local officials delineated BNA's for the 1 990 census, using Census Bureau guide- lines. BNA's are identified by a four-digit basic number and may have a two-digit suffix; for example, 9901.07. The decimal point separating the four-digit basic BNA number from the two-digit suffix is shown in printed reports, in microfiche, and on census maps; in machine-readable files, the decimal point is implied. Many BNA's do not have a suffix; in such cases, the suffix field is left blank in all data products. BNA numbers range from 9501 through 9989.99, and are unique within an island. The suffix .99 identifies a BNA that was populated entirely by persons aboard one or more civilian ships. A crews-of-vessels BNA appears on census maps only as an anchor symbol with its BNA number (and block numbers on maps showing block numbers); the BNA relates to the ships associated with the onshore BNA's having the same four-digit basic number. Suffixes in the range .80 through .98 identify BNA's that either were revised or were created during the 1990 census data collection activities. Some of these revisions produced BNA's that have extremely small land area and may have little or no population or housing. For data analysis, such a BNA can be summarized with an adjacent BNA. BOUNDARY CHANGES The boundaries of some places may have changed between those reported for the 1 980 census and January 1, 1990. The historical counts shown for such places are not updated for such changes, and thus reflect the popu- lation and housing units in the area as delineated at each census. CENSUS REGION AND CENSUS DIVISION For statistical purposes, the United States is divided into four census regions, which are further subdivided into nine divisions. The Virgin Islands is not assigned to any region or division. CONGRESSIONAL DISTRICT The Virgin Islands is represented in the U.S. House of Representatives by a nonvoting delegate. A-2 AREA CLASSIFICATIONS GEOGRAPHIC CODE Geographic codes are shown primarily on machine- readable data products, such as computer tape and com- pact disc-read only memory (CD-ROM), but also appear on other products such as microfiche; they also are shown on some census maps. Codes are identified as "census codes" only if there also is a Federal Information Process- ing Standards (FIPS) code for the same geographic entity. A code that is not identified as either "census" or "FIPS" usually is a census code for which there is no FIPS equivalent or for which the Census Bureau does not use the FIPS code. The exceptions, which use only the FIPS code in census products, are island and congressional district. Census Code Census codes are assigned for a variety of geographic entities, including the Virgin Islands, island subdivision, and place. The structure, format, and meaning of census codes appear in the 1990 census Geographic Identification Code Scheme and in the data dictionary portion of the technical documentation for summary tape files, CD-ROM's, and microfiche. Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) Code Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) codes are assigned for a variety of geographic entities, including congressional district, county (including statistically equiv- alent entities such as the islands in the Virgin Islands), census subdistrict, place, and State (including statistically equivalent entities such as the Virgin Islands). The struc- ture, format, and meaning of FIPS codes used in the census are shown in the 1 990 census Geographic Identi- fication Code Scheme and in the data dictionary portion of the technical documentation for summary tape files, CD-ROM's, and microfiche. The objective of the FIPS codes is to improve the use of data resources of the Federal Government and avoid unnecessary duplication and incompatibilities in the collec- tion, processing, and dissemination of data. More informa- tion about FIPS and FIPS code documentation is available from the National Technical Information Service, Spring- field, VA 22161. United States Postal Service (USPS) Code The United States Postal Service (USPS) code for the Virgin Islands is used in all 1990 census data products. The code is a two-character alphabetic abbreviation: VI. The code is the same as the FIPS two-character alphabetic abbreviation. GEOGRAPHIC PRESENTATION Hierarchical Presentation A hierarchical geographic presentation shows the geo- graphic entities in a superior/subordinate structure in census products. This structure is derived from the legal, administrative, or areal relationships of the entities. The hierarchical structure is depicted in report tables by means of indentation, and is explained for machine-readable media in the discussion of file structure in the geographic coverage portion of the abstract in the technical documen- tation. An example of hierarchical presentation for the Virgin Islands is the "standard census geographic hierar- chy": block, within block group, within block numbering area, within place, within census subdistrict, within island, within the Virgin Islands. Graphically, this is shown as: Virgin Islands of the United States Island Census subdistrict Place (or part) Block numbering area (or part) Block group (or part) Block Inventory Presentation An inventory presentation of geographic entities is one in which all entities of the same type are shown in alphabetical or code sequence, without reference to their hierarchical relationships. Generally, an inventory presen- tation shows totals for entities that may be split in a hierarchical presentation, such as place, block numbering area, or block group. An example of a series of inventory presentations is: Virgin Islands, followed by the three islands, followed by all the places in the Virgin Islands. Graphically, this is shown as: Virgin Islands of the United States Island "A" Island "B" Island "C" Place "X" Place "Y" Place "Z" HISTORICAL COUNTS Historical counts for total population and total housing units are shown in the 1990 CPH-2, Population and Housing Unit Counts report series. As in past censuses, the general rule for presenting historical data is to show historical counts only for single, continually existing enti- ties. Stated another way, if an entity existed for both the current and preceding censuses, the tables show counts for the preceding censuses. Included in this category are entities of the same type (island, island subdivision, place) even if they had changed their names. The historical counts shown are for each entity as it was bounded at each census. In cases where an entity was formed since a preceding census, such as a new place, the symbol three dots "..." is shown for earlier censuses. The three-dot symbol also is shown for those parts of a place that have extended into an additional census subdistrict since the preceding cen- sus. AREA CLASSIFICATIONS A-3 In some cases, population and housing unit counts for individual areas were revised since publication of the 1 980 reports (indicated by the prefix "r"). In a number of tables of 1 990 CPH-2, Population and Housing Unit Counts, 1 980 counts are shown for aggregations of individual areas, such as the number, population, and housing unit counts of places in size groups, or urban and rural distributions. Revisions of population and housing unit counts for indi- vidual areas were not applied to the various aggregations. Therefore, it may not be possible to determine the individ- ual areas in a given aggregation using the historical counts; conversely, the sum of the counts shown for individual areas may not agree with the aggregation. INTERNAL POINT An internal point is a set of geographic coordinates (latitude and longitude) that is located within a specified geographic entity. A single point is identified for each entity; for many entities, this point may approximate the geographic center of that entity. If the shape of the entity caused this point to be located outside the boundaries of the entity, it is relocated from the center so that it is within the entity. By definition, the internal point for a block cannot fall in a body of water. On machine-readable products, internal points are shown to six decimal places; the decimal point is implied. ISLAND The three major islands—St. Croix, St. John, and St. Thomas—serve as the primary divisions of the Virgin Islands. The Census Bureau, for statistical purposes, treats each island as the equivalent of a county in the United States. Each island is assigned a three-digit FIPS code, in alphabetical order within the Virgin Islands. ISLAND SUBDIVISION "Census subdisticts" are the primary subdivisions of the Islands for the reporting of decennial census data. The subdistricts were established by law by the Virgin Islands government in 1979 and, therefore, the Census Bureau treats them as "minor civil divisions" of the islands. Each census subdistrict is assigned a three-digit census code in alphabetical order within the island and a five-digit FIPS code in alphabetical order within the Virgin Islands. PLACE For the reporting of decennial census data, places in the Virgin Islands consist of census designated places and incorporated places. Each place is assigned a four-digit census code that is unique within the Virgin Islands. Each A-4 place also is assigned a five-digit FIPS code that is unique within the Virgin Islands. Both the census and FIPS codes are assigned based on alphabetical order within the Virgin Islands. Census Designated Place (CDP) Census designated places (CDP's) are delineated for the decennial census as the statistical counterparts of incorporated places. CDP's comprise densely settled con- centrations of population that are identifiable by name, but are not legally incorporated places. Their boundaries, which usually coincide with visible features or the boundary of an adjacent incorporated place, have no legal status, nor do these places have officials elected to serve tradi- tional municipal functions. CDP boundaries may change with changes in the settlement pattern; a CDP with the same name as in previous censuses does not necessarily have the same boundaries. Virgin Islands officials, following Census Bureau guide- lines, first identified and delineated boundaries for CDP's for the 1 980 census. In the 1 990 census, the name of each such place is followed by "CDP"; in the 1980 census, "(CDP)" was used. To qualify as a CDP for the 1 990 census, a community in the Virgin Islands must have 300 or more persons. The CDP's qualified on the basis of the population counts prepared for the 1 990 Postcensus Local Review Program. Because these counts were subject to change, a few CDP's may have final population counts lower than the required minimum. Incorporated Place The Census Bureau treats the three towns in the Virgin Islands as incorporated places because they have legally defined boundaries. However, the towns do not have their own elected officials who can levy taxes and provide municipal services. POPULATION OR HOUSING UNIT DENSITY Population or housing unit density is computed by dividing the total population or housing units of a geo- graphic unit (for example, the Virgin Islands, island, place) by its land area measured in square kilometers or square miles. Density is expressed as both "persons (or housing units) per square kilometer" and "persons (or housing units) per square mile" of land area in 1990 census printed reports. STATE States are the primary governmental divisions of the United States. The District of Columbia is treated as a statistical equivalent of a State for census purposes. The Census Bureau treats the Pacific Outlying Areas as States AREA CLASSIFICATIONS' for presenting 1990 census data. The Pacific Outlying Areas include American Samoa, Guam, the Common- wealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, the Republic of Palau, Puerto Rico, and the Virgin Islands of the United States. Each State and equivalent entity is assigned a two-digit numeric Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) code in alphabetical order by State name, followed by the outlying area names. Each State and equivalent entity also is assigned a two-digit census code. This code is assigned on the basis of the geographic sequence of each State within each census division. The first digit of the code is the code for the respective division except for Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, and the Pacific Outlying Areas, which are assigned "0" as the first digit because they are not part of any division. Each State and equivalent area also is assigned the two-letter FIPS/ United States Postal Service (USPS) code. TIGER TIGER is an acronym for the new digital (computer- readable) geographic data base that automates the map- ping and related geographic activities required to support the Census Bureau's census and survey programs. The Census Bureau developed the Topological^ Integrated Geographic Encoding and Referencing (TIGER) System to automate the geographic support processes needed to meet the major geographic needs of the 1990 census: producing the cartographic products to support data col- lection and map publication, providing the geographic structure for tabulation and publication of the collected data, assigning residential and employer addresses to their geographic location and relating those locations to the Census Bureau's geographic units, and so forth. The content of the TIGER data base is made available to the public through a variety of "TIGER Extract" files that may be obtained from the Data User Services Division, U.S. Bureau of the Census, Washington, DC 20233. UNITED STATES The United States comprises the 50 States and the District of Columbia. In addition, the Census Bureau treats the outlying areas (see "State") as statistical equivalents of States for the 1 990 census. URBAN AND RURAL The Census Bureau defines "urban" for the 1990 census of the Virgin Islands as comprising all territory, population, and housing units in places of 2,500 or more persons. Territory, population, and housing units not clas- sified as urban constitute "rural." In most data products, "rural" is divided into "places of less than 2,500" and "not in places." The "hot in places" category comprises "rural" outside incorporated and census designated places. In many data products, the term "other rural" is used; "other rural" is a residual category specific to the classification of the rural in each data product. In some data products, rural population and housing units are subdivided into "rural farm" and "rural nonfarm." "Rural farm" comprises all rural households and housing units on farms (places from which $1,000 or more of agricultural products were sold in 1989); "rural nonfarm" comprises the remaining rural. The urban and rural classification cuts across the other hierarchies; for example, there may be both urban and rural territory within any island or census subdistrict. AREA CLASSIFICATIONS A-5 APPENDIX B. Definitions of Subject Characteristics CONTENTS POPULATION CHARACTERISTICS B-2 Ability to Speak English (See Language Spoken at Home and Ability to Speak English) Actual Hours Worked Last Week (See Employment Status) Age B-2 Ancestry B-2 Carpooling (See Journey to Work) Children Ever Born (See Fertility) Citizenship B-3 Civilian Labor Force (See Employment Status) Class of Worker (See Industry, Occupation, and Class of Worker) Disability (See Mobility Limitation Status, see Self-Care Limitation Status, see Work Disability Status) Earnings in 1989 (See Income in 1989) Educational Attainment B-4 Employment Status B-5 Families (See Household Type and Relationship) Family Composition (See Household Type and Relationship) Family Income in 1989 (See Income in 1989) Family Size (See Household Type and Relationship) Family Type (See Household Type and Relationship) Farm Population (See Farm Residence under Housing Characteristics) Fertility B-6 Foreign-Born Persons (See Place of Birth) Foster Children (See Household Type and Relationship) Group Quarters B-7 Hispanic Origin B-10 Household (See Household Type and Relationship) Household Income in 1989 (See income in 1989) Household Language (See Language Spoken At Home and Ability to Speak English) Household Size (See Household Type and Relationship) Household Type and Relationship B-10 Householder (See Household Type and Relationship) Income Deficit (See Poverty Status in 1989) Income in 1989 B-13 Income Type in 1989 (See Poverty Status in 1989) Industry, Occupation, and Class of Worker B-1 5 Institutionalized Persons (See Group Quarters) Journey to Work B-18 Labor Force Status (See Employment Status) Language Spoken at Home and Ability to Speak English B-1 9 Linguistic Isolation (See Language Spoken at Home and Ability to Speak English) Marital Status B-21 Married Couples (See Marital Status) Means of Transportation to Work (See Journey to Work) Migration (See Residence in 1985) Mobility Limitation Status B-22 Nativity (See Place of Birth) Noninstitutionalized Group Quarters (See Group Quarters) Occupation (See Industry, Occupation, and Class of Worker) Own Children (See Household Type and Relationship) Per Capita Income (See income in 1989) Period of Military Service (See Veteran Status) Persons in Family (See Household Type and Relationship) Persons in Households (See Household Type and Relationship) Place of Birth B-22 Place of Work (See Journey to Work) Poverty Status in 1989 B-22 Presence of Children (See Household Type and Relationship) Private Vehicle Occupancy (See Journey to Work) Race B-24 Reference Week B-25 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS Related Children (See Household Type and Relationship) Residence in 1985 B-25 School Enrollment and Labor Force Status B-26 School Enrollment and Type of School B-26 Self-Care Limitation Status B-27 Sex B-27 Spanish Origin (See Hispanic Origin) Stepfamily (See Household Type and Relationship) Subfamily (See Household Type and Relationship) Time Leaving Home to Go to Work (See Journey to Work) Travel Time to Work (See Journey to Work) Type Of School (See School Enrollment and Type of School) Usual Hours Worked Per Week Worked in 1989 (See Work Status in 1989) Veteran Status B-27 Weeks Worked in 1989 (See Work Status in 1989) Work Disability Status B-28 Work Status in 1989 B-28 Worker (See Employment Status, see Industry, Occupation, and Class of Worker, see Journey to Work, see Work Status in 1989) Workers in Family in 1989 (See Work Status in 1989) Year of Entry B-29 Years of Military Service (See Veteran Status) HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS B-30 Acreage B-30 Age Of Structure (See Year Structure Built) Agricultural Sales B-31 Bedrooms B-31 Boarded-Up Status B-31 Business on Property B-31 Condominium Fee B-31 Condominium Status B-32 Congregate Housing (See Meals Included in Rent) Contract Rent B-32 Cooking Fuel B-33 Crop Sales (See Agricultural Sales) Duration of Vacancy B-33 Farm Residence B-33 Gross Rent B-33 Gross Rent as a Percentage of Household Income in 1989.. B-34 Homeowner Vacancy Rate (See Vacancy Status) Housing Units (See Living Quarters) Insurance for Fire, Hazard, and Flood. B-34 Kitchen Facilities B-34 Living Quarters B-30 Meals Included in Rent B-34 Mobile Home or Boat Costs B-34 Months Vacant (See Duration of Vacancy) Mortgage Payment B-34 Mortgage Status B-35 Occupied Housing Units (See Living Quarters) Owner-Occupied Housing Units (See Tenure) Persons in Unit B-35 Persons Per Room B-35 Plumbing Facilities B-36 Poverty Status of Households in 1989 B-36 Purchase of Water From Water Vendor (See Source of Water) Real Estate Taxes B-36 Rental Vacancy Rate (See Vacancy Status) Renter-Occupied Housing Units (See Tenure) Rooms B-36 Second or Junior Mortgage Payment B-37 Selected Monthly Owner Costs B-37 Selected Monthly Owner Costs as a Percentage of Household Income in 1989 B-37 B-1 CONTENTS—Con. Sewage Disposal B-37 Source of Water B-38 Telephone in Housing Unit B-38 Tenure B-38 Type of Structure (See Units in Structure) Units in Structure B-39 Usual Home Elsewhere B-39 Utilities B-39 Vacancy Status B-39 Vacant Housing Units (See Living Quarters) Value B-40 Vehicles Available B-41 Year Householder Moved Into Unit B-41 Year Structure Built B-41 DERIVED MEASURES B-41 Interpolation B-41 Mean B-41 Median B-42 Percentages, Rates, and Ratios B-42 Quartile B-42 POPULATION CHARACTERISTICS AGE The data on age were derived from answers to ques- tionnaire item 5, which was asked of all persons. The age classification is based on the age of the person in com- pleted years as of April 1, 1990. The age response in question 5a was normally used to represent a person's age. However, when the age response was unacceptable or unavailable, a person's age was derived from an accept- able year of birth response in question 5b. Data on age are used to determine the applicability of other questions for a person and to classify other charac- teristics in census tabulations. Age data are needed to interpret most social and economic characteristics used to plan and examine many programs and policies. Therefore, age is tabulated by single years of age and by many different groupings, such as 5-year age groups. Some tabulations are shown by the age of the house- holder. These data were derived from the age responses for each householder. (For more information on house- holder, see the discussion under "Household Type and Relationship.") Median Age—This measure divides the age distribution into two equal parts: one-half of the cases falling below the median value and one-half above the value. Generally, median age is computed on the basis of more detailed age intervals than are shown in some census publications; thus, a median based on a less detailed distribution may differ slightly from a corresponding median for the same population based on a more detailed distribution. (For more information on medians, see the discussion under "Derived Measures.") Limitation of the Data—Counts in 1970 and 1980 for persons 1 00 years old and over were substantially over- stated. Improvements were made in the questionnaire design and the allocation procedures to attempt to mini- mize this problem in 1990. Review of detailed 1990 information indicated that respondents tended to provide their age as of the date of completion of the questionnaire, not their age as of April 1 , 1990. In addition, there may have been a tendency for respondents to round their age up if they were close to having a birthday. It is likely that approximately 1 percent of persons in most age groups are actually 1 year younger. For most single years of age, the misstatements are largely offsetting. The problem is most pronounced at age because persons lost to age 1 may not have been fully offset by the inclusion of babies born after April 1, 1990 and because there may have been more rounding up to age 1 to avoid reporting age as years. (Age in completed months was not collected for infants under age 1 .) The reporting of age 1 year older than age on April 1 , 1990 is likely to have been greater in areas where the census data were collected later in 1 990. The magnitude of this problem was much less in the three previous censuses where age was typically derived from respond- ent data on year of birth and quarter of birth. (For more information on the design of the age question, see the section below that discusses "Comparability.") Comparability—Age data have been collected in every census. For the first time since 1 950, the 1 990 data are not available by quarter year of age. This change was made so that coded information could be obtained for both age and year of birth. In each census since 1950, the age of a person was assigned when it was not reported. Since 1 960, assignment of unknown age has been performed by a general procedure described as "imputation." The spe- cific procedures for imputing age have been different in each census. (For more information on imputation, see Appendix C, Accuracy of the Data.) ANCESTRY The data on ancestry were derived from answers to questionnaire item 1 3, which was asked of all persons. The question was based on self-identification; the data on ancestry represent self-classification by people according to the ancestry group(s) with which they most closely identify. Ancestry refers to a person's ethnic origin or descent, "roots," or heritage or the place of birth of the person or the person's parents or ancestors before their arrival in the Virgin Islands of the United States. The intent of the ancestry question was not to measure the degree of attachment the respondent had to a partic- ular ethnicity. For example, a response of "St. Thomian" might reflect total involvement in a "St. Thomian" commu- nity or only a memory of ancestors several generations removed from the individual. B-2 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS The Census Bureau coded the responses through an edit and coding operation. The open-ended write-in ances- try item was coded into a numeric representation using a code list containing over 1 ,000 categories. The 1 990 code list reflects the results of the Census Bureau's own research and consultations with many ethnic experts. Many deci- sions were made to determine the classification of responses. These decisions affected the grouping of the tabulated data. The ancestry question allowed respondents to report one or more ancestry groups. While a large number of respondents listed a single ancestry, the majority of answers included more than one ethnic entry. Generally, only the first two responses reported were coded in 1990. If a response was in terms of a dual ancestry, for example, Dutch-British, the person was assigned two codes, in this case one for Dutch and another for British. However, in certain cases, multiple responses such as "Scotch-Irish" and "Black Dutch" were assigned a single code reflecting their status as unique groups. If a person reported one of these unique groups in addition to another group, for example, "Scotch-Irish British," resulting in three terms, that person received one code for the unique group ("Scotch-Irish") and another one for the remaining group ("British"). If a person reported "British Irish French," only British and Irish were coded. In all tabulations, when respondents provided an unac- ceptable ethnic identity (for example, an uncodeable or unintelligible response such as "multi-national," "adopted," or "I have no idea"), the answer was included in "Ancestry not reported." The tabulations on ancestry are presented using two types of data presentations—one used total persons as the base, and the other used total responses as the base. The following are categories shown in the two data pre- sentations: Presentation Based on Persons: Single Ancestries Reported—-Includes all persons who reported only one ethnic group. Included in this category are persons with multiple-term responses such as "Scotch-Irish" who are assigned a single code. Multiple Ancestries Reported—Includes all persons who reported more than one group and were assigned two ancestry codes. Ancestry Unclassified—Includes all persons who pro- vided a response that could not be assigned an ancestry code because they provided nonsensical entries or religious responses. Presentations Based on Responses: Total Ancestries Reported—Includes the total num- ber of ancestries reported and coded. If a person reported a multiple ancestry such as "French Dutch," that response was counted twice in the tabulations— once in the "French" category and again in the "Dutch" category. Thus, the sum of the counts in this type of presentation is not the total population but the total of all responses. First Ancestry Reported—Includes the first response of all persons who reported at least one codeable entry. For example, in this category, the count for "Dutch" would include all those who reported only Dutch and those who reported Dutch first and then some other group. Second Ancestry Reported—Includes the second response of all persons who reported a multiple ancestry. Thus, the count for "Dutch" in this category includes all persons who reported Dutch as the second response, regardless of the first response provided. The Census Bureau identified hundreds of ethnic groups in the 1 990 census. However, it was impossible to show information for every group in all census tabulations because of space constraints. In addition, groups identified specif- ically in the questions on race and Hispanic origin (for example, Japanese, Laotian, Mexican, Cuban, and Span- iard), in general, are not shown separately in ancestry tabulations. Limitation of the Data—Although some experts consider religious affiliation a component of ethnic identity, the ancestry question was not designed to collect any infor- mation concerning religion. The Bureau of the Census is prohibited from collecting information on religion. Thus, if a religion was given as an answer to the ancestry question, it was coded as an "Other" response. Comparability—A question on ancestry was first asked in the 1 990 census. Although there were no comparable data prior to this census, related information on ethnicity was collected through questions on parental birthplace, own birthplace, and language which were included in previous censuses. Unlike other census questions, there was no imputation for nonresponse to the ancestry question. Categories such as "Arab" and "West Indian" were included in the 1990 question to meet important data needs. The "West Indian" category excluded "Hispanic" groups such as "Puerto Rican" and "Cuban" that were identified primarily through the question on Hispanic origin. CITIZENSHIP The data on citizenship were derived from answers to questionnaire item 9, which was asked of all persons. Citizen—Persons who indicated that they were native- born and foreign-born persons who indicated that they have become naturalized. (For more information on native and foreign born, see the discussion under "Place of Birth.") DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-3 There are four categories of citizenship: (1) bom in the U.S. Virgin Islands, (2) born in the United States, Puerto Rico, Guam, or the Commonwealth of the Northern Mari- ana Islands, (3) born abroad of American parents, and (4) citizen by naturalization. Naturalized Citizen—Foreign-born persons who had completed the naturalization process at the time of the census and upon whom the rights of citizenship had been conferred. Not a Citizen—Foreign-born persons who were not citi- zens, including persons who had begun but not completed the naturalization process at the time of the census. Limitation of the Data—Evaluation studies completed after previous censuses indicated that some persons may have reported themselves as citizens although they had not yet attained the status. Comparability—Similar questions on citizenship were asked in the censuses of 1950, 1970, and 1980. In 1990, both native and foreign-born persons were asked to respond to the citizenship question. EDUCATIONAL ATTAINMENT Data on educational attainment were derived from answers to questionnaire item 12. Data are tabulated as attainment for persons 1 5 years old and over. Persons are classified according to the highest level of school com- pleted or the highest degree received. The question included instructions to report the level of the previous grade attended or the highest degree received for persons currently enrolled in school. The question included response categories which allowed persons to report completing the 12th grade without receiving a high school diploma, and which instructed respondents to report as "high school graduate(s)" persons who received either a high school diploma or the equivalent, for example, passed the Test of General Educational Development (G.E.D.), and did not attend college. (On the Military Census Report question- naire, the lowest response category was "Less than 9th grade.") Interviewers were instructed that schooling completed in foreign or ungraded school systems should be reported as the equivalent level of schooling in the regular American system; that vocational certificates or diplomas from voca- tional, trade, or business schools or colleges were not to be reported unless they were college level degrees; and that honorary degrees were not to be reported. The instructions gave "medicine, dentistry, chiropractic, optom- etry, osteopathic medicine, pharmacy, podiatry, veterinary medicine, law, and theology" as examples of professional school degrees, and specifically excluded "barber school, cosmetology, or other training for a specific trade" from the professional school category. The order in which they were listed suggested that doctorate degrees were "higher" than professional school degrees, which were "higher" than master's degrees. Persons who did not report educational attainment were assigned the attainment of a person of the same age, race or Hispanic origin, and sex who resided in the same or a nearby area. Persons who filled more than one circle were edited to the highest level or degree reported. High School Graduate or Higher—Includes persons whose highest degree was a high school diploma or its equivalent, persons who attended college or pro- fessional school, and persons who received a col- lege, university, or professional degree. Persons who reported completing the 1 2th grade but not receiving a diploma are not included. Not Enrolled, Not High School Graduate—Includes persons of compulsory school attendance age or above who were not enrolled in school and were not high school graduates; these persons may be taken to be "high school dropouts." There is no restriction on when they "dropped out" of school, and they may have never attended high school. In prior censuses, "Median school years completed" was used as a summary measure of educational attain- ment. In 1990, the median can only be calculated for groups of which less than half the members have attended college. "Percent high school graduate or higher" and "Percent bachelor's degree or higher" are summary mea- sures which can be calculated from the present data and offer quite readily interpretable measures of differences between population subgroups. To make comparisons over time, "Percent high school graduate or higher" can be calculated and "Percent bachelor's degree or higher" can be approximated with data from previous censuses. Comparability—Educational attainment questions in terms of years of school completed were included on the census from 1950 to 1980. In 1950, a single question was asked on highest grade of school completed. In the censuses of 1960 through 1980, a two-part question asking highest grade of school attended and whether that grade was finished was used to construct highest grade or year of school completed. For persons who have not attended college, the response categories in the 1 990 educational attainment question should produce data which are com- parable to data on highest grade completed from earlier censuses. The response categories for persons who have attended college were modified from earlier censuses because there was some ambiguity in interpreting responses in terms of the number of years of college completed. For instance, it was not clear whether "completed the fourth year of college," "completed the senior year of college," B-4 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS and "college graduate" were synonymous. Research con- ducted shortly before the census suggests that these terms were more distinct in 1990 than in earlier decades, and this change may have threatened the ability to esti- mate the number of "college graduates" from the number of persons reported as having completed the fourth or a higher year of college. It was even more difficult to make inferences about post-baccalaureate degrees and "Asso- ciate" degrees from highest year of college completed. Thus, comparisons of post-secondary educational attain- ment in this and earlier censuses should be made with great caution. In the 1960 and subsequent censuses, persons for whom educational attainment was not reported were assigned the same attainment level as a similar person whose residence was in the same or a nearby area. In the 1950 censuses, persons for whom educational attainment was not reported were not allocated. EMPLOYMENT STATUS The data on employment status were derived from answers to questionnaire items 21 , 25, and 26, which were asked of all persons. The series of questions on employ- ment status was asked of all persons 15 years old and over and was designed to identify, in this sequence: (1) persons who worked at any time during the reference week; (2) persons who did not work during the reference week but who had jobs or businesses from which they were temporarily absent (excluding layoff); (3) persons on layoff; and (4) persons who did not work during the reference week, but who were looking for work during the last four weeks and were available for work during the reference week. (For more information, see the discussion under "Reference Week.") The employment status data shown in this and other 1990 census tabulations relate to persons 16 years old and over. Some tabulations showing employment status, however, include persons 1 5 years old. By definition, these persons are classified as "Not in Labor Force". In the 1 940, 1 950, and 1 960 censuses, employment status data were presented for persons 14 years old and over. The change in the universe was made in 1 970 to agree with the official measurement of the labor force as revised in January 1967 by the U.S. Department of Labor. The 1970 census was the last to show employment data for persons 1 4 and 1 5 years old. Employed—All civilians 1 6 years old and over who were either (1) "at work"—those who did any work at all during the reference week as paid employees, worked in their own business or profession, worked on their own farm, or worked 1 5 hours or more as unpaid workers on a family farm or in a family business; or (2) were "with a job but not at work"—those who did not work during the reference week but had jobs or businesses from which they were temporarily absent due to illness, bad weather, industrial dispute, vacation, or other personal reasons. Excluded from the employed are persons whose only activity con- sisted of work around the house or unpaid volunteer work for religious, charitable, and similar organizations; also excluded are persons on active duty in the United States Armed Forces. Unemployed—All civilians 16 years old and over are classified as unemployed if they (1) were neither "at work" nor "with a job but not at work" during the reference week, and (2) were looking for work during the last 4 weeks, and (3) were available to accept a job. Also included as unemployed are civilians who did not work at all during the reference week and were waiting to be called back to a job from which they had been laid off. Examples of job seeking activities are: • Registering at a public or private employment office • Meeting with prospective employers • Investigating possibilities for starting a professional practice or opening a business • Placing or answering advertisements • Writing letters of application • Being on a union or professional register Civilian Labor Force—Consists of persons classified as employed or unemployed in accordance with the criteria described above. Experienced Unemployed—These are unemployed per- sons who have worked at any time in the past. Experienced Civilian Labor Force—Consists of the employed and the experienced unemployed. Labor Force—All persons classified in the civilian labor force plus members of the U.S. Armed Forces (persons on active duty with the United States Army, Air Force, Navy, Marine Corps, or Coast Guard). Not in Labor Force—All persons 16 years old and over who are not classified as members of the labor force. This category consists mainly of students, housewives, retired workers, seasonal workers enumerated in an off season who were not looking for work, institutionalized persons, and persons doing only incidental unpaid family work (less than 1 5 hours during the reference week). Worker—This term appears in connection with several subjects: journey-to-work items, class of worker, weeks worked in 1989, and number of workers in family in 1989. Its meaning varies and, therefore, should be determined in each case by referring to the definition of the subject in which it appears. DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-5 Actual Hours Worked Last Week—All persons who reported working during the reference week were asked to report in questionnaire item 21b the number of hours that they worked. The statistics on hours worked pertain to the number of hours actually worked at all jobs, and do not necessarily reflect the number of hours typically or usually worked or the scheduled number of hours. The concept of "actual hours" differs from that of "usual hours" described below. The number of persons who worked only a small number of hours is probably understated since such per- sons sometimes consider themselves as not working. Respondents were asked to include overtime or extra hours worked, but to exclude lunch hours, sick leave, and vacation leave. Limitation of the Data—The census may understate the number of employed persons because persons who have irregular, casual, or unstructured jobs sometimes report themselves as not working. The number of employed persons "at work" is probably overstated in the census (and conversely, the number of employed "with a job, but not at work" is understated) since some persons on vacation or sick leave erroneously reported themselves as working. This problem has no effect on the total number of employed persons. The reference week for the employ- ment data is not the same for all persons. Since persons can change their employment status from one week to another, the lack of a uniform reference week may mean that the employment data do not reflect the reality of the employment situation of any given week. (For more infor- mation, see the discussion under "Reference Week.") Comparability—The questionnaire items and employment status concepts for the 1 990 census are essentially the same as those used in the 1980 and 1970 censuses. However, these concepts differ in many respects from those associated with the 1 950 and 1 960 censuses. Since employment data from the census are obtained from respondents in households, they differ from statistics based on reports from individual business establishments, farm enterprises, and certain government programs. Per- sons employed at more than one job are counted only once in the census and are classified according to the job at which they worked the greatest number of hours during the reference week. In statistics based on reports from business and farm establishments, persons who work for more than one establishment may be counted more than once. Moreover, some tabulations may exclude private household workers, unpaid family workers, and self-employed persons, but may include workers less than 16 years of age. An additional difference in the data arises from the fact that persons who had a job but were not at work are included with the employed in the census statistics, whereas many of these persons are likely to be excluded from employment figures based on establishment payroll reports. Furthermore, the employment status data in census tabu- lations include persons on the basis of place of residence B-6 regardless of where they work, whereas establishment data report persons at their place of work regardless of where they live. This latter consideration is particularly significant when comparing data for workers who commute between areas. Census data on actual hours worked during the refer- ence week may differ from data from other sources. The census measures hours actually worked, whereas some surveys measure hours paid for by employers. Compara- bility of census actual hours worked data may also be affected by the nature of the reference week (see "Refer- ence Week"). For several reasons, the unemployment figures of the Census Bureau may not be comparable with published figures on unemployment compensation claims. For exam- ple, figures on unemployment compensation claims may exclude persons who have exhausted their benefit rights, new workers who have not earned rights to unemployment insurance, and persons losing jobs not covered by unem- ployment insurance systems (including some workers in agriculture, domestic services, and religious organizations, and self-employed and unpaid family workers). In addition, the qualifications for drawing unemployment compensa- tion may differ from the definition of unemployment used by the Census Bureau. Persons working only a few hours during the week and persons with a job but not at work are sometimes eligible for unemployment compensation but are classified as "Employed" in the census. Differences in the geographical distribution of unemployment data arise because the place where claims are filed may not neces- sarily be the same as the place of residence of the unemployed worker. FERTILITY The data on fertility (also referred to as "children ever born") were derived from answers to questionnaire item 20, which was asked of all women 1 5 years old and over regardless of marital status. Stillbirths, stepchildren, and adopted children were excluded from the number of chil- dren ever born. Ever-married women were instructed to include all children born to them before and during their most recent marriage, children no longer living, and chil- dren away from home, as well as children who were still living in the home. Never-married women were instructed to include all children born to them. Data are most frequently presented in terms of the aggregate number of children ever born to women in the specified category and in terms of the rate per 1,000 women. For purposes of calculating the aggregate, the open-ended response category, "12 or more" is assigned a value of 13. Limitation of the Data—The user is cautioned that the data may be less complete for out-of-wedlock births than for births occurring within marriage. DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS Comparability—The wording of the question on children ever born was the same in 1990 as in 1980. In 1970, however, the question on children ever born was asked only of ever-married women. Data presented for children ever born to ever-married women are comparable for the 1990 census and all previous censuses containing this question. Local Jails and Other Confinement Facilities—In- cludes facilities operated by the islands that primarily hold persons beyond arraignment, usually for more than 48 hours. Also included in this category are work farms used to hold persons awaiting trial or serving time on relatively short sentences and jails run by private businesses under contract. GROUP QUARTERS All persons not living in households are classified by the Census Bureau as living in group quarters. Two general categories of persons in group quarters are recognized: (1) institutionalized persons and (2) other persons in group quarters (also referred to as "noninstitutional group quar- ters"). Institutionalized Persons—Includes persons under for- mally authorized, supervised care or custody in institutions at the time of enumeration. Such persons are classified as "patients or inmates" of an institution regardless of the availability of nursing or medical care, the length of stay, or the number of persons in the institution. Generally, institu- tionalized persons are restricted to the institutional build- ings and grounds (or must have passes or escorts to leave) and thus have limited interaction with the surround- ing community. Also, they are generally under the care of trained staff who have responsibility for their safekeeping and supervision. Type of Institution—The type of institution was deter- mined as part of census enumeration activities. For insti- tutions which specialize in only one specific type of serv- ice, all patients or inmates were given the same classification. For institutions which had multiple types of major services (usually general hospitals and Veterans' Administration hospitals), patients were classified according to selected types of wards. For example, in psychiatric wards of hospitals, patients were classified in "mental (psychiatric) hospitals"; in hospital wards for persons with chronic diseases, patients were classified in "hospitals for the chronically ill." Each patient or inmate was classified in only one type of institution. Institutions include the follow- ing types: Correctional Institutions—Includes police lockups, half- way houses, local jails, and other confinement facilities, including work farms. Police Lockups—Temporary-holding facilities oper- ated by the island police that hold persons for 48 hours or less only if they have not been formally charged in court. HalfwayHouses—Operated for correctional purposes and include probation and restitution centers, pre- release centers, and community-residential centers. Other Types of Correctional Institutions—Privately operated correctional facilities and correctional facil- ities specifically for alcohol/drug abuse. Nursing Homes—Comprises a heterogeneous group of places. The majority of patients are elderly, although persons who require nursing care because of chronic physical conditions may be found in these homes regardless of their age. Included in this category are skilled-nursing facilities, intermediate-care facilities, long- term care rooms in wards or buildings on the grounds of hospitals, or long-term care rooms/nursing wings in congregate housing facilities. Also included are nursing, convalescent, and rest homes, with or without nursing care. Mental (Psychiatric) Hospitals—Includes hospitals or wards for the criminally insane not operated by a prison, and psychiatric wards of general hospitals and veterans' hospitals. Patients receive supervised medical/nursing care from formally-trained staff. Hospitals for Chronically III—-Includes hospitals for patients who require long-term care, or other hospitals or wards for the chronically ill, which include tuberculosis hospi- tals or wards, wards in general and Veterans' Adminis- tration hospitals for the chronically ill, neurological wards, hospices, wards for patients with Hansen's Disease (leprosy) and other incurable diseases, and other unspec- ified wards for the chronically ill. Patients who had no usual home elsewhere were enumerated as part of the institutional population in the wards of general and military hospitals. Most hospital patients are at the hospital temporarily and were enumerated at their usual place of residence. (For more information, see "Wards in General Hospitals for Patients Who Have No Usual Home Elsewhere.") Schools, Hospitals, or Wards for the Mentally Retard- ed—Includes those institutions such as wards in hospi- tals for the mentally retarded, and intermediate-care facilities for the mentally retarded that provide super- vised medical/nursing care from formally-trained staff. Schools, Hospitals, or Wards for the Physically Handi- capped—Includes three types of institutions: institutions for the blind, those for the deaf, and orthopedic wards and institutions for the physically handicapped. Institu- tions for persons with speech problems are classified DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-7 with "institutions for the deaf." The category "orthope- dic wards and institutions for the physically handi- capped" includes those institutions providing relatively long-term care to accident victims, and to persons with polio, cerebral palsy, and muscular dystrophy. In some census products, this category is classified by type of ownership as "Public," "Private," and "Ownership not known." Hospitals, and Wards for Drug/AlcoholAbuse—-Includes hospitals, and hospital wards in psychiatric and general hospitals. These facilities are equipped medically and designed for the diagnosis and treatment of medical or psychiatric illnesses associated with alcohol or drug abuse. Patients receive supervised medical care from formally-trained staff. Wards in General Hospitals for Patients Who Have No Usual Home Elsewhere—Includes maternity, neonatal, pediatric (including wards for boarder babies), and sur- gical wards of hospitals, and wards for infectious dis- eases. Juvenile Institutions—includes homes, schools, and other institutions providing care for children (short- or long- term care). Juvenile institutions include the following types: Homes for Abused, Dependent, and Neglected Chil- dren—Includes orphanages and other institutions which provide long-term care (usually more than 30 days) for children. This category is classified in some census products by type of ownership as "Public" and "Private." Residential Treatment Centers—Includes those insti- tutions which primarily serve children who, by clinical diagnosis, are moderately or seriously disturbed emo- tionally. Also, these institutions provide long-term treatment services, usually supervised or directed by a psychiatrist. Training Schools for Juvenile Delinquents—Includes residential training schools or homes, and industrial schools, camps, or farms for juvenile delinquents. Public Training Schools for Juvenile Delinquents— Usually operated by a government agency (for example, department of welfare, corrections, or a youth authority). These public training schools are specialized institutions serving delinquent children, generally between the ages of 10 and 17 years old, all of whom are committed by the courts. Private Training Schools—Operated under private auspices. Some of the children they serve are committed by the courts as delinquents. Others are referred by parents or social agencies because of delinquent behavior. One difference between private and public training schools is that, by their administrative policy, private schools have control over their selection and intake. Other Persons in Group Quarters (also referred to as "noninstitutional group quarters")—Includes all per- sons who live in group quarters other than institutions. Persons who live in the following living quarters are classified as "other persons in group quarters" when there are 10 or more unrelated persons living in the unit; otherwise, these living quarters are classified as housing units. Rooming Houses—Includes persons residing in room- ing and boarding houses and living in quarters with 10 or more unrelated persons. Group Homes—Includes "community-based homes" that provide care and supportive services. Such places include homes for the mentally ill, mentally retarded, and physically handicapped; drug/alcohol halfway houses; communes; and maternity homes for unwed mothers. Homes for the Mentally ///—Includes community- based homes that provide care primarily for the mentally ill. Homes which combine treatment of the physically handicapped with treatment of the men- tally ill are counted as homes for the mentally ill. Homes for the Mentally Retarded—-Includes community- based homes that provide care primarily for the mentally retarded. Homes which combine treatment of the physically handicapped with treatment of the mentally retarded are counted as homes for the mentally retarded. Homes for the Physically Handicapped—Includes community-based homes for the blind, for the deaf, and other community-based homes for the physically handicapped. Persons with speech problems are classified with homes for the deaf. In some census products, this category is classified by type of own- ership as "Public," "Private," or "Ownership not known." Homes orHalfwayHouses forDrug/AlcoholAbuse—In- cludes persons with no usual home elsewhere in places that provide community-based care and sup- portive services to persons suffering from a drug/al- cohol addiction and to recovering alcoholics and drug abusers. Places providing community-based care for drug and alcohol abusers include group homes, detoxification centers, quarterway houses (residen- tial treatment facilities that work closely with accred- ited hospitals), halfway houses, and recovery homes for ambulatory, mentally competent recovering alco- holics and drug abusers who may be re-entering the work force. B-8 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS Maternity Homes for Unwed Mothers—Includes per- sons with no usual home elsewhere in places that provide domestic care for unwed mothers and their children. These homes may provide social services and post-natal care within the facility, or may make arrangements for women to receive such services in the community. Nursing services are usually available in the facility. Other Group Homes—Includes persons with no usual home elsewhere in communes, foster care homes, and job corps centers with 10 or more unrelated persons. These types of places provide communal living quarters, generally for persons who have formed their own community in which they have common interests and often share or own property jointly. Religious Group Quarters—Includes, primarily, group quarters for nuns teaching in parochial schools and for priests living in rectories. It also includes other convents and monasteries, except those associated with a gen- eral hospital or an institution. College Quarters OffCampus—Includes privately-owned rooming and boarding houses off campus, if the place is reserved exclusively for occupancy by college students and if there are 10 or more unrelated persons. In census products, persons in this category are classified as living in a college dormitory. Persons residing in certain other types of living arrange- ments are classified as living in "noninstitutional group quarters" regardless of the number of people sharing the unit. These include persons residing in the following types of group quarters: College Dormitories—Includes college students in dor- mitories (provided the dormitory is restricted to students who do not have their families living with them), frater- nity and sorority houses, and on-campus residential quarters used exclusively for those in religious orders who are attending college. Students in privately-owned rooming and boarding houses off campus are also included, if the place is reserved exclusively for occu- pancy by college-level students and if there are 10 or more unrelated persons. Shelters for Runaway, Neglected, and Homeless Chil- dren—Includes shelters/group homes which provide temporary sleeping facilities for juveniles. Shelters for Abused Women (Shelters Against Domes- tic Violence orFamily Crisis Centers)—Includes community- based homes or shelters that provide domiciliary care for women who have sought shelter from family vio- lence and who may have been physically abused. Most shelters also provide care for children of abused women. These shelters may provide social services, meals, psychiatric treatment, and counseling. In some census products, "shelters for abused women" are included in the category "other noninstitutional group quarters." Dormitories for Nurses and Interns in General Hospi- tals—-Includes group quarters for nurses and other staff members. It excludes patients. Crews of Maritime Vessels—Includes officers, crew members, and passengers of Maritime U.S. flag ves- sels. All ocean-going ships are included. StaffResidents of Institutions—Includes staff residing in group quarters on institutional grounds who provide formally-authorized, supervised care or custody for the institutionalized population. Living Quarters for Victims of Natural Disasters—-In- cludes living quarters for persons temporarily displaced by natural disasters. Limitation of the Data—Two types of errors can occur in the classification of "types of group quarters": 1 . Misclassification of Group Quarters—During the 1 990 Special Place Prelist operation, the enumerator deter- mined the type of group quarters associated with each special place in their assignment. The enumerator used the Alphabetical Group Quarters Code List and Index to the Alphabetical Group Quarters Code List to assign a two-digit code number followed by either an "I," for institutional, or an "N," for noninstitutional to each group quarters. In 1990, unacceptable group quarter codes were edited. (For more information on editing of unacceptable data, see Appendix C, Accu- racy of the Data.) 2. No Classification (unknowns)— Improvements were made to the 1990 Alphabetical Group Quarters Code List; that is, the inclusion of more group quarters categories and an "Index to the Alphabetical Group Quarters Code List." Comparability—For the 1990 census, the definition of institutionalized persons was revised so that the definition of "care" only includes persons under organized medical or formally-authorized, supervised care or custody. As a result of this change to the institutional definition, maternity homes are classified as noninstitutional rather than insti- tutional group quarters as in previous censuses. The following types of other group quarters are classified as institutional rather than noninstitutional group quarters: "halfway houses (operated for correctional purposes)" and "wards in general and military hospitals for patients who have no usual home elsewhere," which includes maternity, neonatal, pediatric, and surgical wards of hos- pitals, other-purpose wards of hospitals, and wards for DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-9 persons with infectious diseases. These changes should not significantly affect the comparability of data with earlier censuses because of the relatively small number of per- sons involved. As in 1 980, 1 or more unrelated persons living together were classified as living in noninstitutional group quarters. In 1970, the criteria was six or more unrelated persons. Several changes also have occurred in the identification of specific types of group quarters. For the first time, the 1990 census identifies separately the following types of correctional institutions: persons in halfway houses (oper- ated for correctional purposes) and police lockups. In 1990, tuberculosis hospitals or wards are included with hospitals for the chronically ill; in 1 980, they were shown separately. For 1990, the noninstitutional group quarters category, "Group homes" is further classified as: group homes for drug/alcohol abuse; maternity homes (for unwed mothers), group homes for the mentally ill, group homes for the mentally retarded, and group homes for the physi- cally handicapped. Persons living in communes and foster- care homes are classified with "Other group homes" only if 1 or more unrelated persons share the unit; otherwise, they are classified as housing units. In 1990 census data products, the phrase "inmates of institutions" was changed to "institutionalized persons." Also, persons living in noninstitutional group quarters were referred to as "other persons in group quarters," and the phrase "staff residents" was used for staff living in institu- tions. In 1990, there are additional institutional categories and noninstitutional group quarters categories compared with the 1 980 census. The institutional categories added include "hospitals and wards for drug/alcohol abuse" and "hos- pitals for the chronically ill." The noninstitutional group quarters categories added include shelters for runaway, neglected, and homeless children and shelters for abused women. HISPANIC ORIGIN The data on Spanish/Hispanic origin were derived from answers to questionnaire item 7, which was asked of all persons. Persons of Hispanic origin are those who classi- fied themselves in one of the specific Hispanic origin categories listed on the questionnaire—"Dominican (Domin- ican Republic)," "Puerto Rican," or "Cuban"—as well as those who indicated that they were of "other Spanish/His- panic" origin. Persons of "Other Spanish/Hispanic" origin are those whose origins are from Spain, the Spanish- speaking countries of Central or South America, or they are persons of Hispanic origin identifying themselves gen- erally as Spanish, Spanish-American, Hispanic, Hispano, Latino, and so on. Origin can be viewed as the ancestry, nationality group, lineage, or country of birth of the person or the person's parents or ancestors before their arrival in the Virgin Islands of the United States (Virgin Islands). Persons of Hispanic origin may be of any race. Some tabulations are shown by the Hispanic origin of the householder. In all cases where households, families, or occupied housing units are classified by Hispanic origin, the Hispanic origin of the householder is used. (See the discussion of householder under "Household Type and Relationship.") During direct interviews conducted by enumerators, if a person could not provide a single origin response, he or she was asked to select, based on self-identification, the group which best described his or her origin or descent. If a person could not provide a single group, the origin of the person's mother was used. If a single group could not be provided for the person's mother, the first origin reported by the person was used. If any household member failed to respond to the Spanish/Hispanic origin question, a response was assigned by the computer according to the reported entries of other household members by using specific rules of precedence of household relationship. Comparability—The 1990 data on Hispanic origin are generally comparable with those for the 1980 census. However, there are some differences in the format of the Hispanic origin question between the two censuses. This question was asked in the Virgin Islands for the first time in 1980. For 1990, the word "descent" was deleted from the 1 980 wording. In addition, the category "Dominican (Domin- ican Republic)" was added to the responses of "Puerto Rican," "Cuban," and "Other Spanish/Hispanic origin." Finally, the 1990 question allowed those who reported as "Other Spanish/Hispanic" to write in their specific His- panic origin group. HOUSEHOLD TYPE AND RELATIONSHIP Household A household includes all the persons who occupy a housing unit. A housing unit is a house, an apartment, a mobile home, a houseboat, a group of rooms, or a single room that is occupied (or if vacant, is intended for occu- pancy) as separate living quarters. Separate living quarters are those in which the occupants live and eat separately from any other persons in the building and which have direct access from the outside of the building or through a common hall. The occupants may be a single family, one person living alone, two or more families living together, or any other group of related or unrelated persons who share living arrangements. In 100-percent tabulations, the count of households or householders always equals the count of occupied housing units. Persons Per Household—A measure obtained by divid- ing the number of persons in households by the number of households (or householders). In cases where persons in households are cross-classified by race or Hispanic origin, B-10 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS persons in the household are classified by the race or Hispanic origin of the householder rather than the race or Hispanic origin of each individual. Relationship to Householder Householder—The data on relationship to householder were derived from answers to questionnaire item 2, which was asked of all persons in housing units. One person in each household is designated as the householder. In most cases, this is the person, or one of the persons, in whose name the home is owned, being bought, or rented and who is listed in column 1 of the census questionnaire. If there is no such person in the household, any adult household member 1 5 years old and over could be designated as the householder. Households are classified by type according to the sex of the householder and the presence of relatives. Two types of householders are distinguished: a family house- holder and a nonfamily householder. A family householder is a householder living with one or more persons related to him or her by birth, marriage, or adoption. The householder and all persons in the household related to him or her are family members. A nonfamily householder is a house- holder living alone or with nonrelatives only. Spouse—Includes a person married to and living with a householder. This category includes persons in formal marriages, as well as persons classified as "consensually married." The number of spouses is equal to the number of "married-couple families" or "married-couple households" in 100-percent tabulations. Child—Includes a son or daughter by birth, a stepchild, or adopted child of the householder, regardless of the child's age or marital status. The category excludes sons-in-law, daughters-in-law, and foster children. Natural-Born orAdopted Son/Daughter—A son or daugh- ter of the householder by birth, regardless of the age of the child. Also, this category includes sons or daughters of the householder by legal adoption, regardless of the age of the child. If the stepson/stepdaughter of the householder has been legally adopted by the house- holder, the child is still classified as a stepchild. Stepson/Stepdaughter—A son or daughter of the house- holder through marriage but not by birth, regardless of the age of the child. If the stepson/stepdaughter of the householder has been legally adopted by the house- holder, the child is still classified as a stepchild. Own Child—A never-married child under 1 8 years who is a son or daughter by birth, a stepchild, or an adopted child of the householder. In certain tabulations, own children are further classified as living with two parents or with one parent only. Own children of the house- holder living with two parents are by definition found only in married-couple families. In a subfamily, an "own child" is a never-married child under 18 years of age who is a son, daughter, stepchild, or an adopted child of a mother in a mother- child subfamily, a father in a father-child subfamily, or either spouse in a married-couple subfamily. "Related children" in a family include own children and all other persons under 18 years of age in the household, regardless of marital status, who are related to the house- holder, except the spouse of the householder. Foster children are not included since they are not related to the householder. Other Relatives—In tabulations, includes any household member related to the householder by birth, marriage, or adoption, but not included specifically in another relation- ship category. In certain detailed tabulations, the following categories may be shown: Grandchild—The grandson or granddaughter of the householder. Brother/Sister—The brother or sister of the house- holder, including stepbrothers, stepsisters, and brothers and sisters by adoption. Brothers-in-law and sisters-in- law are included in the "Other relative" category on the questionnaire. Parent—The father or mother of the householder, includ- ing a stepparent or adoptive parent. Fathers-in-law and mothers-in-law are included in the "Other relative" category on the questionnaire. Other Relatives—Anyone not listed in a reported cate- gory above who is related to the householder by birth, marriage, or adoption (brother-in-law, grandparent, nephew, aunt, mother-in-law, daughter-in-law, cousin, and so forth). Nonrelatives—Includes any household member, including foster children not related to the householder by birth, marriage, or adoption. The following categories may be presented in more detailed tabulations: Roomer, Boarder, or Foster Child—Roomer, boarder, lodger, and foster children or foster adults of the householder. Housemate or Roommate—A person who is not related to the householder and who shares living quarters primarily in order to share expenses. Unmarried Partner—A person who is not related to the householder, who shares living quarters, and who has a close personal relationship with the householder, per- sons in the household are classified by the race or Hispanic origin of the householder rather than the race or Hispanic origin of each individual. DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-11 Other Nonre/atives—A person who is not related by birth, marriage, or adoption to the householder and who is not described by the categories given above. When relationship is not reported for an individual, it is imputed according to the responses for age, sex, and marital status for that person while maintaining consis- tency with responses for other individuals in the house- hold. (For more information on imputation, see Appendix C, Accuracy of the Data.) Unrelated Individual An unrelated individual is: (1) a householder living alone or with nonrelatives only, (2) a household member who is not related to the householder, or (3) a person living in group quarters who is not an inmate of an institution. Family Type A family consists of a householder and one or more other persons living in the same household who are related to the householder by birth, marriage, or adoption. All persons in a household who are related to the house- holder are regarded as members of his or her family. A household can contain only one family for purposes of census tabulations. Not all households contain families since a household may comprise a group of unrelated persons or one person living alone. Families are classified by type as either a "married- couple family" or "other family" according to the sex of the householder and the presence of relatives. The data on family type are based on answers to questions on sex and relationship which were asked on a 100-percent basis. Married-Couple Family—A family in which the house- holder and his or her spouse are enumerated as mem- bers of the same household. Subfamily A subfamily is a married couple (husband and wife enumerated as members of the same household) with or without never-married children under 1 8 years old, or one parent with one or more never-married children under 1 8 years old, living in a household and related to, but not including, either the householder or the householder's spouse. The number of subfamilies is not included in the count of families, since subfamily members are counted as part of the householder's family. Subfamilies are defined during processing of sample data. In selected tabulations, subfamilies are further clas- sified by type: married-couple subfamilies, with or without own children; mother-child subfamilies; and father-child subfamilies. Lone parents include people maintaining either one- parent families or one-parent subfamilies. Married couples include husbands and wives in both married-couple fami- lies and married-couple subfamilies. Unmarried-Partner Household An unmarried-partner household is a household other than a "married-couple household" that includes a house- holder and an "unmarried partner." An "unmarried part- ner" can be of the same sex or of the opposite sex of the householder. An "unmarried partner" in an "unmarried partner household" is an adult who is unrelated to the householder, but shares living quarters and has a close personal relationship with the householder. Unmarried-Couple Household An unmarried-couple household is composed of two unrelated adults of the opposite sex (one of whom is the householder) who share a housing unit with or without the presence of children under 1 5 years old. Foster Children Other Family: Male Householder, No Wife Present—A family with a male householder and no spouse of householder present. Female Householder, No Husband Present—A family with a female householder and no spouse of house- holder present. Persons Per Family—A measure obtained by dividing the number of persons in families by the total number of families (or family householders). In cases where the measure, "persons in family" or "persons per family" are cross-tabulated by race or Hispanic origin, the race or Hispanic origin refers to the householder rather than the race or Hispanic origin of each individual. B-12 Foster children are nonrelatives of the householder and are included in the category, "Roomer, boarder, or foster child" on the questionnaire. Foster children are identified as persons under 18 years old and living in households that have no nonrelatives 1 8 years old and over (who might be parents of the nonrelatives under 18). Stepfamily A stepfamily is a "married-couple family" with at least one stepchild of the householder present, where the householder is the husband. Comparability—The 1 990 definition of a household is the same as that used in 1 980. The 1 980 relationship category "Son/daughter" has been replaced by two categories, "Natural-born or adopted son/daughter" and "Stepson/ DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS stepdaughter." "Grandchild" has been added as a sepa- rate category. The 1980 nonrelative categories: "Roomer, boarder" and "Roommate" have been replaced by the categories "Roomer, boarder, or foster child," "House- mate, roommate," and "Unmarried partner." The 1980 nonrelative category "Paid employee" has been dropped. INCOME IN 1989 The data on income in 1 989 were derived from answers to questionnaire items 32 and 33. Information on money income received in the calendar year 1 989 was requested from persons 15 years old and over. "Total income" is the algebraic sum of the amounts reported separately for wage or salary income; net nonfarm self-employment income; net farm self-employment income; interest, divi- dend, or net rental or royalty income; Social Security or railroad retirement income; public assistance or welfare income; retirement or disability income; and all other income. "Earnings" is defined as the algebraic sum of wage or salary income and net income from farm and nonfarm self-employment. "Earnings" represent the amount of income received regularly before deductions for per- sonal income taxes, Social Security, bond purchases, union dues, medicare deductions, etc. Receipts from the following sources are not included as income: money received from the sale of property (unless the recipient was engaged in the business of selling such property); the value of income "in kind" from food stamps, public housing subsidies, medical care, employer contribu- tions for persons, etc.; withdrawal of bank deposits; money borrowed; tax refunds; exchange of money between rela- tives living in the same household; gifts and lump-sum inheritances, insurance payments, and other types of lump-sum receipts. Income Type in 1989 The eight types of income reported in the census are defined as follows: 1 . Wage or Salary Income—Includes total money earn- ings received for work performed as an employee during the calendar year 1989. It includes wages, salary, Armed Forces pay, commissions, tips, piece- rate payments, and cash bonuses earned before deductions were made for taxes, bonds, pensions, union dues, etc. 2. Nonfarm Self-EmploymentIncome—Includes net money income (gross receipts minus expenses) from one's own business, professional enterprise, or partnership. Gross receipts include the value of all goods sold and services rendered. Expenses includes costs of goods purchased, rent, heat, light, power, depreciation charges, wages and salaries paid, business taxes (not personal income taxes), etc. 3. Farm Self-Employment Income—Includes net money income (gross receipts minus operating expenses) from the operation of a farm by a person on his or her own account, as an owner, renter, or sharecropper. Gross receipts include the value of all products sold, government farm programs, money received from the rental of farm equipment to others, and incidental receipts from the sale of wood, sand, gravel, etc. Operating expenses include cost of feed, fertilizer, seed, and other farming supplies, cash wages paid to farmhands, depreciation charges, cash rent, interest on farm mortgages, farm building repairs, farm taxes (not local and Federal personal income taxes), etc. The value of fuel, food, or other farm products used for family living is not included as part of net income. 4. Interest, Dividend, or Net Rental Income—Includes interest on savings or bonds, dividends from stock- holdings or membership in associations, net income from rental of property to others and receipts from boarders or lodgers, net royalties, and periodic pay- ments from an estate or trust fund. 5. Social Security Income—Includes Social Security pen- sions and survivors benefits and permanent disability insurance payments made by the Social Security Administration prior to deductions for medical insur- ance, and railroad retirement insurance checks from the U.S. Government. Medicare reimbursements are not included. 6. Public Assistance Income—Includes: (1) supplemen- tary security income payments made by Federal or local welfare agencies to low income persons who are aged (65 years old or over), blind, or disabled; (2) aid to families with dependent children, and (3) general assistance. Separate payments received for hospital or other medical care (vendor payments) are excluded from this item. 7. Retirement or Disability Income—Includes: (1) retire- ment pensions and survivor benefits from a former employer, labor union, or Federal, local, or other governmental agency; (2) disability income from sources such as worker's compensation; companies or unions; Federal or local government; and the U.S. military; (3) periodic receipts from annuities and insurance; and (4) regular income from IRA and KEOGH plans. 8. All Other Income—Includes unemployment compen- sation, Veterans Administration (VA) payments, ali- mony and child support, contributions received period- ically from persons not living in the household, military family allotments, net gambling winnings, and other kinds of periodic income other than earnings. Income of Households—Includes the income of the householder and all other persons 1 5 years old and over in the household, whether related to the householder or not. Because many households consist of only one person, average household income is usually less than average family income. DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-13 Income of Families and Persons— In compiling statistics on family income, the incomes of all members 1 5 years old and over in each family are summed and treated as a single amount. However, for persons 15 years old and over, the total amounts of their own incomes are used. Although the income statistics covered the calendar year 1989, the characteristics of persons and the composition of families refer to the time of enumeration (April 1990). Thus, the income of the family does not include amounts received by persons who were members of the family during all or part of the calendar year 1 989 if these persons no longer resided with the family at the time of enumera- tion. Yet, family income amounts reported by related persons who did not reside with the family during 1 989 but who were members of the family at the time of enumera- tion are included. However, the composition of most families was the same during 1 989 as in April 1 990. Median Income—The median divides the income distribu- tion into two equal parts, one having incomes above the median and the other having incomes below the median. For households and families, the median income is based on the distribution of the total number of units including those with no income. The median for persons is based on persons with income. The median income values for all households, families, and persons are computed on the basis of more detailed income intervals than shown in most tabulations. Median household or family income figures of $30,000 or less are calculated using linear interpolation. For persons, corresponding median values of $25,000 or less are also computed using linear interpo- lation. All other median income amounts are derived through Pareto interpolation. (For more information on medians and interpolation, see the discussion under "Derived Measures.") Mean Income—This is the amount obtained by dividing the total income of a particular statistical universe by the number of units in that universe. Thus, mean household income is obtained by dividing total household income by the total number of households. For the various types of income the means are based on households having those types of income. "Per capita income" is the mean income computed for every man, woman, and child in a particular group. It is derived by dividing the total income of a particular group by the total population in that group. Care should be exercised in using and interpreting mean income values for small subgroups of the population. Because the mean is influenced strongly by extreme values in the distribution, it is especially susceptible to the effects of sampling variability, misreporting, and process- ing errors. The median, which is not affected by extreme values, is, therefore, a better measure than the mean when the population base is small. The mean, nevertheless, is shown in some data products for most small subgroups because, when weighted according to the number of cases, the means can be added to obtained summary measures for areas and groups other than those shown in census tabulations. Limitation of the Data—Since questionnaire entries for income frequently are based on memory and not on records, many persons tended to forget minor or irregular sources of income and, therefore, underreport their income. Underreporting tends to be more pronounced for income sources that are not derived from earnings, such as Social Security, public assistance, or from interest, dividends, and net rental income. There are errors of reporting due to the misunderstand- ing of the income questions such as reporting gross rather than net dollar amounts for the two questions on net self-employment income, which resulted in an overstate- ment of these items. Another common error is the report- ing of identical dollar amounts in two of the eight type of income items where a respondent with only one source of income assumed that the second amount should be entered to represent total income. Such instances of overreporting had an impact on the level of mean nonfarm or farm self-employment income and mean total income published for the various geographical subdivisions of the State. Extensive computer editing procedures were instituted in the data processing operation to reduce some of these reporting errors and to improve the accuracy of the income data. These procedures corrected various reporting defi- ciencies and improved the consistency of reported income items associated with work experience and information on occupation and class of worker. For example, if persons reported they were self-employed on their own farm, not incorporated, but had reported wage and salary earnings only, the latter amount was shifted to net farm self- employment income. Also, if any respondent reported total income only, the amount was generally assigned to one of the type of income items according to responses to the work experience and class-of-worker questions. Another type of problem involved nonreporting of income data. Where income information was not reported, procedures were devised to impute appropriate values with either no income or positive or negative dollar amounts for the missing entries. (For more information on imputation, see Appendix C, Accuracy of the Data.) In income tabulations for households and families, the lowest income group (e.g., less than $1,000) includes units that were classified as having no 1 989 income. Many of these were living on income "in kind," savings, or gifts, were newly created families, or families in which the sole breadwinner had recently died or left the household. However, many of the households and families who reported no income probably had some money income which was not recorded in the census. The income data presented in the tabulations covers money income only. The fact that many farm families receive an important part of their income in the form of "free" housing and goods produced and consumed on the farm rather than in money should be taken into consider- ation in comparing the income of farm and nonfarm residents. Nonmoney income such as business expense accounts, use of business transportation and facilities, or B-14 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS partial compensation by business for medical and educa- tional expenses was also received by some nonfarm residents. Many low income families also receive income "in kind" from public welfare programs. In comparing income data for 1 989 with earlier years, it should be noted that an increase or decrease in money income does not necessarily represent a comparable change in real income, unless adjustments for changes in prices are made. Comparability—The income data collected in the 1980 and 1 970 censuses are similar to the 1 990 census data, but there are variations in the detail of the questions. Each person was required to report: • Wage or salary income • Net nonfarm self-employment income • Net farm self-employment income • Interest, dividend, or net rental or royalty income • Social Security income • Public assistance income • Income from all other sources Between the 1980 and 1990 censuses, there were minor differences in the processing of the data. In both censuses, all persons with missing values in one or more of the detailed type of income items and total income were designated as allocated. Each missing entry was imputed either as a "no" or as a dollar amount. If total income was reported and one or more of the type of income fields was not answered, then the entry in total income generally was assigned to one of the income types according to the socioeconomic characteristics of the income recipient. This person was designated as unallocated. In 1980 and 1990, all nonrespondents with income not reported (whether heads of households or other persons) were assigned the reported income of persons with similar characteristics. (For more information on imputation, see Appendix C, "Accuracy of the Data.") There was a difference in the method of computer derivation of aggregate income from individual amounts between the two census processing operations. In the 1980 census, income amounts less than $100,000 were coded in tens of dollars, and amounts of $100,000 or more were coded in thousands of dollars; $5 was added to each amount coded in tens of dollars and $500 to each amount coded in thousands of dollars. Entries of $999,000 or more were treated as $999,500 and losses of $9,999 or more were treated as minus $9,999. In the 1990 census, income amounts less than $999,999 were keyed in dollars. Amounts of $999,999 or more were treated as $999,999 and losses of $9,999 or more were treated as minus $9,999 in all of the computer derivations of aggregate income. In 1970, each person 14 years and over was required to report: • Wage or salary income • Net nonfarm self-employment income • Net farm self-employment income • Social Security or Railroad Retirement • Public assistance or welfare payments • Income from all other sources If a person reported a dollar amount in wage or salary, net nonfarm self-employment income, or net farm self- employment income, the person was considered as unal- located only if no further dollar amounts were imputed for any additional missing entries. In 1960, all persons 14 years and over were required to report wage or salary income, net self-employment income, and income other than earnings received in 1959. An assumption was made in the editing process that no other type of income was received by a person who reported the receipt of either wage and salary income or self-employment but who had failed to report the receipt of other money income. For several reasons, the income data shown in census tabulations are not directly comparable with those that may be obtained from statistical summaries of income tax returns. Income, as defined for Federal tax purposes, differs somewhat from the Census Bureau concept. More- over, the coverage of income tax statistics is different because of the exemptions of persons having small amounts of income and the inclusion of net capital gains in tax returns. Furthermore, members of some families file sep- arate returns and others file joint returns; consequently, the income reporting unit is not consistently either a family or a person. The earnings data shown in census tabulations are not directly comparable with earnings records of the Social Security Administration. The earnings record data for 1 989 excluded the earnings of most civilian government employ- ees, some employees of nonprofit organizations, workers covered by the Railroad Retirement Act, and persons not covered by the program because of insufficient earnings. Furthermore, earnings received from any one employer in excess of $48,000 in 1989 are not covered by earnings records. Finally, because census data are obtained from household questionnaires, they may differ from Social Security Administration earnings record data, which are based upon employers' reports and the Federal income tax returns of self-employed persons. INDUSTRY, OCCUPATION, AND CLASS OF WORKER The data on industry, occupation, and class of worker were derived from answers to questionnaire items 28, 29, and 30 respectively. These questions were asked of all persons. Information on industry relates to the kind of business conducted by a person's employing organization; occupation describes the kind of work the person does on the job. DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-15 For employed persons, the data refer to the person's job during the reference week. For those who worked at two or more jobs, the data refer to the job at which the person worked the greatest number of hours. For unem- ployed persons, the data refer to their last job. The industry and occupation statistics are derived from the detailed classification systems developed for the 1 990 census as described below. The Classified Index of Industries and Occupations provided additional information on the indus- try and occupation classification systems. Respondents provided the data for the tabulations by writing on the questionnaires descriptions of their industry and occupation. All cases were coded by a clerical staff in the Census Bureau's Jacksonville, FL processing office. The clerical staff converted the written questionnaire descriptions to codes by comparing these descriptions to entries in the Alphabetical Index of Industries and Occupations. For the industry code, these coders also referred to an Employer Name List (formerly called Company Name List). This list contained the names of business establishments and their Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) codes converted to population census equivalents. This list facilitated coding and maintained industrial classification comparability. Industry The industry classification system developed for the 1990 census consists of 236 categories for employed persons, classified into 13 major industry groups. Since 1 940, the industrial classification has been based on the Standard Industrial Classification Manual (SIC). The 1990 census classification was developed from the 1987 SIC published by the Office of Management and Budget, Executive Office of the President. The SIC was designed primarily to classify establish- ments by the type of industrial activity in which they were engaged. However, census data, which were collected from households, differ in detail and nature from those obtained from establishment surveys. Therefore, the cen- sus classification systems, while defined in SIC terms, cannot reflect the full detail in all categories. There are several levels of industrial classification found in census products. For example, the 1990 CP-2, Social and Eco- nomic Characteristics report includes 41 unique industrial categories, while the 1 990 Summary Tape File 4 (STF 4) presents 72 categories. Occupation The occupational classification system developed for the 1990 census consists of 501 specific occupational categories for employed persons arranged into 6 summary and 1 3 major occupational groups. This classification was developed to be consistent with the Standard Occupa- tional Classification (SOC) Manual: 1980, published by the Office of Federal Statistical Policy and Standards, U.S. Department of Commerce. Tabulations with occupation as the primary characteristic present several levels of occu- pational detail. The most detailed tabulations are shown in special 1 990 tape files on occupation. This product con- tains all 501 occupational categories. Some occupation groups are related closely to certain industries. Operators of transportation equipment, farm operators and workers, and private household workers account for major portions of their respective industries of transportation, agriculture, and private households. How- ever, the industry categories include persons in other occupations. For example, persons employed in agricul- ture include truck drivers and bookkeepers; persons employed in the transportation industry include mechanics, freight handlers, and payroll clerks; and persons employed in the private household industry include occupations such as chauffeur, gardener, and secretary. Class of Worker The data on class of worker were derived from answers to questionnaire item 30. The information on class of worker refers to the same job as a respondent's industry and occupation and categorizes persons according to the type of ownership of the employing organization. The class of worker categories are defined as follows: Private Wage and Salary Workers—Includes persons who worked for wages, salary, commission, tips, pay-in- kind, or piece rates for a private for profit employer or a private not-for-profit, tax-exempt or charitable organiza- tion. Self-employed persons whose business was incorpo- rated are included with private wage and salary workers because they are paid employees of their own companies. Some tabulations present data separately for these sub- categories: "For profit," "Not for profit," and "Own busi- ness incorporated." Government Workers—Includes persons who were employ- ees of any local, or Federal governmental unit, regardless of the activity of the particular agency. For some tabula- tions, the data were presented separately for the two levels of government. Self-Employed Workers—Includes persons who worked for profit or fees in their own unincorporated business, profession, or trade, or who operated a farm. Unpaid Family Workers—Includes persons who worked 1 5 hours or more without pay in a business or on a farm operated by a relative. Salaried/Self-Employed—In tabulations that categorize persons as either salaried or self-employed, the salaried category includes private and government wage and salary workers; self-employed includes self-employed persons and unpaid family workers. The industry category, "Public administration," is limited to regular government functions such as legislative, judi- cial, administrative, and regulatory activities of govern- ments. Other government organizations such as schools, hospitals, liquor stores, and bus lines are classified by B-16 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS industry according to the activity in which they are engaged. On the other hand, the class of worker government categories include all government workers. Occasionally respondents supplied industry, occupa- tion, or class of worker descriptions which were not sufficiently specific for precise classification or did not report on these items at all. Some of these cases were corrected through the field editing process and during the coding and tabulation operations. In the coding operation, certain types of incomplete entries were corrected using the Alphabetical Index of Industries and Occupations. For example, it was possible in certain situations to assign an industry code based on the occupation reported. Following the coding operations, there was a computer edit and an allocation process. The edit first determined whether a respondent was in the universe which required an industry and occupation code. The codes for the three items (industry, occupation, and class of worker) were checked to ensure they were valid and were edited for their relation to each other. Invalid and inconsistent codes were either blanked or changed to a consistent code. If one or more of the three codes were blank after the edit, a code was assigned from a "similar" person based on other items such as age, sex, education, farm or nonfarm residence, and weeks worked. If all the labor force and income data also were blank, all these economic items were assigned from one other person who provided all the necessary data. Comparability—Comparability of industry and occupation data was affected by a number of factors, primarily the systems used to classify the questionnaire responses. For both the industry and occupation classification systems, the basic structures were generally the same from 1 940 to 1970, but changes in the individual categories limited comparability of the data from one census to another. These changes were needed to recognize the "birth" of new industries and occupations, the "death" of others, and the growth and decline in existing industries and occupations, as well as, the desire of analysts and other users for more detail in the presentation of the data. Probably the greatest cause of incomparability is the movement of a segment of a category to a different category in the next census. Changes in the nature of jobs and respondent terminology, and refinement of category composition made these movements necessary. In the 1 990 census, the industry classification had minor revisions to reflect recent changes to the SIC. The 1 990 occupational classification system is essentially the same as that for the 1 980 census. However, the conversion of the census classification to the SOC in 1 980 meant that the 1 990 classification system was less comparable to the classifications used prior to the 1 980 census. Other factors that affected data comparability included the universe to which the data referred (in 1 970, the age cutoff for labor force was changed from 14 years to 16 years); how the industry and occupation questions were worded on the questionnaire (for example, important changes were made in 1970); improvements in the coding proce- dures (the Employer Name List technique was introduced in 1960); and how the "not reported" cases are handled. Prior to 1 970, they were placed in the residual categories, "Industry not reported" and "Occupation not reported." In 1970, an allocation process was introduced that assigned these cases to major groups. In 1990, as in 1980, the "Not reported" cases were assigned to individual categories. Therefore, the 1980 and 1990 data for individual catego- ries included some numbers of persons who were tabu- lated in a "Not reported" category in previous censuses. The following publications contain information on the various factors affecting comparability and are particularly useful for understanding differences in the occupation and industry information from earlier censuses: U.S. Bureau of the Census, Changes Between the 1950 and 1960 Occu- pation and Industry Classifications With Detailed Adjust- ments of 1950 Data to the 1960 Classifications, Technical Paper No. 18, 1968; U.S. Bureau of the Census, 1970 Occupation and Industry Classification Systems in Terms of their 1960 Occupation and Industry Elements, Technical Paper No. 26, 1972; and U.S. Bureau of the Census, The Relationship Between the 1970 and 1980 Industry and Occupation Classification Systems, Technical Paper No. 59, 1988. For citations for earlier census years, see the 1980 Census of Population report, PC80-1-D, Detailed Population Characteristics. The 1990 census introduced an additional class of worker category for "private not-for-profit" employers. This category is a subset of the 1980 category "employee of private employer" so there is no comparable data before 1990. Also in 1990, employees of foreign governments, the United Nations, etc., are classified as "private not-for- profit," rather than Federal Government as in 1970 and 1 980. While in theory, there was a change in comparability, in practice, the small number of U.S. residents working for foreign governments made this change negligible. Comparability between the statistics on industry and occupation from the 1 990 census and statistics from other sources is affected by many of the factors described in the section on "Employment Status." These factors are pri- marily geographic differences between residence and place of work, different dates of reference, and differences in counts because of dual job holding. Industry data from population censuses cover all industries and all kinds of workers, whereas, data from establishments often excluded private household workers, government workers, and the self-employed. Also, the replies from household respon- dents may have differed in detail and nature from those obtained from establishments. Occupation data from the census and data from gov- ernment licensing agencies, professional associations, trade unions, etc., may not be as comparable as expected. Organizational listings often include persons not in the labor force or persons devoting all or most of their time to another occupation; or the same person may be included in two or more different listings. In addition, relatively few DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-17 organizations, except for those requiring licensing, attained complete coverage of membership in a particular occupa- tional field. JOURNEY TO WORK Place of Work The data on place of work were derived from answers to questionnaire item 22, which was asked of persons who indicated in question 21 that they worked at some time during the reference week. (For more information, see discussion under "Reference Week.") Data were tabulated for workers 1 6 years and over; that is, members of the Armed Forces and civilians who were at work during the reference week. Data on place of work refer to the geographic location at which workers carried out their occupational activities during the reference week. The exact address (number and street) of the place of work was asked, as well as the place (town or area); the island, if in the U.S. Virgin Islands; or State, if in the U.S. If the person's employer operated in more than one location, the exact address of the location or branch where the respondent worked was requested. When the number and street name were unknown, a description of the location, such as the building name or nearest street or intersection, was to be entered. Persons who worked at more than one location during the reference week were asked to report the one at which they worked the greatest number of hours. Persons who regularly worked in several locations each day during the reference week were requested to give the address at which they began work each day. For cases in which daily work did not begin at a central place each day, the person was asked to provide as much information as possible to describe the area in which he or she worked most during the reference week. In some tabulations, place-of-work locations may be defined as "in area of residence" and "outside area of residence." The area of residence may vary from table to table or even within a table, and refers to the particular area or areas shown. For example, in a table that provides data for islands, "in area of residence" refers to persons who worked on the same island on which they lived, while "outside area of residence" refers to persons whose workplace was located someplace other than on the island on which they lived. Similarly, in a table that provides data for several types of areas, such as the U.S. Virgin Islands and its individual islands, and places, the place-of-work data will be variable and is determined by the geographic level (island, census subdistrict, or place) shown in each section of the tabulation. In selected areas, census desig- nated places (CDP's) may appear in the tabulations as places of work. The accuracy of place-of-work data for CDP's may be affected by the extent to which their census names were familiar to respondents, and by coding prob- lems caused by similarities between the CDP name and the names of other geographic jurisdictions in the same vicinity. Place-of-work data may be shown for island subdivi- sions called "census subdistricts" based on the responses to the place-of-work question. When a respondent reported a locality or incorporated place that formed a part of a census subdistrict, the coding and tabulating procedure was designed to include the response in the total for the census subdistrict. The accuracy of the data for some census subdistricts may be affected by coding problems that resulted from the unfamiliarity of the respondent with the census subdistrict in which the workplace was located or when a census subdistrict and a place of the same or similar name are located close together. Place-of-work data may show a few workers who made unlikely daily work trips (e.g., workers who lived on St. Thomas and worked in Puerto Rico). This result is attrib- utable to persons who worked during the reference week at a location that was different from their usual place of work, such as persons away from home on business. Comparability— Since items on commuting characteris- tics were asked for the first time in the 1 990 census, no comparable data exist. Limitation of the Data—The data on place of work relate to a reference week; that is, the calendar week preceding the date on which the respondents were interviewed by enumerators. This week is not the same for all respon- dents because the enumeration was not completed in 1 week. However, for the majority of persons, the reference week for the 1 990 census is the last week in March 1 990. The lack of a uniform reference week means that the place-of-work data reported in the census will not exactly match the distribution of workplace locations observed or measured during an actual workweek.The place-of-work data are estimates of persons 1 6 years old and over who were both employed and at work during the reference week (including persons in the Armed Forces). Persons who did not work during the reference week but had jobs or businesses from which they were temporarily absent due to illness, bad weather, industrial dispute, vacation, or other personal reasons are not included in the place-of- work data. Therefore, the data on place of work understate the total number of jobs or total employment in a geo- graphic area during the reference week. It also should be noted that persons who had irregular, casual, or unstruc- tured jobs during the reference week may have errone- ously reported themselves as not working. The address where the individual worked most often during the reference week was recorded on the census questionnaire. If a worker held two jobs, only data about the primary job (the one worked the greatest number of hours during the preceding week) was requested. Persons who regularly worked in several locations during the refer- ence week were requested to give the address at which they began work each day. For cases in which daily work was not begun at a central place each day, the person was B-18 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS asked to provide as much information as possible to describe the area in which he or she worked most during the reference week. Means of Transportation to Work The data on means of transportation to work were derived from answers to questionnaire item 23a, which was asked of persons who indicated in question 21 that they worked at some time during the reference week. (For more information, see discussion under "Reference Week.") Means of transportation to work refers to the principal mode of travel or type of conveyance that the person usually used to get from home to work during the reference week. Persons who used different means of transportation on different days of the week were asked to specify the one they used most often, that is, the greatest number of days. Persons who used more than one means of transportation to get to work each day were asked to report the one used for the longest distance during the work trip. The category, "Car, truck, or van," includes workers using a car (includ- ing company cars but excluding taxicabs), a truck of one-ton capacity or less, or a van. The category, "Public transportation," includes workers who used a bus, safari bus, taxi bus, ferryboat, water taxi, or taxicab even if each mode is not shown separately in the tabulation. The category, "Other means," includes workers who used a mode of travel which is not identified separately within the data distribution. The category, "Other means," may vary from table to table, depending on the amount of detail shown in a particular distribution. The means of transportation data for some areas may show workers using modes of public transportation that are not available in those areas (e.g., ferryboat or water taxi, in an area where there actually is no ferryboat or water taxi service). This result is largely due to persons who worked during the reference week at a location that was different from their usual place of work (such as persons away from home on business in an area where such service was available) and persons who used more than one means of transportation each day but whose principal means was unavailable where they lived. persons who were driven to work by someone who then drove back home or to a nonwork destination. The cate- gory, "Carpooled," includes workers who reported that two or more persons usually rode to work in the vehicle during the reference week. Persons Per Car, Truck, or Van—This is obtained by dividing the number of persons who reported using a car, truck, or van to get to work by the number of such vehicles that they used. The number of vehicles used is derived by counting each person who drove alone as one vehicle, each person who reported being in a two-person carpool as one-half vehicle, each person who reported being in a three-person carpool as one-third vehicle, and so on, and then summing all the vehicles. Time Leaving Home to Go to Work The data on time leaving home to go to work were derived from answers to questionnaire item 24a. This question was asked of persons who indicated in question 21 that they worked at some time during the reference week and who reported in question 23a that they worked outside their home. The departure time refers to the time of day that the person usually left home to go to work during the reference week. (For more information, see discussion under "Reference Week.") Travel Time to Work The data on travel time to work were derived from answers to questionnaire item 24b. This question was asked of persons who indicated in question 21 that they worked at some time during the reference week and who reported in question 23a that they worked outside their home. Travel time to work refers to the total number of minutes that it usually took the person to get from home to work during the reference week. The elapsed time includes time spent waiting for public transportation, picking up passengers in carpools, and time spent in other activities related to getting to work. (For more information, see discussion under "Reference Week.") Private Vehicle Occupancy The data on private vehicle occupancy were derived from answers to questionnaire item 23b. This question was asked of persons who indicated in question 21 that they worked at some time during the reference week and who reported in question 23a that their means of transportation to work was "Car, truck, or van." (For more information, see discussion under "Reference Week.") Private vehicle occupancy refers to the number of persons who usually rode to work in the vehicle during the reference week. The category, "Drove alone," includes persons who usually drove alone to work as well as LANGUAGE SPOKEN AT HOME AND ABILITY TO SPEAK ENGLISH Language Spoken at Home Data on language spoken at home were derived from the answers to questionnaire items 15a and 15b, which were asked of all persons born before April 1, 1985. Interviewers were instructed to mark "Yes" in question 1 5a if the person sometimes or always spoke a language other than English at home and not to mark "Yes" if a language was spoken only at school or if speaking was DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-19 limited to a few expressions or slang. For question 15b, respondents were instructed to print the name of the non-English language spoken at home. If the person spoke more than one language other than English, the person was to report the language spoken more often or the language learned first. Questions 1 5a and 1 5b referred to languages spoken at home in an effort to measure the current use of languages other than English. Persons who knew languages other than English but did not use them at home or who only used them elsewhere were excluded. Persons who reported speaking a language other than English at home may also speak English; however, the questions did not permit determination of the main or dominant language of per- sons who spoke both English and another language. (For more information, see discussion below on "Ability to Speak English.") For persons who indicated that they spoke a language other than English at home in question 1 5a, but failed to specify the name of the language in question 15b, the language was assigned based on the language of other speakers in the household; on the language of a person of the same Hispanic origin or detailed race group living in the same or a nearby area; or on a person of the same ancestry or place of birth. In all cases where a person was assigned a non-English language, it was assumed that the language was spoken at home. Persons for whom the name of a language other than English was entered in question 15b, and for whom question 15a was blank were assumed to speak that language at home. The write-in responses listed in question 15b (specific language spoken) were coded into more than 380 detailed language categories. Coding clerks supplied numeric codes for the written entries using a 2,000 name reference list. The write-in responses represented the names people used for languages they speak. They may not match the names or categories used by linguists. The sets of cate- gories used are sometimes geographic and sometimes linguistic. Figure 1 provides an illustration of the content of the classification schemes used to present language data. For more information, write to the Chief, Population Divi- sion, U.S. Bureau of the Census, Washington, DC 20233. Household Language— In households where one or more persons (age 5 years old or over) speak a language other than English, the household language assigned to all household members is the non-English language spoken by the first person with a non-English language in the following order: householder, spouse, parent, sibling, child, grandchild, other relative, stepchild, unmarried partner, housemate or roommate, roomer, boarder, or foster child, or other nonrelative. Thus, persons who speak only English may have a non-English household language assigned to them in tabulations of persons by household language. Figure 1. Classifications of 1990 Census Languages Spoken at Home With Illustrative Examples Classification Classification Examples Spanish Spanish and Spanish Creole French French and French Creole Other Indo- European Dutch Portuguese or Portuguese Creole German Indie Hindi, Bengali, Gujarathi, Punjabi, Other Indo- European Danish, Norwegian, Swedish, Italian, Greek, Russian Polish, Czech, Persian All other languages Chinese Japanese Korean Tagalog Vietnamese Other Asian or Pacific Island languages Thai, Mon-Khmer, Chamorro, Hawaiian All other languages Arabic, Amharic, Hungarian, Native North American languages, Finnish, Hebrew, languages of Africa Ability to Speak English Persons 5 years old and over who reported that they spoke a language other than English in question 1 5a were also asked in question 1 5c to indicate their ability to speak English based on one of the following categories: "Very well," "Well," "Not well," or "Not at all." The data on ability to speak English represent the person's own perception about his or her own ability or, because census questionnaires are usually completed by one household member, the responses may represent the perception of another household member. The instructions to interviewers did not include any information on how to interpret the response categories in question 1 5c. Persons who reported that they spoke a language other than English at home but whose ability to speak English was not reported, were assigned the English-language ability of a randomly selected person of the same age, Hispanic origin, nativity and year of entry, and language group. Linguistic Isolation—A household in which no person age 1 4 years or over speaks only English and no person age 1 4 years or over who speaks a language other than English speaks English "Very well" is classified as "lin- guistically isolated." All the members of a linguistically B-20 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS isolated household are tabulated as linguistically isolated, including members under age 14 years who may speak only English. Limitation of the Data—Persons who speak a language other than English at home may have first learned that language at school. However, these persons would be expected to indicate that they speak English "Very well." Persons who speak a language other than English, but do not do so at home, should have been reported as not speaking a language other than English at home. The extreme detail in which language names were coded may give a false impression of the linguistic preci- sion of these data. The names used by speakers of a language to identify it may reflect ethnic, geographic, or political affiliations and do not necessarily respect linguis- tic distinctions. The categories shown in the tabulations were chosen on a number of criteria, such as information about the number of speakers of each language that might be expected in the Virgin Islands. Comparability—These same questions on language were asked for the first time in the 1 980 census. The question on ability to speak English was asked for the first time in 1 980. In some tabulations from 1980, the categories "Very well" and "Well" were combined. In tabulations showing ability to speak English, persons who reported that they speak English "Very well" are presented separately from persons who reported their ability to speak English as less than "Very well." MARITAL STATUS The data on marital status were derived from answers to questionnaire item 6, which was asked of all persons. The marital status classification refers to the status at the time of enumeration. Data on marital status are tabulated only for persons 1 5 years old and over. All persons were asked whether they were "now mar- ried," "consensually married," "widowed," "divorced," "separated," or "never married." Couples who live together (unmarried persons, persons consensually married) were allowed to report the marital status they considered the most appropriate. Never Married—Includes all persons who have never been married, including persons whose only marriage(s) was annulled. Ever Married—Includes persons married at the time of enumeration (including those separated), widowed, or divorced. Consensually Married—-Includes persons living in a mar- ital union without a civil or religious matrimonial contract and are classified as "now married;" they are reported separately as "consensually married." The category may also include couples who live together if they consider this category the most appropriate. Separated—Includes persons legally separated or other- wise absent from their spouse because of marital discord. Included are persons who have been deserted or who have parted because they no longer want to live together but who have not obtained a divorce. Widowed—Includes widows and widowers who have not remarried. Divorced—Includes persons who are legally divorced and who have not remarried. Now Married—All persons whose current marriage has not ended by widowhood or divorce. This category includes persons defined above as "separated." Spouse Present—Married persons whose wife or hus- band was enumerated as a member of the same household, including those whose spouse may have been temporarily absent for such reasons as travel or hospitalization. Spouse Absent—Married persons whose wife or hus- band was not enumerated as a member of the same household. This category also includes all married per- sons living in group quarters. Separated—Defined above. Spouse Absent, Other—Married persons whose wife or husband was not enumerated as a member of the same household, excluding separated. Included is any person whose spouse was employed and living away from home or in an institution or absent in the U.S. Armed Forces. Differences between the number of currently married males and the number of currently married females occur because of reporting differences and because some hus- bands and wives have their usual residence in different areas. When marital status was not reported, it was imputed according to the relationship to the householder and sex and age of the person. (For more information on imputa- tion, see Appendix C, Accuracy of the Data.) Now Married, Except Separated—Includes persons whose current marriage has not ended through widowhood, divorce, or separation (regardless of previous marital history). In certain tabulations, currently married persons are further classified as "spouse present" or "spouse absent." Comparability—The 1990 marital status definitions are the same as those used in 1 980 with the exception of the term "never married" which replaces the term "single" in tabulations. A general marital status question has been asked in every census since 1 880. DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-21 MOBILITY LIMITATION STATUS The data on mobility limitation status were derived from answers to questionnaire item 19a, which was asked of all persons 1 5 years old and over. Persons were identified as having a mobility limitation if they had a health condition that had lasted for 6 or more months and which made it difficult to go outside the home alone. Examples of outside activities on the questionnaire included shopping and visiting the doctor's office. The term "health condition" referred to both physical and mental conditions. A temporary health problem, such as a broken bone that was expected to heal normally, was not considered a health condition. Comparability—This was the first time that a question on mobility limitation was included in the census. PLACE OF BIRTH The data on place of birth were derived from answers to questionnaire item 8, which was asked of all persons. The place-of-birth question asked respondents to report the name of the island in the U.S. Virgin Islands or the U.S. State, commonwealth, territory, or the foreign country where they were born. Persons born outside the Virgin Islands or the United States were asked to report their place of birth according to current international bound- aries. Since numerous changes in boundaries of foreign countries have occurred in the last century, some persons may have reported their place of birth in terms of bound- aries that existed at the time of their birth or emigration, or in accordance with their own national preference. Persons not reporting place of birth were assigned the birthplace of another family member or were allocated the response of another person with similar characteristics. Persons allocated as foreign born also were not allocated a specific country of birth, but were classified as "Born abroad, country not specified." Nativity—Information on place of birth and citizenship were used to classify the population into two major cate- gories: native and foreign born. When information on place of birth was not reported, nativity was assigned on the basis of answers to citizenship, if reported, and other characteristics. Native—Includes persons born in the U.S. Virgin Islands, the United States, Puerto Rico, or another outlying area of the United States. The small number of persons who were born in a foreign country but have at least one American parent also are included in this category. The native population is classified in the following groups: persons born on the island on which they resided at the time of the census; persons born on a different B-22 island in the U.S. Virgin Islands; persons born in the United States; persons born in Puerto Rico or another outlying area of the U.S.; and persons born abroad with at least one American parent. Foreign Born—Includes persons not classified as "Native." The foreign-born population is shown by selected area, country, or region of birth; the places of birth shown in the data products were selected based on the number of respondents who reported that area or country of birth. Comparability—Similar data were shown in tabulations for the 1 980 census and other recent censuses. Prior to the 1 990 census, persons not reporting place of birth were generally classified as native. Earlier censuses did not ask for the specific State or U.S. territory of birth. The questionnaire instruction to report mother's usual place of residence instead of the location of the hospital (if born in a hospital) was dropped in 1 990. Evaluation studies of 1 970 and 1 980 U.S. census data demonstrated that this instruction was generally ignored or misunderstood. Although the hospital and the mother's residence is the same island or U.S. State for most births, this change may have a slight effect on island of birth and on State of birth in the United States for States with large metropolitan areas that strad- dle State boundaries. POVERTY STATUS IN 1989 The data on poverty status were derived from answers to the same questions as the income data, questionnaire items 32 and 33. (For more information, see the discussion under "Income in 1989.") Poverty statistics presented in census publications were based on a definition originated by the Social Security Administration in 1 964 and subse- quently modified by Federal interagency committees in 1 969 and 1 980 and prescribed by the Office of Manage- ment and Budget in Directive 14 as the standard to be used by Federal agencies for statistical purposes. At the core of this definition was the 1 961 economy food plan, the least costly of four nutritionally adequate food plans designed by the Department of Agriculture. It was determined from the Agriculture Department's 1 955 survey of food consumption that families of three or more persons spend approximately one-third of their income on food; hence, the poverty level for these families was set at three times the cost of the economy food plan. For smaller families and persons living alone, the cost of the economy food plan was multiplied by factors that were slightly higher to compensate for the relatively larger fixed expenses for these smaller households. The income cutoffs used by the Census Bureau to determine the poverty status of families and unrelated individuals included a set of 48 thresholds arranged in a two-dimensional matrix consisting of family size (from one person to nine or more persons) cross-classified by pres- ence and number of family members under 1 8 years old (from no children present to eight or more children present). DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS Unrelated individuals and two-person families were further differentiated by age of the householder (under 65 years old and 65 years old and over). The total income of each family or unrelated individual in the sample was tested against the appropriate poverty threshold to determine the poverty status of that family or unrelated individual. If the total income was less than the corresponding cutoff, the family or unrelated individual was classified as "below the poverty level." The number of persons below the poverty level was the sum of the number of persons in families with incomes below the poverty level and the number of unrelated individuals with incomes below the poverty level. The poverty thresholds are revised annually to allow for changes in the cost of living as reflected in the Consumer Price Index. The average poverty threshold for a family of four persons was $12,674 in 1989. (For more information, see table A below.) Poverty thresholds were applied on a national basis and were not adjusted for regional, State or local variations in the cost of living. Therefore, the thresh- olds used for the Virgin Islands are the same as those used in the United States. For a detailed discussion of the poverty definition, see U.S. Bureau of the Census, Current Population Reports, Series P-60, No. 171, Poverty in the United States: 1988 and 1989. Persons for Whom Poverty Status is Determined- Poverty status was determined for all persons except institutionalized persons, persons in military group quarters and in college dormitories, and unrelated individuals under 1 5 years old. These groups also were excluded from the denominator when calculating poverty rates. Specified Poverty Levels—Since the poverty levels cur- rently in use by the Federal Government do not meet all the needs of data users, some of the data are presented for alternate levels. These specified poverty levels are obtained by multiplying the income cutoffs at the poverty level by the appropriate factor. For example, the average income cutoff at 125 percent of poverty level was $15,843 ($12,674 x 1.25) in 1989 for a family of four persons. Weighted Average Thresholds at the Poverty Level—The average thresholds shown in the first column of table A are weighted by the presence and number of children. For example, the weighted average threshold for a given family size is obtained by multiplying the threshold for each presence and number of children category within the given family size by the number of families in that category. These products are then aggregated across the entire range of presence and number of children catego- ries, and the aggregate is divided by the total number of families in the group to yield the weighted average thresh- old at the poverty level for that family size. Since the basic thresholds used to determine the pov- erty status of families and unrelated individuals are applied to all families and unrelated individuals, the weighted average poverty thresholds are derived using all families and unrelated individuals rather than just those classified as being below the poverty level. To obtain the weighted poverty thresholds for families and unrelated individuals below alternate poverty levels, the weighted thresholds shown in table A may be multiplied directly by the appro- priate factor. The weighted average thresholds presented in the table are based on the March 1 990 Current Popu- lation Survey. However, these thresholds would not differ significantly from those based on the 1 990 census. Income Deficit—Represents the difference between the total income of families and unrelated individuals below the poverty level and their respective poverty thresholds. In computing the income deficit, families reporting a net income loss are assigned zero dollars and for such cases the deficit is equal to the poverty threshold. This measure provided an estimate of the amount which would be required to raise the incomes of all poor families Table A. Poverty Thresholds in 1989 by Size of Family and Number of Related Children Under 18 Years Size of Family Unit Weighted average thresh- olds Related children under 18 years None One Two Three Four Five Six Seven Eight or more One person (unrelated individual) Under 65 years 65 years and over Two persons Householder under 65 years . . Householder 65 years and over Three persons Four persons Five persons Six persons Seven persons Eight persons Nine or more persons $6,310 6 451 5,947 8,076 8,343 7,501 9,885 12,674 14,990 16,921 19,162 21,328 25,480 $6,451 5,947 8,303 7,495 9,699 12,790 15,424 17,740 20,412 22,830 27,463 $8,547 8,515 9,981 12,999 15,648 17,811 20,540 23,031 27,596 $9,990 12,575 15,169 17,444 20,101 22,617 27,229 $12,619 14,798 17,092 19,794 22,253 26,921 $14,572 16,569 19,224 21,738 26,415 $16,259 18,558 21,084 25,719 $17,828 20,403 25,089 $20,230 24,933 $23,973 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-23 and unrelated individuals to their respective poverty thresh- olds. The income deficit is thus a measure of the degree of impoverishment of a family or unrelated individual. How- ever, caution must be used in comparing the average deficits of families with different characteristics. Apparent differences in average income deficits may, to some extent, be a function of differences in family size. Mean Income Deficit—Represents the amount obtained by dividing the total income deficit of a group below the poverty level by the number of families (or unrelated individuals) in that group. Comparability—The poverty definition used in the 1990 and 1 980 censuses differed slightly from the one used in the 1970 census. Three technical modifications were made to the definition used in the 1 970 census as described below: 1. The separate thresholds for families with a female householder with no husband present and all other families were eliminated. For the 1980 and 1990 censuses, the weighted average of the poverty thresh- olds for these two types of families was applied to all types of families, regardless of the sex of the house- holder. 2. Farm families and farm unrelated individuals no longer had a set of poverty thresholds that were lower than the thresholds applied to nonfarm families and unre- lated individuals. The farm thresholds were 85 percent of the corresponding levels for nonfarm families in the 1 970 census. The same thresholds were applied to all families and unrelated individuals regardless of resi- dence in 1980 and 1990. 3. The thresholds by size of family were extended from seven or more persons in 1970 to nine or more persons in 1980 and 1990. These changes resulted in a minimal increase in the number of poor at the national level. For a complete discussion of these modifications and their impact, see the Current Population Reports, Series P-60, No. 133. The population covered in the poverty statistics derived from the 1980 and 1990 censuses was essentially the same as in the 1970 census. The only difference was that in 1980 and 1990, unrelated individuals under 15 years old were excluded from the poverty universe, while in 1970, only those under 14 years old were excluded. The poverty data from the 1960 census excluded all persons in group quarters and included all unrelated individuals regardless of age. It was unlikely that these differences in population coverage would have had significant impact when compar- ing the poverty data for persons since the 1960 censuses. RACE The data on race were derived from answers to ques- tionnaire item 4, which was asked of all persons. The concept of race as used by the Census Bureau reflects self-identification; it does not denote any clear-cut scien- tific definition of biological stock. The data for race repre- sent self-classification by people according to the race with which they most closely identify. Furthermore, it is recognized that the categories of the race item include both racial and national origin or socio-cultural groups. During direct interviews conducted by enumerators, if a person could not provide a single response to the race question, he or she was asked to select, based on self-identification, the group which best described his or her racial identity. If a person could not provide a single race response, the race of the mother was used. If a single race response could not be provided for the person's mother, the first race reported by the person was used. In all cases where occupied housing units, households, or families are classified by race, the race of the householder was used. The racial classification used by the Census Bureau generally adheres to the guidelines in Federal Statistical Directive No. 1 5, issued by the Office of Management and Budget, which provides standards on ethnic and racial categories for statistical reporting to be used by all Federal agencies. The racial categories used in the 1990 census data products are provided below. Black—Includes persons who indicated their race as "Black or Negro" or reported entries such as West Indian, Jamaican, Haitian, Black Puerto Rican, African American, or Afro-American. White—Includes persons who indicated their race as "White" or reported entries such as French, German, Dutch, Danish, Lebanese, Near Easterner, Arab, or Polish. Asian or Pacific Islander—Includes persons who indi- cated their race as "Asian or Pacific Islander" or reported entries such as Chinese, Filipino, Japanese, Hawaiian, Samoan, or Guamanian. American Indian, Eskimo, or Aleut—Includes persons who classified themselves as such in one of the specific race categories identified below. American Indian—Includes persons who indicated their race as "American Indian," entered the name of an Indian tribe, or reported such entries as Canadian Indian, French-American Indian, or Spanish-American Indian. Eskimo—Includes persons who indicated their race as "Eskimo" or reported entries such as Arctic Slope, Inupiat, and Yupik. Aleut—Includes persons who indicated their race as "Aleut" or reported entries such as Alutiiq, Egegik, and Pribilovian. B-24 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS Other Race—Includes all other persons not included in the "Black," "White," "Asian or Pacific Islander," or the "American Indian, Eskimo, or Aleut" race categories described above. Persons reporting in the "Other race" category and providing write-in entries such as multiracial, multiethnic, mixed, interracial, or a Spanish/Hispanic origin group (such as Mexican, Cuban, or Puerto Rican) are included here. If the race entry for a member of a household was missing on the questionnaire, race was assigned based upon the reported entries of race by other household members using specific rules of precedence of household relationship. For example, if race was missing for the daughter of the householder, then the race of her mother (as female householder or female spouse) would be assigned. If there was no female householder or spouse in the household, the daughter would be assigned her father's (male householder) race. If race was not reported for anyone in the household, the race of a householder in a previously processed household was assigned. This pro- cedure is a variation of the general imputation procedures described in Appendix C, Accuracy of the Data. Limitation of the Data—In the 1990 census, respondents sometimes did not fill in a check box or filled the "Other race" check box and wrote in a response, such as West Indian, in this write-in space for "Other race." During the coding and editing process, these responses were assigned to the appropriate racial designation. Also, some Hispanic origin persons did not mark a race category, but provided entries such as Mexican or Puerto Rican. These persons were classified in the "Other race" category during the coding and editing process. Comparability—Differences between the 1990 census and earlier censuses affect the comparability of data for certain racial groups. In the 1980 census, there were no separate categories for persons identifying as "Asian or Pacific Islander" or "Indian (Amer.), Eskimo, or Aleut." Persons who identified as such were reported in the "Other" category. In the 1 990 census, there were separate categories for "Asian or Pacific Islander" and "Indian (Amer.), Eskimo, or Aleut," as well as two write-in spaces allowing "Asian or Pacific Islander" persons or "Other race" persons to identify specific race groups. (In 1980 there was just one write-in space for persons identifying as "Other.") Persons entering a write-in response had their individual entries coded and classified to the appropriate race regardless of whether they filled a check box. This allowed for the accurate tabulation and reporting of per- sons identifying as "Asian or Pacific Islander" or "Indian (Amer.), Eskimo, or Aleut" along with those reporting as "Black or Negro" or "White" in the 1990 census. REFERENCE WEEK The data on labor force status and journey to work were related to the reference week; that is, the calendar week preceding the date on which the respondents were inter- viewed by enumerators. This week is not the same for all respondents since the enumeration was not completed in one week. The occurrence of holidays during the enumer- ation period could affect the data on actual hours worked during the reference week, but probably had no effect on overall measurement of employment status (see the dis- cussion below on "Comparability"). Comparability—The reference weeks for the 1990 and 1980 censuses differ in that Passover and Good Friday occurred in the first week of April 1 980, but in the second week of April 1 990. Many workers presumably took time off for those observances. The differing occurrence of these holidays could affect the comparability of the 1 990 and 1 980 data on actual hours worked for some areas if the respective weeks were the reference weeks for a significant number of persons. The holidays probably did not affect the overall measurement of employment status since this information was based on work activity during the entire reference week. RESIDENCE IN 1985 The data on residence in 1985 were derived from answers to questionnaire item 1 4b. This item asked for the name of the island in the U.S. Virgin Islands, the U.S. State, commonwealth, territory, or foreign country where the person was living on April 1, 1985, for those persons reporting in question 14a that on that date they lived in a different house than their current residence. Residence in 1 985 is used in conjunction with location of current resi- dence to determine the extent of residential mobility of the population and the resulting redistribution of the population among the islands and between the islands and the U.S. States and foreign countries. When no information on residence in 1 985 was reported for a person, information for other family members, if available, was used to assign a location of residence in 1985. All cases of nonresponse or incomplete response that were not assigned a previous residence based on information from other family members were allocated the previous residence of another person with similar charac- teristics who provided complete information. The tabulation category, "Same house," includes all persons 5 years old and over who did not move during the 5 years as well as those who had moved but by 1 990 had returned to their 1985 residence. The category, "Different house in the U.S. Virgin Islands," includes persons who lived in the U.S. Virgin Islands in 1985 but in a different house or apartment from the one they occupied on April 1 , 1 990. These movers are then further subdivided according to the type of move. In most tabulations, persons who moved within the U.S. Virgin Islands are divided into those moving within the same island and those moving from a different island. Movers from outside the U.S. Virgin Islands are usually divided into three groups according to their 1985 resi- dence: "In the United States," "On another Caribbean DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-25 island," and "Elsewhere." The last group "Elsewhere," includes those persons who were residing in a foreign country, Puerto Rico, or another outlying area of the U.S. in 1985, including members of the Armed Forces and their dependents. The number of persons who were living in a different house in 1 985 is somewhat less than the total number of moves during the 5-year period. Some persons in the same house at the two dates had moved during the 5-year period but by the time of the census had returned to their 1 985 residence. Other persons who were living in a different house had made one or more intermediate moves. For similar reasons, the number of persons living on a different island may be understated. Comparability—Similar questions were asked in the 1 970 and 1980 censuses but nonresponse was not allocated in those earlier censuses. SCHOOL ENROLLMENT AND LABOR FORCE STATUS Tabulation of data on enrollment, educational attain- ment, and labor force status for the population 16 to 19 years old allows for calculation of the proportion of the age group who are not enrolled in school and not high school graduates or "dropouts" and an unemployment rate for the "dropout" population. Definitions of the three topics and descriptions of the census items from which they were derived are presented in "Educational Attainment," "Employ- ment Status," and "School Enrollment and Type of School." The published tabulations include both the civilian and Armed Forces populations, but labor force status is pro- vided for the civilian population only. Therefore, the com- ponent labor force statuses may not add to the total lines enrolled in school, high school graduate, and not high school graduate. The difference is Armed Forces. Comparability—The tabulation of school enrollment by labor force status is similar to that published in 1980 census reports. The 1980 census tabulation included a single data line for Armed Forces; however, enrollment, attainment, and labor force status data were shown for the civilian population only. In 1970, a tabulation was included for 16 to 21 year old males not attending school. SCHOOL ENROLLMENT AND TYPE OF SCHOOL Data on school enrollment were derived from answers to questionnaire item 1 1 , which was asked of all persons. Persons were classified as enrolled in school if they reported attending a "regular" public or private school or college at any time between February 1, 1990, and the time of enumeration. The question included instructions to "include only nursery school, kindergarten, elementary school, and schooling which would lead to a high school diploma or a college degree" as regular school. The interviewers were instructed that enrollment in a trade or business school, company training, or tutoring were not to be included unless the course would be accepted for credit at a regular elementary school, high school, or college. Persons who did not answer the enrollment question were assigned the enrollment status and type of school of a person with the same age, race or Hispanic origin, and, at older ages, sex, whose residence was in the same or a nearby area. Public and Private School—Includes persons who attended school in the reference period and indicated they were enrolled by marking one of the questionnaire categories for either "public school, public college" or "private school, private college." A public school is defined as "any school or college controlled and supported by the local or Federal Government." Schools supported and controlled primarily by religious organizations or other private groups are defined as private. Persons who filled both the "public" and "private" circles are edited to the first entry, "public." Level of School in Which Enrolled—Persons who were enrolled in school were classified as enrolled in "prepri- mary school," "elementary or high school," or "college" according to their response to question 1 2 (years of school completed or highest degree received). Persons who were enrolled and reported completing nursery school or less were classified as enrolled in "preprimary school," which includes kindergarten. Similarly, enrolled persons who had completed at least kindergarten, but not high school, were classified as enrolled in elementary or high school. Enrolled persons who reported completing high school or some college or having received a post-secondary degree were classified as enrolled in "college." Enrolled persons who reported completing the twelfth grade but receiving "NO DIPLOMA" were classified as enrolled in high school. (For more information on level of school, see the discussion under "Educational Attainment") Comparability—School enrollment questions have been included in the decennial census since 1 930; grade attended was first asked in 1 950; type of school was first asked in 1970. In 1930, the enrollment question referred to atten- dance since September 1. In 1940, the reference was to attendance in the month preceding the census, and in the 1 950 and subsequent censuses, the question referred to attendance in the two months preceding the census date. In past years, instructions on the types of schools to include have changed. In the 1950 instructions, the term "regular school" was introduced, and it was defined as schooling which "advances a person towards an elemen- tary or high school diploma or a college, university, or professional school degree." Vocational, trade, or busi- ness schools were excluded unless they were graded and considered part of a regular school system. On-the-job training was excluded, as were nursery school and kinder- garten. Instruction by correspondence was excluded unless it was given by a regular school and counted towards promotion. B-26 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS In 1960, the question used the term "regular school or college" and a similar, though expanded, definition of "regular" was included in the instructions, which continued to exclude nursery school, but included kindergarten. In the 1970 census, the questionnaire used the phrase "regular school or college" and included instructions to "count nursery school, kindergarten, and schooling which leads to an elementary school certificate, high school diploma, or college degree." The age range for which enrollment data have been obtained and published has varied over the censuses. Information on enrollment was recorded for persons 5 to 24 years old in 1 940; for persons 5 to 29 years old in 1 950; for persons age 5 to 34 in 1 960; and for those 3 years old and over since 1970. Most of the published enrollment figures referred to persons 5 to 24 in 1 940, 5 to 29 in 1 950, 5 to 34 in 1 960, 3 to 34 in 1 970, and 3 years old and over in 1980 and 1990. This growth in the age group whose enrollment was reported reflects increased interest in the number of children in preprimary schools and in the number of older persons attending colleges and universi- ties. In the 1950 and subsequent censuses, college students were enumerated where they lived while attending college, whereas in earlier censuses, they generally were enumer- ated at their parental homes. This change should not affect the comparability of national figures on college enrollment since 1 940; however, it may affect the comparability over time of enrollment figures at sub-national levels. Type of school was first introduced in the 1 970 census. The type of school was incorporated into the yes... response categories for the enrollment question. The types identified were "public," "parochial," and "other private." In the 1980 census, "private, church related" and "private, not church related" replaced "parochial" and "other private." Grade of enrollment was first available in the 1950 census, where it was obtained from responses to the question on highest grade of school completed. Enumer- ators were instructed that "for a person still in school, the last grade completed will be the grade preceding the one in which he or she was now enrolled." From 1 960 to 1 980, grade of enrollment was obtained from the highest grade attended in the two-part question used to measure educa- tional attainment. (For more information, see the discus- sion under "Educational Attainment.") The form of the question from which level of enrollment was derived in the 1990 census most closely corresponds to the question used in 1950. While data from prior censuses can be aggregated to provide levels of enrollment comparable to the 1990 census, 1990 data cannot be disaggregated to show single grade of enrollment as in previous censuses. Data on school enrollment were also collected and published by other Federal and local government agen- cies. Where these data were obtained from administrative records of school systems and institutions of higher learn- ing, they were only roughly comparable with data from population censuses and household surveys because of differences in definitions and concepts, subject matter covered, time references, and enumeration methods. At the local level, the difference between the location of the institution and the residence of the student may affect the comparability of census and administrative data. Differ- ences between the boundaries of school districts and census geographic units also may affect these compari- sons. SELF-CARE LIMITATION STATUS The data on self-care limitation status were derived from answers to questionnaire item 19b, which was asked of all persons 1 5 years old and over. Persons were identified as having a self-care limitation if they had a health condition that had lasted for 6 or more months and which made it difficult to take care of their own personal needs, such as dressing, bathing, or getting around inside the home. The term "health condition" referred to both physical and mental conditions. A temporary health problem, such as a broken bone that was expected to heal normally was not considered a health condition. Comparability—This was the first time that a question on self-care limitation was included in the census. Sex Ratio—A measure derived by dividing the total num- ber of males by the total number of females and multiplying by 100. Comparability—A question on the sex of individuals has been asked of the total population in every census. SEX The data on sex were derived from answers to ques- tionnaire item 3, which was asked of all persons. For most cases in which sex was not reported, it was determined by the appropriate entry from the person's given name and household relationship. Otherwise, sex was imputed accord- ing to the relationship to the householder and the age and marital status of the person. (For more information on imputation, see Appendix C, Accuracy of the Data.) Sex Ratio—A measure derived by dividing the total num- ber of males by the total number of females and multiplying by 100. Comparability—A question on the sex of individuals has been asked of the total population in every census. VETERAN STATUS Data on veteran status, period of military service, and years of military service were derived from answers to questionnaire item 1 7, which was asked of all persons. DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-27 Veteran Status—The data on veteran status were derived from responses to question 17a. For census data prod- ucts, a "civilian veteran" is a person 16 years old or over who had served (even for a short time) but is not now serving on active duty in the U.S. Army, Navy, Air Force, Marine Corps, or the Coast Guard, or who served as a Merchant Marine seaman during World War II. Persons who served in the National Guard or military Reserves are classified as veterans only if they were ever called or ordered to active duty not counting the 4-6 months for initial training or yearly summer camps. All other civilians 1 6 years old and over are classified as nonveterans. Period of Military Service—Persons who indicated in question 1 7a that they had served on active duty (civilian veterans) or were now on active duty were asked to indicate in question 1 7b the period or periods in which they served. Persons serving in at least one wartime period are classified in their most recent wartime period. For example, persons who served both during the Korean conflict and the post-Korean peacetime era between February 1955 and July 1964 are classified in one of the two "Korean conflict" categories. If the same person had also served during the Vietnam era, he or she would instead be included in the "Vietnam era and Korean conflict" cate- gory. The responses were edited to eliminate inconsisten- cies between reported period(s) of service and the age of the person and to cancel out reported combinations of periods containing unreasonable gaps (for example, a person could not serve during World War I and the Korean conflict without serving during World War II). Note that the period of service categories shown in this report are mutually exclusive. Years of Military Service—Persons who indicated in question 1 7a that they had served on active duty (civilian veterans) or were now on active duty were asked to report the total number of years of active-duty service in question 1 7c. The data were edited for consistency with responses to question 17b (Period of Military Service) and with the age of the person. Limitation of the Data—There may be a tendency for the following kinds of persons to report erroneously that they served on active duty in the Armed Forces: (a) persons who served in the National Guard or military Reserves but were never called to active duty; (b) civilian employees or volunteers for the USO, Red Cross, or the Department of Defense (or its predecessor Departments, War and Navy); and (c) employees of the Merchant Marine or Public Health Service. There may also be a tendency for persons to erroneously round up months to the nearest year in question 17c (for example, persons with 1 year 8 months of active duty military service may mistakenly report "2 years"). Comparability—Since census data on veterans were based on self-reported responses, they may differ from data from other sources such as administrative records of the Department of Defense. Census data may also differ from Veterans Administration data on the benefits-eligible population, since factors determining eligibility for veterans benefits differ from the rules for classifying veterans in the census. The wording of the question on veteran status (1 7a) for 1990 was expanded from the veteran/not veteran ques- tion in 1980 to include questions on current active duty status and service in the military Reserves and the National Guard. The expansion was intended to clarify the appro- priate response for persons in the Armed Forces and for persons who served in the National Guard or military Reserve units only. For the first time in a census, service during World War II as a Merchant Marine Seaman was considered active-duty military service and persons with such service were counted as veterans. An additional period of military service, "September 1980 or later" was added in 1990. As in 1970 and 1980, persons reporting more than one period of service are shown in the most recent wartime period of service category. Question 1 7c (Years of Military Service) was new for 1990. WORK DISABILITY STATUS The data on work disability were derived from answers to questionnaire item 1 8, which was asked of all persons 1 5 years old and over. Persons were identified as having a work disability if they had a health condition that had lasted for 6 or more months and which limited the kind or amount of work they could do at a job or business. A person was limited in the kind of work he or she could do if the person had a health condition which restricted his or her choice of jobs. A person was limited in the amount of work if he or she was not able to work full-time. Persons with a work disability were further classified as "Prevented from work- ing" or "Not prevented from working." The term "health condition" referred to both physical and mental conditions. A temporary health problem, such as a broken bone that was expected to heal normally, was not considered a health condition. Comparability—The wording of the question on work disability was the same in 1990 as in 1980. Information on work disability was first collected in 1970. In that census, the work disability question did not contain a clause restricting the definition of disability to limitations caused by a health condition that had lasted 6 or more months; however, it did contain a separate question about the duration of the disability. WORK STATUS IN 1989 The data on work status in 1989 were derived from answers to questionnaire item 31, which was asked of all persons. Persons 1 6 years old and over who worked 1 or more weeks according to the criteria described below are classified as "Worked in 1989." All other persons 16 years B-28 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS old and over are classified as "Did not work in 1989." Some tabulations showing work status in 1 989 include 1 5 year olds; these persons, by definition, are classified as "Did not work in 1989." Weeks Worked in 1989 The data on weeks worked in 1989 were derived from responses to questionnaire item 31 b. Question 31 b (Weeks Worked in 1989) was asked of persons 16 years old and over who indicated in question 31a that they worked in 1989. The data pertain to the number of weeks during 1 989 in which a person did any work for pay or profit (including paid vacation and paid sick leave) or worked without pay on a family farm or in a family business. Weeks of active service in the Armed Forces are also included. Usual Hours Worked Per Week Worked in 1989 The data on usual hours worked per week worked in 1989 were derived from answers to questionnaire item 31c. This question was asked of persons 16 years old and over who indicated that they worked in 1 989. The data pertain to the number of hours a person usually worked during the weeks worked in 1989. The respondent was to report the number of hours worked per week in the majority of the weeks he or she worked in 1 989. If the hours worked per week varied considerably during 1 989, the respondent was to report an approximate average of the hours worked per week. The statistics on usual hours worked per week in 1 989 are not necessarily related to the data on actual hours worked during the census reference week (question 21b). Persons 16 years old and over who reported that they usually worked 35 or more hours each week during the weeks they worked are classified as "Usually worked full time;" persons who reported that they usually worked 1 to 34 hours are classified as "Usually worked part time." Year-Round Full-Time Workers—All persons 16 years old and over who usually worked 35 hours or more per week for 50 to 52 weeks in 1 989. Number of Workers in Family in 1989—The term "worker" as used for these data is defined based on the criteria for Work Status in 1989. Limitation of the Data— It is probable that the number of persons who worked in 1989 and the number of weeks worked are understated since there was some tendency for respondents to forget intermittent or short periods of employment or to exclude weeks worked without pay. There may also be a tendency for persons not to include weeks of paid vacation among their weeks worked; one result may be that the census figures may understate the number of persons who worked "50 to 52 weeks." Comparability—The data on weeks worked collected in the 1990 census were comparable with data from the 1 980, 1 970, and 1 960 censuses, but may not be entirely comparable with data from the 1 940 and 1 950 censuses. Since the 1 960 census, two separate questions have been used to obtain this information. The first identified persons with any work experience during the year and, thus, indicated those persons for whom the questions on num- ber of weeks worked applied. In 1940 and 1950, however, the questionnaires contained only a single question on number of weeks worked. In 1 970, persons responded to the question on weeks worked by indicating one of six weeks-worked intervals. In 1980 and 1990, persons were asked to enter the specific number of weeks they worked. YEAR OF ENTRY The data on year of entry were derived from answers to questionnaire item 1 0, which was asked of all persons. The question, "When did this person come to the U.S. Virgin Islands to stay?" was asked of persons who indicated in the question on citizenship that they were not born in the U.S. Virgin Islands. (For more information, see the discus- sion under "Citizenship.") The 1990 census questions, tabulations, and census data products about citizenship and year of entry include no reference to immigration. All persons who were born and resided outside the U.S. Virgin Islands before becom- ing residents of the U.S. Virgin Islands have a date of entry. Some of these persons are U.S. citizens by birth (e.g., persons born in Puerto Rico or born abroad of American parents). To avoid any possible confusion concerning the date of entry of persons who are U.S. citizens by birth, the term, "year of entry" is used in this report instead of the term "year of immigration." Limitation of the Data—The census questions on nativity, citizenship, and year of entry were not designed to mea- sure the degree of permanence of residence in the United States. The phrase, "to stay" was used to obtain the year in which the person became a resident of the United States. Although the respondent was directed to indicate the year he or she entered the country "to stay," it was difficult to ensure that respondents interpreted the phrase correctly. Comparability—A question on year of entry, (alternately called "year of immigration") was asked in the 1970 and 1980 censuses. In 1980, the question on year of entry included six arrival time intervals. The number of arrival intervals was expanded to ten in 1990. In 1980, the question on year of entry was asked only of the foreign- born population. In 1990, all persons not born in the Virgin Islands were to complete the question on year of entry. DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-29 HOUSING CHARACTERISTICS LIVING QUARTERS Living quarters are classified as either housing units or group quarters. (For more information, see the discussion under "Group Quarters.") Usually, living quarters are in structures intended for residential use (for example, a one-family home, apartment house, hotel or motel, board- ing house, or mobile home). Living quarters also may be in structures intended for nonresidential use (for example, the rooms in a warehouse where a guard lives), as well as in places such as tents, vans, shelters for the homeless, and dormitories. Housing Units—A housing unit is a house, an apartment, a mobile home or trailer, a group of rooms or a single room occupied as separate living quarters or, if vacant, intended for occupancy as separate living quarters. Separate living quarters are those in which the occupants live and eat separately from any other persons in the building and which have direct access from outside the building or through a common hall. The occupants may be a single family, one person living alone, two or more families living together, or any other group of related or unrelated persons who share living arrangements. For vacant units, the criteria of separate- ness and direct access are applied to the intended occu- pants whenever possible. If that information cannot be obtained, the criteria are applied to the previous occu- pants. Both occupied and vacant housing units are included in the housing unit inventory, except that recreational vehi- cles, boats, vans, tents, and the like are included only if they are occupied as someone's usual place of residence. Vacant mobile homes are included provided they are intended for occupancy on the site where they stand. Vacant mobile homes on dealers' sales lots, or in storage yards are excluded from the housing inventory. If the living quarters contain 9 or more persons unre- lated to the householder or person in charge (a total of 10 unrelated persons), they are classified as group quarters. If the living quarters contain eight or fewer persons unrelated to the householder or person in charge, they are classified as housing units. Occupied Housing Units—A housing unit is classified as occupied if it is the usual place of residence of the person or group of persons living in it at the time of enumeration, or if the occupants are only temporarily absent; that is, away on vacation. If all the persons staying in the unit at the time of the census have their usual place of residence elsewhere, the unit is classified as vacant. A household includes all the persons who occupy a housing unit as their usual place of residence. By definition, the count of occupied housing units for 100-percent tabulations is the same as the count of households or householders. Vacant Housing Units—A housing unit is vacant if no one is living in it at the time of enumeration, unless its occu- pants are only temporarily absent. Units temporarily occu- pied at the time of enumeration entirely by persons who have a usual residence elsewhere are also classified as vacant. (For more information, see discussion under "Usual Home Elsewhere.") New units not yet occupied are classified as vacant housing units if construction has reached a point where all exterior windows and doors are installed and final usable floors are in place. Vacant units are excluded if they are open to the elements; that is, the roof, walls, windows, and/or doors no longer protect the interior from the elements, or if there is positive evidence (such as a sign on the house or in the block) that the unit is condemned or is to be demolished. Also excluded are quarters being used entirely for nonresidential purposes, such as a store or an office, or quarters used for the storage of business sup- plies or inventory, machinery, or agricultural products. Hotels, Motels, Rooming Houses, Etc.—Occupied rooms or suites of rooms in hotels, motels, and similar places are classified as housing units only when occupied by perma- nent residents; that is, persons who consider the hotel as their usual place of residence or have no usual place of residence elsewhere. Vacant rooms or suites of rooms are classified as housing units only in those hotels, motels, and similar places in which 75 percent or more of the accom- modations are occupied by permanent residents. If any of the occupants in a rooming or boarding house live and eat separately from others in the building and have direct access, their quarters are classified as separate housing units. Staff Living Quarters—The living quarters occupied by staff personnel within any group quarters are separate housing units if they satisfy the housing unit criteria of separateness and direct access; otherwise, they are con- sidered group quarters. Comparability—The first Census of Housing in 1940 established the "dwelling unit" concept. Although the term became "housing unit" and the definition has been modi- fied slightly in succeeding censuses, the 1 990 definition is essentially comparable to previous censuses. There was no change in the housing unit definition between 1 980 and 1990. ACREAGE The data on acreage were obtained from questionnaire items H5a and H1 9a. Questions H5a and H1 9a were asked at all occupied and vacant one-family houses and mobile homes. Question H5a asks whether the house or mobile home is located on a place of 1 or more acres. The intent of this item is to exclude owner-occupied and renter-occupied one-family houses on 1 or more acres from the specified owner- and renter-occupied universes for value and rent tabulations. B-30 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS Question H19a provides data on whether the unit is located on less than 1 acre, 1 to 9 acres, or 1 or more acres. The main purpose of this item, in conjunction with question H19b on agricultural sales, is to identify farm units. (For more information, see discussion under "Farm Residence.") For both items, the land may consist of more than one tract or plot. These tracts or plots are usually adjoining; however, they may be separated by a road, creek, another piece of land, etc. AGRICULTURAL SALES Data on the sales of agricultural crops were obtained from questionnaire item H19b, which was asked at occu- pied one-family houses and mobile homes located on lots of 1 acre or more. Data for this item exclude units on lots of less than 1 acre, units located in structures containing 2 or more units, and all vacant units. This item refers to the total amount (before taxes and expenses) received in 1 989 from the sale of crops, vegetables, fruits, nuts, livestock and livestock products, and nursery and forest products, produced on "this property." Respondents new to a unit were asked to estimate total agricultural sales in 1989 even if some portion of the sales had been made by other occupants of the unit. This item is used mainly to classify housing units as farm or nonfarm residences, not to provide detailed information on the sale of agricultural products. Detailed information on the sale of agricultural products is provided by the Census Bureau's Census of Agriculture. (For more infor- mation, see the discussion under "Farm Residence.") BEDROOMS The data on bedrooms were obtained from question- naire item H9, which was asked at both occupied and vacant housing units. The number of bedrooms is the count of rooms designed to be used as bedrooms; that is, the number of rooms that would be listed as bedrooms if the house or apartment were on the market for sale or for rent. Included are all rooms intended to be used as bedrooms even if they currently are being used for some other purpose. A housing unit consisting of only one room, such as a one-room efficiency apartment, is classified, by definition, as having no bedroom. Comparability—Data on bedrooms have been collected in every census since 1960. In 1970 and 1980, data for bedrooms were shown only for year-round units. In past censuses, a room was defined as a bedroom if it was used mainly for sleeping even if also used for other purposes. Rooms that were designed to be used as bedrooms but used mainly for other purposes were not considered to be bedrooms. A distribution of housing units by number of bedrooms calculated from data collected in a U.S. 1986 U.S. test showed virtually no differences in the two ver- sions except in the two bedroom category, where the previous "use" definition showed a slightly lower propor- tion of units. BOARDED-UP STATUS Boarded-up status was obtained from questionnaire item C2 and was determined for all vacant units. Boarded-up units have windows and doors covered by wood, metal, or masonry to protect the interior and to prevent entry into the building. A single-unit structure, a unit in a multi-unit structure, or an entire multi-unit structure may be boarded-up in this way. For certain census data products, boarded-up units are shown only for units in the "Other vacant" category. A unit classified as "Usual home elsewhere" can never be boarded up. (For more information, see the discussion under "Usual Home Elsewhere.") Comparability—This item was first asked in the 1980 census and was shown only for year-round vacant housing units. In 1990, data are shown for all vacant housing units. BUSINESS ON PROPERTY The data for business on property were obtained from questionnaire item H5b, which was asked at all occupied and vacant one-family houses and mobile homes. This question is used to exclude owner-occupied one-family houses with business or medical offices on the property from certain statistics on financial characteristics. A business must be easily recognizable from the out- side. It will usually have a separate outside entrance and have the appearance of a business, such as a grocery store, restaurant, or barbershop. It may be either attached to the house or mobile home or be located elsewhere on the property. Those housing units in which a room is used for business or professional purposes and have no recog- nizable alterations to the outside are not considered as having a business. Medical offices are considered busi- nesses for tabulation purposes. Comparability—Data on business on property have been collected for the Virgin Islands since 1 940. CONDOMINIUM FEE The data on condominium fee were obtained from questionnaire item H25, which was asked at owner-occupied condominiums. A condominium fee normally is charged monthly to the owners of the individual condominium units by the condominium owners association to cover operat- ing, maintenance, administrative, and improvement costs of the common property (grounds, halls, lobby, parking DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-31 areas, laundry rooms, swimming pool, etc.) The costs for utilities and/or fuels may be included in the condominium fee if the units do not have separate meters. Data on condominium fees may include real estate tax and/or insurance payments for the common property, but do not include real estate taxes or fire, hazard, and flood insurance for the individual unit already reported in ques- tions H21 and H22. Amounts reported were the regular monthly payment, even if paid by someone outside the household or remain unpaid. Costs were estimated as closely as possible when exact costs were not known. The data from this item were added to payments for mortgages (both first and junior mortgages and home equity loans); real estate taxes; fire, hazard, and flood insurance payments; and utilities and fuels to derive "Selected Monthly Owner Costs" and "Selected Monthly Owner Costs as a Percentage of Household Income in 1989" for condominium owners. Comparability—This is a new item in 1990. CONDOMINIUM STATUS The data on condominium housing units were obtained from questionnaire item H18, which was asked at both occupied and vacant housing units. Condominium is a type of ownership that enables a person to own an apartment or house in a development of similarly owned units and to hold a common or joint ownership in some or all of the common areas and facilities such as land, roof, hallways, entrances, elevators, swimming pool, etc. Condominiums may be single-family houses as well as units in apartment buildings. A condominium unit need not be occupied by the owner to be counted as such. A unit classified as "mobile home or trailer" or "other" (see discussion under "Units in Structure") cannot be a condominium unit. Limitation of the Data—Testing done prior to the 1 980 and 1990 censuses indicated that the number of condo- miniums may be slightly overstated. Comparability— In 1970, condominiums were grouped together with cooperative housing units, and the data were reported only for owner-occupied cooperatives and con- dominiums. Beginning in 1980, the census identified all condominium units and the data were shown for renter- occupied and vacant year-round condominiums as well as owner occupied. CONTRACT RENT The data on contract rent (also referred to as "rent asked" for vacant units) were obtained from questionnaire item H7a, which was asked at all occupied housing units that were rented for cash rent and all vacant housing units that were for rent at the time of enumeration. B-32 Housing units that are renter occupied without payment of cash rent are shown separately as "No cash rent" in census data products. The unit may be owned by friends or relatives who live elsewhere and who allow occupancy without charge. Rent-free houses or apartments may be provided to compensate caretakers, ministers, tenant farm- ers, sharecroppers, or others. Contract rent is the monthly rent agreed to or con- tracted for, regardless of any furnishings, utilities, fees, meals, or services that may be included. For vacant units, it is the monthly rent asked for the rental unit at the time of enumeration. If the contract rent includes rent for a business unit or for living quarters occupied by another household, the respondent was instructed to report that part of the rent estimated to be for his or her unit only. Respondents were asked to report rent only for the housing unit enumerated and to exclude any rent paid for additional units or for business premises. If a renter pays rent to the owner of a condominium or cooperative, and the condominium fee or cooperative carrying charge is also paid by the renter to the owner, the respondent was instructed to include the fee or carrying charge. If a renter receives payments from lodgers or roomers who are listed as members of the household, the respond- ent was instructed to report the rent without deduction for any payments received from the lodgers or roomers. The respondent was instructed to report the rent agreed to or contracted for even if paid by someone else such as friends or relatives living elsewhere, or a church or welfare agency. In some tabulations, contract rent is presented for all renter-occupied housing units, as well as specified renter- occupied and specified vacant-for-rent units. Specified renter-occupied and specified vacant-for-rent units exclude one-family houses and mobile homes on 1 or more acres. (For more information on rent, see the discussion under "Gross Rent.") Median and Quartile Contract Rent—The median divides the rent distribution into two equal parts. Quartiles divide the rent distribution into four equal parts. In computing median and quartile contract rent, units reported as "No cash rent" are excluded. Median and quartile rent calcu- lations are rounded to the nearest whole dollar. (For more information on medians and quartiles, see the discussion under "Derived Measures.") Aggregate Contract Rent—To calculate aggregate con- tract rent, the amount assigned for the category "less than $80" is $50. The amount assigned to the category "$1 ,000 or more" is $1,250. Mean contract rent is rounded to the nearest whole dollar. (For more information on aggregates and means, see the discussion under "Derived Mea- sures.") Comparability—Data on this item have been collected since 1 930. For 1 990, quartiles were added because the DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS range of rents and values in the Virgin Islands has increased in recent years. Upper and lower quartiles can be used to note large rent and value differences among various geographic areas. COOKING FUEL The data on cooking fuel were obtained from question- naire item H14, which was asked at occupied housing units. The data show the type of fuel used most for cooking. Bottled or Tank Gas—Includes liquid propane gas stored in bottles or tanks which are refilled or exchanged when empty. Fuel Oil, Kerosene, Etc.—Includes fuel oil, kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, and other combustible liquids. Wood or charcoal—Includes purchased wood or char- coal, wood cut by household members on their property or elsewhere, driftwood, sawmill or construction scraps, or the like. Other Fuel—Includes all other fuels not specified else- where. No Fuel Used—Includes units that do not use any fuel or that do not have kitchen facilities. Comparability—Data on cooking fuel were collected for the first time in 1980. DURATION OF VACANCY The data for duration of vacancy (also referred to as "months vacant") were obtained from questionnaire item D, which was completed by census enumerators. The statistics on duration of vacancy refer to the length of time (in months and years) between the date the last occupants moved from the unit and the time of enumeration. The data, therefore, do not provide a direct measure of the total length of time units remain vacant. For newly constructed units which have never been occupied, the duration of vacancy is counted from the date construction was completed. For recently converted or merged units, the time is reported from the date conver- sion or merger was completed. Units occupied by an entire household with a usual home elsewhere are assigned to the "Less than 1 month" interval. Comparability—Similar data were collected in 1 980. These data were shown in 1 980 only for year-round housing units. In 1990, these data are shown for all housing units. FARM RESIDENCE The data on farm residence were obtained from ques- tionnaire items H19a and H19b. An occupied one-family house or mobile home is classified as a farm residence if: (1) the housing unit is located on a property of 1 acre or more, and (2) at least $100 worth of agricultural products were sold from the property in 1989. Group quarters and housing units that are in multi-unit buildings or vacant are not included as farm residences. A one-family unit occupied by a tenant household paying cash rent for land and buildings is enumerated as a farm residence only if sales of agricultural products from its yard (as opposed to the general property on which it is located) amounted to at least $100 in 1989. A one-family unit occupied by a tenant household that does not pay cash rent is enumerated as a farm residence if the remainder of the farm (including its yard) qualifies as a farm. Farm residence is provided as an independent data item only for housing units located in rural areas. It may be derived for housing units in urban areas from the data items on acreage and sales of agricultural products on the public-use microdata sample (PUMS) files. (For more information on PUMS, see Appendix F, Data Products and User Assistance.) The farm population consists of persons in households living in farm residences. Some persons who are counted on a property classified as a farm (including in some cases farm workers) are excluded from the farm population. Such persons include those who reside in multi-unit buildings or group quarters. Comparability—Farm residence was not defined in the 1980 Census of the Virgin Islands. Note that the definition of a farm residence differs from the definition of a farm in the Census of Agriculture (Factfinder for the Nation: Agri- cultural Statistics, Bureau of the Census, 1 989). GROSS RENT Gross rent is the contract rent plus the estimated average monthly cost of utilities (electricity, gas, and water) and fuels (oil, charcoal, kerosene, wood, etc.) if these are paid for by the renter (or paid for the renter by someone else). Gross rent is intended to eliminate differ- entials which result from varying practices with respect to the inclusion of utilities and fuels as part of the rental payment. Renter units occupied without payment of cash rent are shown separately as "No cash rent" in the tabulations. Comparability—Data on gross rent have been collected since 1 940 for renter-occupied housing units. DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-33 GROSS RENT AS A PERCENTAGE OF HOUSEHOLD INCOME IN 1989 Gross rent as a percentage of household income in 1989 is a computed ratio of monthly gross rent to monthly household income (total household income in 1 989 divided by 1 2). The ratio was computed separately for each unit and was rounded to the nearest whole percentage. Units for which no cash rent is paid and units occupied by households that reported no income or a net loss in 1 989 comprise the category "Not computed." when it has all of the following: (1) an installed sink with piped water, (2) a range, cook top and convection or microwave oven, or cookstove, and (3) a refrigerator. All kitchen facilities must be located in the structure. They need not be in the same room. Portable cooking equip- ment is not considered a range or cookstove. An ice box is not considered to be a refrigerator. Comparability-Earlier censuses collected data on individ- ual components, such as kitchen sink and type of refriger- ation equipment. INSURANCE FOR FIRE, HAZARD, AND FLOOD The data on fire, hazard, and flood insurance were obtained from questionnaire item H22, which was asked at all owner-occupied one-family houses, condominiums, and mobile homes. The statistics for this item refer to the annual premium for fire, hazard, and flood insurance on the property (land and buildings); that is, policies that protect the property and its contents against loss due to damage by fire, lightning, winds, hail, flood, explosion, and so on. Liability policies are included only if they are paid with the fire, hazard, and flood insurance premiums and the amounts for fire, hazard, and flood cannot be separated. Premiums are included even if paid by someone outside the household or remain unpaid. When premiums are paid on other than a yearly basis, the premiums are converted to a yearly basis. The payment for fire, hazard, and flood insurance is added to payments for real estate taxes, utilities, fuels, and mortgages (both first and junior mortgages and home equity loans) to derive "Selected Monthly Owner Costs" and "Selected Monthly Owner Costs as a Percentage of Household Income in 1989." A separate question (H23d) determines whether insur- ance premiums are included in the mortgage payment to the lender(s). This makes it possible to avoid counting these premiums twice in the computations. Comparability—Data on payment for fire and hazard insurance were collected for the first time in 1980. Flood insurance was not specifically mentioned in the wording of the question in 1980. The question was asked only at owner-occupied one-family houses. Excluded were mobile homes, condominiums, houses with a business or medical office on the property, houses on 10 or more acres, and housing units in multi-unit buildings. In 1990, the question was asked of all one-family owner-occupied houses, includ- ing houses on 10 or more acres. It also was asked at mobile homes, condominiums, and one-family houses with a business or medical office on the property. KITCHEN FACILITIES Data on kitchen facilities were obtained from question- naire item H11, which was asked at both occupied and vacant housing units. A unit has complete kitchen facilities B-34 MEALS INCLUDED IN RENT The data on meals included in the rent were obtained from questionnaire item H7b, which was asked of all occupied housing units that were rented for cash and all vacant housing units that were for rent at the time of enumeration. The statistics on meals included in rent are presented for specified renter-occupied and specified vacant-for-rent units. Specified renter-occupied and specified vacant-for- rent units exclude one-family houses on 1 or more acres. (For more information, see the discussion under "Contract Rent") Comparability—This is a new item in 1990. It is intended to measure "congregate" housing which is generally con- sidered to be housing units where the rent includes meals and other services, such as transportation to shopping and recreation. MOBILE HOME OR BOAT COSTS The data on mobile home/boat costs were obtained from questionnaire item H26, which was asked at owner- occupied mobile homes and boats. These data include the total yearly costs for personal property taxes, land or site rent, marina fees or ship rent, registration fees, and license fees on all owner-occupied mobile homes and boats. The instructions are to not include taxes already reported in question H21. Costs are estimated as closely as possible when exact costs are not known. Amounts are the total for an entire 1 2-month billing period, even if they are paid by someone outside the household or remain unpaid. The data from this item are added to payments for mortgages, real estate taxes, fire, hazard, and flood insur- ance payments, utilities, and fuels to derive selected monthly owner costs for mobile home and boat occupants. Comparability—This item is new for 1 990. MORTGAGE PAYMENT The data on mortgage payment were obtained from questionnaire item H23b, which was asked at owner occupied one-family houses, condominiums, boats, and DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS mobile homes. Question H23b provides the regular monthly amount required to be paid the lender for the first mortgage (deed of trust, contract to purchase, or similar debt) on the property. Amounts are included even if the payments are delinquent or paid by someone else. The amounts reported are included in the computation of "Selected Monthly Owner Costs" and "Selected Monthly Owner Costs as a Percentage of Household Income in 1989" for units with a mortgage. The amounts reported include everything paid to the lender including principal and interest payments, real estate taxes, fire, hazard, and flood insurance payments, and mortgage insurance premiums. Separate questions deter- mine whether real estate taxes and fire, hazard, and flood insurance payments are included in the mortgage payment to the lender. This makes it possible to avoid counting these components twice in the computation of "Selected Monthly Owner Costs." In most census data products, the tabulations for "Selected Monthly Owner Costs" and "Selected Monthly Owner Costs as a Percentage of Household Income in 1989" usually are shown separately for units "with a mortgage" and for units "not mortgaged." The category "not mort- gaged" is comprised of housing units owned free and clear of debt. Comparability—The item was asked for the first time in 1980. In 1980, the mortgage status questions were asked at owner-occupied one-family houses on less than 3 acres. Excluded were mobile homes, boats, condominiums, houses with a business or medical office, houses on 3 or more acres, and housing units in multi-unit buildings. In 1990, the questions were asked of all one-family owner-occupied housing units, including houses on 1 or more acres. They were also asked at mobile homes, boats, condominiums, and houses with a business or medical office. Comparability—Information on mortgage payment was collected for the first time in 1 980. It was collected only at owner-occupied one-family houses. Excluded were mobile homes, condominiums, houses with a business or medical office on the property, one-family houses on 10 or more acres, and housing units in multi-unit buildings. In 1990, the questions on monthly mortgage payments were asked of all owner-occupied one-family houses, including one-family houses on 10 or more acres. They were also asked at mobile homes, condominiums, boats, and one-family houses with a business or medical office. The 1980 census obtained total regular monthly mort- gage payments, including payments on second or junior mortgages, from a single question. Two questions were used in 1990; one for regular monthly payments on first mortgages, and one for regular monthly payments on second or junior mortgages or home equity loans. (For more information, see the discussion under "Second or Junior Mortgage Payment") MORTGAGE STATUS The data on mortgage status were obtained from ques- tionnaire items H23a and H24a, which were asked at owner-occupied one-family houses, condominiums, boats, and mobile homes. "Mortgage" refers to all forms of debt where the property is pledged as security for repayment of the debt. It includes such debt instruments as deeds of trust, trust deeds, contracts to purchase, land contracts, junior mortgages and home equity loans. A mortgage is considered a first mortgage if it has prior claim over any other mortgage or if it is the only mortgage on the property. All other mortgages, (second, third, etc.) are considered junior mortgages. A home equity loan is generally a junior mortgage. If no first mortgage is reported, but a junior mortgage or home equity loan is reported, then the loan is considered a first mortgage. PERSONS IN UNIT This item is based on the 1 00-percent count of persons in occupied housing units. All persons occupying the housing unit are counted, including the householder, occu- pants related to the householder, and lodgers, roomers, boarders, and so forth. The data on "persons in unit" show the number of housing units occupied by the specified number of per- sons. The phrase "persons in unit"- is used for housing tabulations, "persons in households" for population items. Figures for "persons in unit" match those for "persons in household." Median Persons in Unit—In computing median persons in unit, a whole number is used as the midpoint of an interval; thus, a unit with 4 persons is treated as an interval ranging from 3.5 to 4.5 persons. Median persons is rounded to the nearest hundredth. (For more information on medi- ans, see the discussion under "Derived Measures.") Persons in Occupied Housing Units—This is the total population minus those persons living in group quarters. "Persons per occupied housing unit" is computed by dividing the population living in housing units by the number of occupied housing units. PERSONS PER ROOM "Persons per room" is obtained by dividing the number of persons in each occupied housing unit by the number of rooms in the unit. Persons per room is rounded to the nearest hundredth. The figures shown refer, therefore, to the number of occupied housing units having the specified ratio of persons per room. Mean Persons Per Room—This is computed by dividing persons in housing units by the aggregate number of rooms. This is intended to provide a measure of utilization. DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-35 A higher mean may indicate a greater degree of utilization or crowding; a low mean may indicate under-utilization. (For more information on means, see the discussion under "Derived Measures.") PLUMBING FACILITIES The data on plumbing facilities were obtained from questionnaire item H10, which was asked at both occupied and vacant housing units. Complete plumbing facilities include hot and cold piped water, a flush toilet, and a bathtub or shower. All three facilities must be located inside the house, apartment, or mobile home, but not necessarily in the same room. Housing units are classified as lacking complete plumbing facilities when any of the three facilities are not present. Comparability—The 1990 data on complete plumbing facilities are not strictly comparable with the 1980 data. In 1980, complete plumbing facilities were defined as hot and cold piped water, a bathtub or shower, and a flush toilet in the housing unit for the exclusive use of the residents of that unit. In 1990, the Census Bureau dropped the require- ment of exclusive use from the definition of complete plumbing facilities. From 1940 to 1970, separate and more detailed questions were asked on piped water, bathing, and toilet facilities. In 1 970 and 1 980, the data on plumbing facilities were shown only for year-round housing units. POVERTY STATUS OF HOUSEHOLDS IN 1989 The data on poverty status of households were derived from answers to the income questions. Households are classified below the poverty level when the total 1989 income of the family or of the nonfamily householder is below the appropriate poverty threshold. The income of persons living in the household who are unrelated to the householder is not considered when determining the pov- erty status of a household, nor does their presence affect the household size in determining the appropriate poverty threshold. The poverty thresholds vary depending upon three criteria: size of family, number of children, and age of the family householder or unrelated individual for one and two-persons households. (For more information, see the discussion of "Poverty Status in 1989" and "Income in 1989" under Population Characteristics.) REAL ESTATE TAXES The data on real estate taxes were obtained from questionnaire item H21 , which was asked at owner-occupied one-family houses, condominiums, and mobile homes. The statistics from this question refer to the total amount of all real estate taxes on the entire property (land and buildings) payable in 1989 to all taxing jurisdictions, including special assessments, school taxes, county taxes, and so forth. B-36 Real estate taxes include State, local, and all other real estate taxes even if delinquent, unpaid, or paid by some- one who is not a member of the household. However, taxes due from prior years are not included. If taxes are paid on other than a yearly basis, the payments are converted to a yearly basis. The payment for real estate taxes is added to payments for fire, hazard, and flood insurance; utilities and fuels; and mortgages (both first and junior mortgages and home equity loans) to derive "Selected Monthly Owner Costs" and "Selected Monthly Owner Costs as a Percentage of Household Income in 1989." A separate question (H23c) determines whether real estate taxes are included in the mortgage payment to the lender(s). This makes it possible to avoid counting taxes twice in the computations. Comparability—Data for real estate taxes were collected for the first time in 1 980. The question was asked only at owner-occupied one-family houses. Excluded were mobile homes or trailers, condominiums, houses with a business or medical office on the property, houses on 3 or more acres, and housing units in multi-unit buildings. In 1990, the question was asked of all one-family owner-occupied houses, including houses on 10 or more acres. It also was asked at mobile homes, condominiums, and one-family houses with a business or medical office on the property. ROOMS The data on rooms were obtained from questionnaire item H3, which was asked at both occupied and vacant housing units. The statistics on rooms are in terms of the number of housing units with a specified number of rooms. The intent of this question is to count the number of whole rooms used for living purposes. For each unit, rooms include living rooms, dining rooms, kitchens, bedrooms, finished recreation rooms, enclosed porches suitable for year-round use, and lodger's rooms. Excluded are strip or pullman kitchens, bathrooms, open porches, balconies, halls or foyers, half-rooms, utility rooms, unfinished attics or basements, or other unfinished space used for storage. A partially divided room is a separate room only if there is a partition from floor to ceiling, but not if the partition consists solely of shelves or cabinets. Median Rooms—This measure divides the room distribu- tion into two equal parts, one-half of the cases falling below the median number of rooms and one-half above the median. In computing median rooms, the whole num- ber is used as the midpoint of the interval; thus, the category "3 rooms" is treated as an interval ranging from 2.5 to 3.5 rooms. Median rooms is rounded to the nearest tenth. (For more information on medians, see the discus- sion under "Derived Measures.") Aggregate Rooms—To calculate aggregate rooms, an arbitrary value of "10" is assigned to rooms for units falling within the terminal category, "9 or more." (For more information on aggregates and means, see the discussion under "Derived Measures.") DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS Comparability—Data on rooms have been collected since 1940. In 1970 and 1980, these data were shown only for year-round housing units. In 1990, these data are shown for all housing units. SECOND OR JUNIOR MORTGAGE PAYMENT The data on second or junior mortgage payments were obtained from questionnaire items H24a and H24b, which were asked at owner-occupied one-family houses, condo- miniums, boats, and mobile homes. Question H24a asks whether a second or junior mortgage or a home equity loan exists on the property. Question H24b provides the regular monthly amount required to be paid to the lender on all second or junior mortgages and home equity loans. Amounts are included even if the payments are delinquent or paid by someone else. The amounts reported are included in the computation of "Selected Monthly Owner Costs" and "Selected Monthly Owner Costs as a Percentage of House- hold Income in 1989" for units with a mortgage. All mortgages other than first mortgages are classified as "junior" mortgages. A second mortgage is a junior mortgage that gives the lender a claim against the property that is second to the claim of the holder of the first mortgage. Any other junior mortgage(s) would be subordi- nate to the second mortgage. A home equity loan is a line of credit available to the borrower that is secured by real estate. It may be placed on a property that already has a first or second mortgage, or it may be placed on a property that is owned free and clear. If the respondents answered that no first mortgage existed, but a second mortgage did (as in the above case with a home equity loan), a computer edit assigned the unit a first mortgage and made the first mortgage monthly payment the amount reported in the second mortgage. The second mortgage data were then made "No" in question H24a and blank in question H24b. Comparability—The 1980 census obtained total regular monthly mortgage payments, including payments on sec- ond or junior mortgages, from one single question. Two questions were used in 1990: one for regular monthly payments on first mortgages, and one for regular monthly payments on second or junior mortgages and home equity loans. SELECTED MONTHLY OWNER COSTS The data on selected monthly owner costs were obtained from questionnaire items H20 through H26 for owner- occupied one-family houses, condominiums, boats, and mobile homes. Selected monthly owner costs is the sum of payments for mortgages, deeds of trust, contracts to purchase, or similar debts on the property (including payments for the first mortgage, second or junior mort- gages, and home equity loans); real estate taxes; fire, hazard, and flood insurance on the property; utilities (elec- tricity, gas, and water); and fuels (oil, coal, kerosene, wood, etc.). It also includes, where appropriate, the monthly condominium fee for condominiums, and boat and mobile home costs such as personal property taxes, site rent, registration fees, and license fees. In certain tabulations, selected monthly owner costs are presented separately for specified owner-occupied hous- ing units (owner-occupied one-family houses on fewer than 1 acres without a business or medical office on the property), owner-occupied condominiums, and owner-occupied mobile homes. Data usually are shown separately for units "with a mortgage" and for units "not mortgaged." Median Selected Monthly Owner Costs—This measure is rounded to the nearest whole dollar. Comparability—The components of selected monthly owner costs were collected for the first time in 1 980. The 1 990 tabulations of selected monthly owner costs for specified owner-occupied housing units are virtually identical to 1 980, the primary difference was the amounts of the first and second mortgages were collected in separate ques- tions in 1 990, while the amounts were collected in a single question in 1980. The component parts of the item were tabulated for boats, mobile homes, and condominiums for the first time in 1 990. In 1 980 and 1 990, costs for electricity and gas were collected as average monthly costs. SELECTED MONTHLY OWNER COSTS AS A PERCENTAGE OF HOUSEHOLD INCOME IN 1989 The information on selected monthly owner costs as a percentage of household income in 1 989 is the computed ratio of selected monthly owner costs to monthly house- hold income in 1 989. The ratio was computed separately for each unit and rounded to the nearest whole percent- age. The data are tabulated separately for specified owner- occupied units, condominiums, boats, and mobile homes. Separate distributions are often shown for units "with a mortgage" and for units "not mortgaged." Units occupied by households reporting no income or a net loss in 1 989 are included in the "not computed" category. (For more information, see the discussion under "Selected Monthly Owner Costs.") Comparability—The components of selected monthly owner costs were collected for the first time in 1 980. The tabula- tions of "Selected Monthly Owner Costs as a Percentage of Household Income in 1989" for specified owner-occupied housing units are comparable to 1 980. SEWAGE DISPOSAL The data on sewage disposal were obtained from questionnaire item H1 6, which was asked at both occupied and vacant housing units. Housing units are either con- nected to a public sewer, to a septic tank or cesspool, or DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-37 they dispose of sewage by other means. A public sewer may be operated by a government body or by a private organization. A housing unit is considered to be connected to a septic tank or cesspool when the unit is provided with an underground pit or tank for sewage disposal. The category, "Other means" includes housing units which dispose of sewage in some other way. Comparability—Data on sewage disposal have been col- lected since 1940. In 1970 and 1980, data were shown only for year-round housing units. In 1990, data are shown for all housing units. SOURCE OF WATER The data on source of water were obtained from ques- tionnaire items H15a and H15b, which were asked at both occupied and vacant housing units. Housing units may receive their water supply from a number of sources. A common source supplying water to five or more units is classified as "a public system only" or "a public system and cistern." Another source of water may be "a cistern, tanks, or drums only" in which rain water is collected. "A public standpipe" is an elevated tank or vertical storage cylinder or street hydrant which is connected to a public system from which nearby residents draw water. The category "some other source such as an individual well or a spring" includes water obtained from creeks, rivers, lakes, etc. Purchase of water from water vendor—Households were asked whether or not water was purchased from a water vendor from January through December 1 989. House- holds are considered to have purchased water from a water vendor, even if only one purchase was made during the year; and even though their primary source of water is from a public system, and public standpipe, or some other source. Bottled water purchased from a commercial estab- lishment such as a grocery store or drugstore is not included. Comparability—Data on source of water have been col- lected in every census since 1940. In 1970 and 1980, data were shown only for year-round housing units. TELEPHONE IN HOUSING UNIT The data on telephones were obtained from question- naire item H12, which was asked at occupied housing units. A telephone must be inside the house or apartment for the unit to be classified as having a telephone. Units where the respondent uses a telephone located inside the building but not in the respondent's living quarters are classified as having no telephone. Comparability—This is a new item in 1 990. B-38 TENURE The data for tenure were obtained from questionnaire item H4, which was asked at all occupied housing units. All occupied housing units are classified as either owner occupied or renter occupied. Owner Occupied—A housing unit is owner occupied if the owner or co-owner lives in the unit even if it is mortgaged or not fully paid for. The owner or co-owner must live in the unit and usually is the person listed in column 1 of the questionnaire. The unit is "Owned by you or someone in this household with a mortgage or loan" if it is being purchased with a mortgage or some other debt arrange- ment such as a deed of trust, trust deed, contract to purchase, land contract, or purchase agreement. The unit is also considered owned with a mortgage if it is built on leased land and there is a mortgage on the unit. A housing unit is "Owned by you or someone in this household free and clear (without a mortgage)" if there is no mortgage or other similar debt on the house, apartment, or mobile home including units built on leased land if the unit is owned outright without a mortgage. Although owner- occupied housing units are divided between mortgaged and owned free and clear on the questionnaire, census data products containing 1 00-percent data show only total owner-occupied counts. More extensive mortgage informa- tion was collected on the long-form questionnaire and are shown in census products containing sample data. Renter Occupied—All occupied housing units which are not owner occupied, whether they are rented for cash rent or occupied without payment of cash rent, are classified as renter occupied. "No cash rent" units are separately identified in the rent tabulations. Such units are generally provided free by friends or relatives or in exchange for services such as a resident manager, caretaker, minister, or tenant farmer. Housing units on military bases also are classified in the "No cash rent" category. "Rented for cash rent" includes units in continuing care, sometimes called life care arrangements. These arrange- ments usually involve a contract between one or more individuals and a health services provider guaranteeing the individual shelter, usually a house or apartment, and services, such as meals or transportation to shopping or recreation. Comparability—Data on tenure have been collected for the Virgin Islands since 1930. In 1970, the question on tenure also included a category for condominium and cooperative ownership. In 1980, condominium units and cooperatives were dropped from the tenure item, and since 1980, only condominium units are identified in a separate question. For 1990, the response categories were expanded to allow the respondent to report whether the unit was owned with a mortgage or free and clear (without a mortgage). The distinction between units owned with a mortgage and DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS units owned free and clear was added in 1 990 to improve the count of owner-occupied units. Research after the 1 980 census indicated some respondents did not consider their units owned if they had a mortgage. UNITS IN STRUCTURE The data on units in structure (also referred to as "type of structure") were obtained from questionnaire item H2, which was asked at all housing units. A structure is a separate building that either has open spaces on all sides or is separated from other structures by dividing walls that extend from ground to roof. In determining the number of units in a structure, all housing units, both occupied and vacant, are counted. Stores or office space are excluded. The statistics are presented for the number of housing units in structures of specified type and size, not for the number of residential buildings. 1-Unit, Detached—This is a 1-unit structure detached from any other structure; that is, with open space on all four sides. Such structures are considered detached even if they have an adjoining shed or garage. A one-family house which contains a business is considered detached as long as the building has open space on all four, sides. Mobile homes or trailers to which one or more permanent rooms have been added or built are also included. 1-Unit, Attached—This is a 1-unit structure which has one or more walls extending from ground to roof separating it from adjoining structures. In row houses (sometimes called townhouses), double houses, or houses attached to non- residential structures, each house is a separate, attached structure if the dividing or common wall goes from ground to roof. 2 or More Units—These are units in structures containing 2 or more housing units, further categorized as units in structures with 2, 3 or 4, 5 to 9, 10 to 19, and 20 or more units. Mobile Home or Trailer—Both occupied and vacant mobile homes to which no permanent rooms have been added are counted in this category. Mobile homes or trailers used only for business purposes or for extra sleeping space and mobile homes or trailers for sale on a dealer's lot, or in storage are not counted in the housing inventory. Boat or Houseboat—Included in this category are boats and houseboats that are occupied as housing units. Other—This category is for any living quarters occupied as a housing unit that does not fit the previous categories. Examples that fit this category are abandoned cars, tents, campers, and vans. Comparability—Data on units in structure have been collected for the Virgin Islands since 1940, on mobile homes and trailers since 1 950, and on boats since 1 980. In 1 970 and 1 980, these data were shown only for year-round housing units. In 1990, these data are shown for all housing units. The category, "Tent, van, etc." was replaced in 1990 by the category, "Other." USUAL HOME ELSEWHERE The data for usual home elsewhere were obtained from questionnaire item E, which was completed by census employees. A housing unit temporarily occupied at the time of enumeration entirely by persons with a usual residence elsewhere is classified as vacant. The occu- pants are classified as having a "Usual home elsewhere" and are counted at the address of their usual place of residence. Typical examples are people in a vacation home and persons renting living quarters temporarily for work. Limitation of the Data—Evidence from previous cen- suses suggests that in some areas enumerators marked units as "vacant—usual home elsewhere" when they should have marked "vacant—regular." Comparability—Data for usual home elsewhere were tabulated for the first time in 1 980. UTILITIES The data on utility costs were obtained from question- naire items H20a through H20d, which were asked at all occupied housing units. Questions H20a through H20d asked for the monthly cost of utilities (electricity, gas, water) and other fuels (oil, coal, wood, kerosene, etc.). The average monthly costs are included in the computation of "Gross Rent," "Gross Rent as a Percentage of Household Income in 1989," "Selected Monthly Owner Costs," and "Selected Monthly Owner Costs as a Percentage of Household Income in 1989." Costs are recorded if paid by or billed to occupants, a welfare agency, relatives, or friends. Costs that are paid by landlords, included in the rent payment, or included in condominium or cooperative fees are excluded. Limitation of the Data—Research has shown that respon- dents tended to overstate their expenses for electricity and gas when compared to utility company records. Comparability—Data on utilities were collected for the first time in 1 980. VACANCY STATUS The data on vacancy status were obtained from ques- tionnaire item C1, which was completed by census enu- merators. Vacancy status and other characteristics of DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-39 vacant units were determined by enumerators obtaining information from landlords, owners, neighbors, rental agents, and others. Vacant units are subdivided according to their housing market classification as follows: ForRent—These are vacant units offered "for rent" and vacant units offered either "for rent or for sale." For Sale Only—These are vacant units being offered "for sale only," including units in cooperatives and condominium projects if the individual units are offered "for sale only." Rented or Sold, Not Occupied—-If any money rent has been paid or agreed upon but the new renter has not moved in as of the date of enumeration, or if the unit has recently been sold but the new owner has not yet moved in, the vacant unit is classified as "rented or sold, not occupied." For Seasonal, Recreational, or Occasional Use—-These are vacant units used or intended for use only in certain seasons or for weekend or other occasional use through- out the year. Seasonal units include those used for summer or winter sports or recreation, such as beach cottages and hunting cabins. Seasonal units may also include quarters for such workers as herders and log- gers. Interval ownership units, sometimes called shared ownership or time-sharing condominiums, also are included here. Other Vacant—W a vacant unit does not fall into any of the classifications specified above, it is classified as "other vacant." For example, this category includes units held for occupancy by a caretaker or janitor, and units held for personal reasons of the owner. Homeowner Vacancy Rate—This is the percentage rela- tionship between the number of vacant units for sale and the total homeowner inventory. It is computed by dividing the number of vacant units for sale only by the sum of the owner-occupied units and the number of vacant units that are for sale only. Rental Vacancy Rate—This is the percentage relation- ship of the number of vacant units for rent to the total rental inventory. It is computed by dividing the number of vacant units for rent by the sum of the renter-occupied units and the number of vacant units for rent. Comparability—Data on vacancy status have been col- lected since 1940. For 1990, the category, "seasonal/rec- reational/occasional use" combined vacant units classi- fied in 1980 as "seasonal" and "held for occasional use." Also, in 1970 and 1980, housing characteristics were generally presented only for year-round units. In 1990, housing characteristics are shown for all housing units. VALUE The data on value (also referred to as "price asked" for vacant units) were obtained from questionnaire item H6, which was asked at housing units that were owned, being bought, or vacant for sale at the time of enumeration. Value is the respondent's estimate of how much the property (house and lot, mobile home and lot, or condo- minium unit) would sell for if it were for sale. If the house or mobile home is owned or being bought, but the land on which it sits is not, the respondent was asked to estimate the combined value of the house or mobile home and the land. For vacant units, value is the price asked for the property. Value is tabulated separately for all owner-occupied and vacant-for-sale-only housing units, owner-occupied and vacant-for-sale mobile homes or trailers, and specified owner-occupied and specified vacant-for-sale-only hous- ing units. Specified owner-occupied and specified vacant- for-sale-only housing units include only one-family houses on less than 1 acres without a business or medical office on the property. The data for "specified" units exclude mobile homes, houses with a business or medical office, houses on 1 or more acres, and housing units in multi-unit buildings. Median and Quartile Value—The median divides the value distribution into two equal parts. Quartiles divide the value distribution into four equal parts. These measures are rounded to the nearest hundred dollars. (For more information on medians and quartiles, see the discussion under "Derived Measures.") Aggregate Value—To calculate aggregate value, the amount assigned for the category "Less than $10,000" is $9,000. The amount assigned to the category "$500,000 or more" is $600,000. Mean value is rounded to the nearest hundred dollars. (For more information on aggregates and means, see the discussion under "Derived Measures.") Comparability— In 1980, value was asked only at owner- occupied or vacant-for-sale one-family houses on less than 3 acres with no business or medical office on the property and at all owner-occupied or vacant-for-sale condominium housing units. Mobile homes were excluded. Value data were presented for specified owner-occupied housing units, specified vacant-for-sale-only housing units, and owner-occupied condominium housing units. In 1990, the question was asked at all owner-occupied or vacant-for-sale-only housing units with no exclusions. Data presented for specified owner-occupied and speci- fied vacant-for-sale-only housing units will include one- family condominium houses. For 1 990, quartiles have been added because the range of values and rents in the Virgin Islands has increased in recent years. Upper and lower quartiles can be used to note large value and rent differences among various geographic areas. B-40 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS VEHICLES AVAILABLE The data on vehicles available were obtained from questionnaire item H13, which was asked at occupied housing units. These data show the number of households with a specified number of passenger cars, vans, and pickup or panel trucks of one-ton capacity or less kept at home and available for the use of household members. Vehicles rented or leased for one month or more, company vehicles, and police and government vehicles are included if kept at home and used for nonbusiness purposes. Dismantled or immobile vehicles are excluded. Vehicles kept at home but used only for business purposes also are excluded. Vehicles Per Household—This is computed by dividing aggregate vehicles available by the number of occupied housing units. Comparability—Data on automobiles available were col- lected for the first time in 1 980. YEAR HOUSEHOLDER MOVED INTO UNIT The data on year householder moved into unit were obtained from questionnaire item H8, which was asked at occupied housing units. These data refer to the year of the latest move by the householder. If a householder moved back into a housing unit he or she previously occupied, the year of the latest move was reported. If the householder moved from one apartment to another within the same building, the year the householder moved into the present apartment was reported. The intent is to establish the year the present occupancy by the householder began. The year that the householder moved in is not necessarily the same year other members of the household moved, although in the great majority of cases an entire household moves at the same time. Comparability—In 1960 and 1970, this question was asked of every person and included in population reports. This item in housing tabulations refers to the year the householder moved in. In 1980 and 1990, the question was asked only of the householder. YEAR STRUCTURE BUILT The data on year structure built were obtained from questionnaire item H1 7, which was asked at both occupied and vacant housing units. Data on year structure built refer to when the building was first constructed, not when it was remodeled, added to, or converted. For housing units under construction that met the housing unit definition—that is, all exterior windows, doors, and final usable floors were in place—the category "1989 or March 1990" was used. For a houseboat or a mobile home or trailer, the manufac- turer's model year was assumed to be the year built. The figures shown in census data products relate to the number of units built during the specified periods that were still in existence at the time of enumeration. Median Year Structure Built—The median divides the distribution into two equal parts. The median is rounded to the nearest calendar year. Median age of housing can be obtained by subtracting median year structure built from 1990. For example, if the median year structure built is 1 957, the median age of housing in that area is 33 years (1990 minus 1957). Limitation of the Data—Data on year structure built are more susceptible to errors of response and nonreporting than data on many other items because respondents must rely on their memory or on estimates by persons who have lived in the neighborhood a long time. Available evidence indicates there is underreporting in the older-year-structure- built categories, especially "Built in 1939 or earlier." The introduction of the "Don't know" category (see the discus- sion on "Comparability") may have resulted in relatively higher allocation rates. Data users should refer to the discussion in Appendix C, Accuracy of the Data, and to the allocation tables. Comparability—Data on year structure built were col- lected for the first time in the 1 940 census. Since then, the response categories have been modified to accommodate the 10-year period between each census. In 1990, the category, "Don't Know," was added in an effort to mini- mize the response error mentioned in the paragraph above on limitation of the data. DERIVED MEASURES Census data products include various derived mea- sures, such as medians, means, and percentages, as well as certain rates and ratios. Derived measures that round to less than 0.1 are not shown but indicated as zero. In printed reports, zero is indicated by a dash (-). Interpolation Interpolation frequently is used in calculating medians or quartiles based on interval data and in approximating standard errors from tables. Linear interpolation is used to estimate values of a function between two known values. "Pareto interpolation" is an alternative to linear interpola- tion. It is used by the Census Bureau in calculating median income within intervals wider than $2,500. In Pareto inter- polation, the median is derived by interpolating between the logarithms of the upper and lower income limits of the median category. Mean This measure represents an arithmetic average of a set of values. It is derived by dividing the sum of a group of numerical items (or aggregate) by the total number of DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS B-41 items. Aggregates are used in computing mean values. For example, mean family income is obtained by dividing the aggregate of all income reported by persons in families by the total number of families. (Additional information on means and aggregates is included in the separate expla- nations of many population and housing subjects.) Median This measure represents the middle value in a distribu- tion. The median divides the total frequency into two equal parts: one-half of the cases fall below the median and one-half of the cases exceed the median. The median is computed on the basis of the distribution as tabulated, which is sometimes more detailed than the distribution shown in specific census publications and other data products. In reports, if the median falls within the upper interval of the tabulation distribution, the median is shown as the initial value of the interval followed by a plus sign (+); if within the lower interval, the median is shown as the upper value of the category followed by a minus sign (-). For summary tape files, if the median falls within the upper or lower interval, it is set to a specified value. (Additional information on medians is included in the separate expla- nations of many population and housing subjects.) Percentages, Rates, and Ratios These measures are frequently presented in census products to compare two numbers or two sets of measure- ments. These comparisons are made in two ways: (1) subtraction, which provides an absolute measure of the difference between two items, and (2) the quotient of two numbers, which provides a relative measure of difference. Quartile This measure divides a distribution into four equal parts. The first quartile (or lower quartile) is the value that defines the upper limit of the lowest one-quarter of the cases. The second quartile is the median. The third quartile (or upper quartile) defines the lower limit of the upper one-quarter of the cases in the distribution. The difference between the upper and lower quartiles is called the interquartile range. This interquartile range is less affected by wide variations than is the mean. Quartiles are presented for certain financial characteristics such as housing value and rent. B-42 DEFINITIONS OF SUBJECT CHARACTERISTICS APPENDIX C. Accuracy of the Data CONTENTS Confidentiality of the Data C-1 Editing of Unacceptable Data C-1 Sources of Error C-2 ability to obtain census data, particularly for small areas and subpopulation groups, has been enhanced signifi- cantly while maintaining confidentiality of individual responses. CONFIDENTIALITY OF THE DATA To maintain confidentiality as required by law (Title 13, United States Code), the Bureau of the Census applies a confidentiality edit to the 1990 census data to ensure that published data do not disclose information about specific individuals, households, and housing units. As a result, a small amount of uncertainty is introduced into some of the census characteristics to prevent identification of specific individuals, households, or housing units. The confidenti- ality edit is controlled so that the counts of total persons, totals by race, Hispanic origin, and persons age 18 years and over are not affected. In addition, total counts for housing units by tenure are not affected by this edit. The confidentiality edit for the Virgin Islands of the United States (Virgin Islands) was conducted in basically the same way for each of the two types of data (stateside 100-percent equivalent data and stateside sample equiv- alent data) that were collected from everyone in the Virgin Islands. In the United States census, certain information (referred to as stateside 100-percent data) was collected from everyone, and some additional information (referred to as stateside sample data) was collected from about a 1 -in-6 sample of the population. In the Virgin Islands, all of the census information was collected on a 100-percent basis. The Virgin Islands basic (stateside 100-percent equivalent) data corresponds to the United States census 100-percent data and includes age, sex, race, Hispanic origin, relationship, marital status, and certain questions concerning the housing unit (e.g., value, rent, and number of rooms). The Virgin Islands detailed (stateside sample equivalent) data corresponds to the United States census sample data and includes questions on such subjects as income, water source, language usage, and journey to work. The confidentiality edit for the Virgin Islands was con- ducted by selecting a sample of census households from the internal census files and blanking and imputing a random subset of either its 1 00-percent equivalent data or its sample equivalent data from other households that have identical characteristics on a set of selected key variables, but are in different geographic locations within the Virgin Islands. To provide more protection for "small areas," a higher sampling rate was used for these areas. The net result of this procedure is that the data user's EDITING OF UNACCEPTABLE DATA The objective of the processing operation is to produce a set of data that describes the population as clearly and accurately as possible. To meet this objective, question- naires were reviewed and edited during field data collec- tion operations by crew leaders for consistency, complete- ness, and acceptability. Questionnaires were also reviewed by census clerks in the district offices for omissions, certain inconsistencies, and population coverage. For exam- ple, write-in entries such as "Don't know" or "NA" were considered unacceptable in certain quantities and/or in conjunction with other data omissions. As a result of this review operation, a telephone or personal visit follow-up was made to obtain missing infor- mation. Potential coverage errors were included in the followup, as well as questionnaires with omissions or inconsistencies beyond the completeness and quality tol- erances specified in the review procedures. Subsequent to field operations, remaining incomplete or inconsistent information on the questionnaires was assigned using imputation procedures during the final automated edit of the collected data. Allocations, or computer assign- ments of acceptable data in place of unacceptable entries or blanks, are needed most often when an entry for a given item is lacking or when the information reported for a person or housing unit on that item is inconsistent with other information for that same person or housing unit. As in previous censuses, the general procedure for changing unacceptable entries was to assign an entry for a person or housing unit that was consistent with entries for persons or housing units with similar characteristics. The assign- ment of acceptable data in place of blanks or unaccept- able entries enhances the usefulness of the data. Another way in which corrections were made during the computer editing process was through substitution; that is, the assignment of a full set of characteristics for a person or housing unit. For example, when there was an indication that a housing unit was occupied but the questionnaire contained no information for the people within the house- hold or the occupants were not listed on the questionnaire, a previously accepted household was selected as a sub- stitute, and the full set of characteristics for the substitute was duplicated for the person(s) and/or housing unit without characteristic data. The assignment of the full set ACCURACY OF THE DATA C-1 of housing characteristics occurred when no housing infor- mation was available. If the housing unit was determined to be occupied, the housing and person characteristics as well as the number of persons were assigned from a previously processed occupied unit. If the housing unit was vacant, the housing characteristics were assigned from a previously processed vacant unit. SOURCES OF ERROR In any large-scale statistical operation, such as the 1 990 decennial census, human- and machine-related errors occur. These errors are commonly referred to as nonsam- pling errors. Such errors include not enumerating every household or every person in the population, not obtaining all required information from the respondents, obtaining incorrect or inconsistent information, and recording infor- mation incorrectly. In addition, errors can occur during the field review of the enumerators' work, during clerical handling of the census questionnaires, or during the elec- tronic processing of the questionnaires. To reduce various types of nonsampling errors, a num- ber of techniques were implemented during the planning, data collection, and data processing activities. Quality assurance methods were used throughout the data collection and processing phases of the census to improve the quality of the data. Several coverage improvement programs were imple- mented during the development of the census enumera- tion and processing to minimize undercoverage of the population and housing units. These programs were devel- oped based on experience from the 1 980 decennial cen- sus and results from the 1990 United States decennial census testing cycle. A quality assurance program, designed to improve coverage, began with an advance listing of addresses. Advance listers collected addresses and recorded map spots for six housing units in each of two sample blocks in every enumerator assignment area or address register area. The quality assurance check consisted of matching the advance listed address and map spots to the enumer- ator's complete address register area listing. If the number of nonmatches exceeded a predetermined level, then a recheck of the address register area was required. Telephone and personal visit followups also contributed to improve coverage. The governor of the Virgin Islands established a committee which reviewed the census tal- lies, and census enumerators conducted additional recan- vassing. Computer and clerical edits were aimed at improv- ing the quality and consistency of the data. C-2 ACCURACY OF THE DATA APPENDIX D. Collection and Processing Procedures CONTENTS Data Collection Procedures D-2 Enumeration and Residence Rules D-1 Processing Procedures D-2 ENUMERATION AND RESIDENCE RULES In accordance with census practice dating back to the first decennial census of the Virgin Islands of the United States (Virgin Islands) in 1930, each person was to be enumerated as an inhabitant of his or her "usual resi- dence" in the 1990 census. Usual residence is the place where the person lives and sleeps most of the time or considers to be his or her usual residence. This place is not necessarily the same as the person's legal residence or voting residence. In the vast majority of cases, however, the use of these different bases of classification would produce substantially the same statistics, although there might be appreciable differences for a few areas. The implementation of this practice has resulted in the establishment of rules for certain categories of persons whose usual place of residence is not immediately appar- ent. Furthermore, this practice means that persons were not always counted as residents of the place where they happened to be staying on Census Day (April 1 , 1 990). Enumeration Rules Each person whose usual residence was in the Virgin Islands was to be included in the census, without regard to the person's legal status or citizenship. As in previous censuses, persons in the Virgin Islands specifically excluded from the census were foreign travelers who had not established a residence. Persons with a usual residence outside the Virgin Islands were not enumerated in the 1990 census of the Virgin Islands. On the other hand, residents of the Virgin Islands temporarily abroad were to be enumerated at their usual residence in the Virgin Islands. Residence Rules Each person included in the census was to be counted at his or her usual residence—the place where he or she lives and sleeps most of the time or the place where the person considers to be his or her usual home. If a person had no usual residence, the person was to be counted where he or she was staying on April 1 , 1 990. Persons temporarily away from their usual residence, whether in the Virgin Islands or abroad, on a vacation or on a business trip, were counted at their usual residence. Persons who occupied more than one residence during the year were counted at the one they considered to be their usual residence. Persons who moved on or near Census Day were counted at the place they considered to be their usual residence. Persons in the U.S. Armed Forces—Members of the U.S. Armed Forces were counted as residents of the area in which the installation was located, either on the instal- lation or in the surrounding community. Family members of the U.S. Armed Forces personnel were counted where they were living on Census Day (for example, with the U.S. Armed Forces person or at another location). Each United States Navy ship not deployed to the 6th or 7th Fleet was attributed to the geographic area that the Department of the Navy designated as its homeport. If the homeport included more than one geographic area, ships berthed there on Census Day were assigned by the Bureau of the Census to the geographic area in which the land immediately adjacent to the dock or pier was actually located. Ships attributed to the homeport, but not physi- cally present and not deployed to the 6th or 7th Fleet, were assigned to the geographic area named on the Depart- ment of the Navy's homeport list. These rules also apply to U.S. Coast Guard vessels. Personnel assigned to each Coast Guard ship were given the opportunity to report a residence off the ship. Those who did report an off-ship residence in the commu- nities surrounding the homeport were counted there; those who did not were counted as residents of the ship. Persons on U.S. Maritime Ships—Persons aboard U.S. maritime ships who reported an off-ship residence were counted at that residence. Those who did not were counted as residents of the ship, and were attributed as follows: 1 . The port where the ship was docked on Census Day, if that port was in the Virgin Islands, the United States, Puerto Rico, or the Pacific Outlying Areas. 2. The port of departure if the ship was at sea, provided the port was in the Virgin Islands, the United States, Puerto Rico, or the Pacific Outlying Areas. 3. The port of destination in the Virgin Islands, the United States, Puerto Rico, or the Pacific Outlying Areas, if the port of departure of a ship at sea was a foreign port. COLLECTION AND PROCESSING PROCEDURES D-1 4. The U.S. overseas population if the ship was docked at a foreign port or at sea between foreign ports. Persons Away at School—College students were counted as residents of the area in which they were living while attending college, as they have been since the 1950 census. Children in boarding schools below the college level were counted at their parental home. Persons in Institutions—Persons under formally author- ized, supervised care or custody, such as in jails; juvenile institutions; nursing, convalescent, and rest homes for the aged and dependent; or homes, schools, hospitals, or wards for the physically handicapped, mentally retarded, or mentally ill, were counted at these places. Persons Away From Their Usual Residence on Census Day— In the Virgin Islands, Hurricane Hugo displaced significant numbers of households from their usual place of residence. If these persons reported a destroyed or dam- aged residence as their usual residence, they were counted at that location rather than the temporary quarters where they were staying. Persons away from their usual residence were counted by means of interviews with other members of their families, resident managers, or neighbors. DATA COLLECTION PROCEDURES The 1990 census of the Virgin Islands was conducted using modified list/enumerate procedures (formerly called conventional or door-to-door enumeration). Enumeration of Housing Units Beginning in early May 1990, enumerators visited and listed every housing unit in their assigned areas and conducted a personal interview, asking the questions as worded on the census questionnaire and recording the answers. A single questionnaire contained all questions asked of every person at every housing unit. This ques- tionnaire contained both basic (stateside 100-percent equiv- alent) and detailed (stateside sample equivalent) popula- tion and housing questions. Only housing information was obtained for vacant housing units. Field Followup Followup enumerators visited each address for which questionnaires were missing to obtain a completed ques- tionnaire. If a followup enumerator determined that the unit was vacant on Census Day, regardless of the present occupancy status, the enumerator obtained information about the unit from a neighbor or other knowledgeable source and filled out a questionnaire for that unit, complet- ing specified items in the questionnaire for vacant units. Coverage and Edit-Failure Followup—The enumerators conducted an initial check of the questionnaires for com- pleteness and consistency. The census office staff per- formed additional coverage and edit checks. Those house- holds for which questionnaires did not meet specific quality standards because of incomplete or inconsistent informa- tion were contacted by telephone or by personal visit to obtain the missing information or rectify the inconsisten- cies. Special Enumeration Procedures Special procedures and questionnaires were used for the enumeration of persons in group quarters, such as college dormitories, nursing homes, prisons, military bar- racks, and ships. The questionnaires (Individual Census Reports) included the same population questions as the regular census questionnaire but did not include any housing questions. PROCESSING PROCEDURES The Virgin Islands questionnaires were processed in a section of the Census Bureau's Jacksonville, Florida Pro- cessing Office, specifically set up for the processing of keyable documents. The information supplied to the enu- merator by the respondent was recorded by marking the answers in the appropriate answer boxes and, in some cases, entering a write-in response. The data processing was performed in several stages. All questionnaires passed through a check-in procedure upon their arrival at the processing office. Selected written entries on the questionnaire were coded clerically. The coded information included written entries for industry and occupation, migration, place of birth, place of work, race, Hispanic origin, ancestry, language, and relationship. After all coding operations were completed, the questionnaires (including Individual Census Reports) were keyed and the resulting file was sent to the Census Bureau headquarters for editing and tabulating operations. D-2 COLLECTION AND PROCESSING PROCEDURES APPENDIX E. Facsimile of Questionnaire Pages OMB No. 0607-0652: Approval Expires 12/31/90 FORM D-2A VI U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE BUREAU OF THE CENSUS 1990 CENSUS OF THE VIRGIN ISLANDS OF THE UNITED STATES NOTICE — Response to this inquiry Is required by law (Title 13, U.S. Code). By the same law, your report to the Census Bureau Is confidential. It may be seen only by persons who have sworn to uphold the confidentiality of the census and may be used only for «*MteHr»l purposes. INTRODUCTION ' FOR UST/ENUMERATE AREAS (PERSONAL VISIT) Hello, my name Is (Your name) and Tin an official census taker foi the 1990 census of the Virgin Islands. This Is my Identification (PAUSE) and here's some information about the purpose of my visit. (Give , respondent copy ofPrivacy Act Notice). For the average household, this Interview should take about 28 minutes. NEXT: Ask the questions at the top of the listing page. Complete a form for each housing unit. FOR CENSUS USE Al. DO code A2. Unit ID I I I — I A3. ARA A4. Block B. Map spot C. Form type L D. Population E. Type of Unit Occupied Vacant 3 D First Form 1 D Regular 4 D Continuation 2 D UHE Fl. Complete after iDlr 2DP/F 3D MV 4D ED sDtc 6DRE 7DP0 8DlA oUSM oDpi F2. Coverage lDib 2D la G. Address — Number, street, apartmentnumber or location description City Island VIRGIN ISLANDS ZIP Code H . Method of completion — Mark (X) ONE box 1 D Personal visit 2D Telephone I. Respondent's name J. Respondent's telephone number (809) O . CERTIFICATION — I certify that the entries I have made on this questionnaire are true and correct to the best of my knowledge. Enumerator's signature Date Crew leader's initials Date CLD number NOTES FACSIMILE OF QUESTIONNAIRE PAGES E-1 The 1990 census must count every person at his or her person lives and sleeps most of the time. Include * Everyone who usually lives here such as family members, housemates and roommates, foster children, roomers, boarders, and live-in employees * Persons who are temporarily away on a business trip, on vacation, or in a general hospital * College students who stay here while attending college * Persons in the Armed Forces who live here * Newborn babies still in the hospital * Children in boarding schools below the college level * Persons who stay here most of the week while working even if they have a home somewhere else * Persons with no other home who are staying here on April 1 la. Please give me the name of each person living here on Sunday, April 1, including all persons staying here who have no other home. If EVERYONE is staying here temporarily and usually lives somewhere else, give me the name of each person. Begin with the household member in whose name the home is owned, being bought, or rented. If there is no such person, start with any adult household member. Print last name, first name, and middle initial for each person. "usual residence." This means the place where the Do NOT include * Persons who usually live somewhere else • Persons who are away in an institution such as a prison, mental hospital, or a nursing home • College students who live somewhere else while attending college • Persons in the Armed Forces who Bve somewhere else • Persons who stay somewhere else most of the week while working LAST FIRST INITIAL LAST FIRST INITIAL 8 10 11 12 lb. IfEVERYONE listed above is staying here only temporarily and usually lives somewhere else, mark (X) this box and ask — Where do these people usually live? DO NOTPRINT THE ADDRESS LISTED INITEMG ON THEFRONT COVER. House number Street or road/Rural route and box number Apartment number City" State/Island- ZIP Code County or foreign country Names of nearest intersecting streets or roads E-2 FACSIMILE OF QUESTIONNAIRE PAGES PLEASEALSOASK HOUSING QUESTIONS ONPAGE 3 Please fill one column for each person listed in Question la on page 1. PERSON 1 Last name First name Middle initial PERSON 2 Last name First name Middle Initial 2. Do not ask for Person 1. How la . . . related to (Person If? Mark (X) ONE box for each person. If Other relative ofperson In column 1, mark (X) the box and print exact relationship, such as mother-in-law, grandparent, son-in-law, niece, cousin, and so on. If a RELATIVE of Person 1: START In this column with the household member (or one of the members) In whose name the home Is owned, being bought, or rented. If there Is no such person, start In this column with any adult household member. 1 Husband/wife 2 LJ Natural-bom or adopted son/daughter 3 LJ Stepson/ stepdaughter 4 Brother/sister 5 Father/mother 6 Grandchild 7 Other relative -;; If NOT RELATED to Person 1: 8 Roomer, boarder, 10 Unmarried or foster child partner 9 Housemate, 11 Other roommate nonrelative 3 . Is . . . male or female? Mark (X) ONE box for each person. 1 D Male 2 Female 1 D Male 2 LJ Female 4 . What U . . .'« race? For example. Black, White. Asian or Pacific Islander. American Indian. Eskimo. Aleut. Mark (X) ONE box for the race that the person considers himself/herself to be. Ifresponse b "Asian or Pacific islander, "ask — Which Asian or Pacific Islander group does . . . consider (himself/herself) to be? Ifresponse Is "Other race, " ask — Which group does consider (himself/herself) to be? 1 Black or Negro 2 D White 3 LJ Asian or Pacific Islander (Print one group, for example: Chinese, Filipino, Hawaiian, Japanese, Laotian, Asian Indian, Korean, Samoan, Vietnamese, and so on.) —7 4 LJ Indian (Amer.), Eskimo, or Aleut 5 Other race (Print race) -j 1 Black or Negro 2 D White 3 LJ Asian or Pacific Islander (Print one group, for example: Chinese, Filipino, Hawaiian, Japanese, Laotian, Asian Indian, Korean, Samoan, Vietnamese, and so on.) -y I 1 l I I 1 4 LJ Indian (Amer.), Eskimo, or Aleut 5 LJ Other race (Print race) -77 i ~ 1 i I 5. AGE AND YEAR OF BIRTH a . How old Is ? (Age should be as ofApril 1, 1990.) If unknown, ask — Please give me your best estimate. Print the age in the boxes. b . In what year was born? Print the year of birth In the boxes. a. Age b. Year of birth 1 a. Age b. Year of birth 1 6 . Is . . . now married, consensuaOy married, widowed, divorced, separated, or has never been married? Mark (X) ONE box for each person. 1 LJ Now married 2 LJ ConsensuaOy married 3 LJ Widowed 4 LJ Divorced 5 LJ Separated 6 LJ Never married 1 LJ Now married 2 LJ Consensually married 3 LJ Widowed 4 LJ Divorced 5 LJ Separated 6 LJ Never married Is of Spanish/Hispanic origin? For example: Mexican, Mexican-American, Chicano, Puerto Rlcan, Cuban, Ecuadoran, Dominican (Dominican Republic). Spaniard, Salvadoran, and so on. ff"Yes,"asfc — Which Spanish/Hispanic group is ... ? Afar* (X) the appropriate box and if "Other Spanish/ Hispanic, "print one group. 1 LJ No (not Spanish/Hispanic) 2 LJ Yes, Dominican (Dominican Republic) 3 LJ Yes, Puerto Rican 4 D Yes, Cuban 5 LJ Yes, other Spanish/Hispanic (Print one group, for example: Argentinean, Colombian, Mexican, Nlcaraguan, Salvadoran, Spaniard, and so on.) -j l 1 1 LJ No (not Spanish/Hispanic) 2 LJ Yes, Dominican (Dominican Republic) 3 LJ Yes, Puerto Rican 4 LJ Yes, Cuban 5 LJ Yes, other Spanish/Hispanic (Print one group, for example: Argentinean, Colombian, Mexican, Nlcaraguan, Salvadoran, Spaniard, and so on.) -j FACSIMILE OF QUESTIONNAIRE PAGES E-3 PERSON 7 Last name First name Middle initial If a RELATIVE of Person 1: 1 D Husband/wtfe 2 D Natural-bom or adopted son/daughter 3 D Stepson/ stepdaughter 4 D Brother/sister 5 O Father/mother 6 D Grandchild 7 Other relative -j I I I B NOT RELATED to Person 1: 8 D Roomer, boarder, or foster child 9 O Housemate, roommate 10 D Unmarried partner 11 O Other nonrelative 1 DMale 2 O Female 1 Black or Negro 2D White 3 D Asian or Pacific Islander (Print one group, far example: Chinese, Filipino, Hawaiian, Japanese, Laotian, Asian Indian, Korean, Samoan, Vietnamese, and so on.) -j i * r i i i j 4 D Indian (Amer.), Eskimo, or Aleut 5 D Other race (Printrace) -3 lZZZJZZH a. Age b. Year of birth 1 1 D Now married 2 O ConsensuaDy married 3 D Widowed 4 D Divorced 5 D Separated 6 U Never married 1 No (not Spanish/Hispanic) 2 D Yes, Dominican (Dominican Republic) 3 D Yes, Puerto Rican 4 Yes, Cuban 5 D Yes, other Spanish/Hispanic (Print one group, for example: Argentinean, Colombian, Mexican, Nkaraguan, Sahiadoran, Spaniard, and soon.) -, ! — r NOWPLEASEASK QUESTIONS Hla-H26FOR THISHOUSEHOLD Hla. When you told me the names of persons living here on April 1, did you leave anyone out because you were not sure If the person should be hsted — for example, someone temporarily away on a business trip or vacation, a newborn baby still in the hospital, or a person who stays here once in a while and has no other home? 1 D Yes— Determine Ifyou should add the personfs) based on the instructions for Question la. 2D No b. When you told me the names of persons Uvtng here on April 1, did you include anyone even though you were not sure that the person should be listed — far example, a visitor who is staying here temporarily or a person who usually lives somewhere else? lD Yes— Determine Ifyou should delete the person(s) based on the instructions for Question la. 2D No H2. Which best describes this building? Include all ~*~~ apartments, flats, etc., even ifvacant. lD A mobile home or trailer 2D A one-family house detached from any other house 3D A one-family house attached to one or more houses 4D A building with 2 apartments 5D A building with 3 or 4 apartments 60 A building with 5 to 9 apartments 7 A building with 10 to 19 apartments 80 A budding with 20 or more apartments 9O A boat or houseboat 10D Other H3. How many rooms do you have In this (house/apartment)? Do NOT count bathrooms, porches, balconies, foyers, halls, or half-rooms. 1 D lroom 2 D 2 rooms 3 3rooms 4 D 4 rooms 5 D 5 rooms 6 D 6 rooms 7 D 7 rooms 8 D 8 rooms 9 D 9 or more rooms H4. b this (house/apartment) — 1 O Owned by you or someone in this household with a mortgage or loan? 2 D Owned by you or someone in this household free and clear (without a mortgage) ? 3 D Rented for cash rent? 4 O Occupied without payment ofcash rent? H this Is a ONE-FAMILYHOUSE - H5a. Is this house on ten or more acres? lD Yes 2D No b . I» there a business (such as a store or barber shop) or a medical office on this property? lO Yes 2D No Ask only ifsomeone in mis household OWNS OR ISBUYING this house, apartment, mobile home, or boat — H6. What is the value of this property; that to, how much do you = think this (house and lot/condominium unit/mobile home/boat) would sell for if it were for sale? lD Less than $10,000 2D $10,000 to $14,999 3D $15,000 to $19,999 4O $20,000 to $24,999 5D $25,000 to $29,999 6 $30,000 to $34,999 7D $35,000 to $39,999 8 $40,000 to $44,999 9 $45,000 to $49,999 10O $50,000 to $54,999 11 $55,000 to $59,999 12 D $60,000 to $64,999 13D $65,000 to $69,999 14 D $70,000 to $74,999 15 O $75,000 to $79,999 16 D $80,000 to $89,999 17 D $90,000 to $99,999 18 O $100,000 to $124,999 19 O $125,000 to $149,999 20 O $150,000 to $174,999 21 O $175,000 to $199,999 22 O $200,000 to $249,999 23 D $250,000 to $299,999 24 D $300,000 to $399,999 25 O $400,000 to $499,999 26 D $500,000 or more Ask only if this house, apartment, mobile home, orboatls RENTEDFOR CASHRENT- H7a.What to the monthly rent? — H rent isNOTPAID BY THEMONTH, see yourjob instructions on how to Sgure a monthly rent lO Less than $80 2D $80to$99 3D $100 to $124 4O $125 to $149 5D $150 to $174 6D $175 to $199 7D $200to$224 8D $225 to $249 9O $250to$274 10O $275 to $299 11 D $300 to $324 12O $325to$349 13O $350 to $374 14 D $375 to $399 15 D $400 to $424 16 O $425 to $449 17 O $450 to $474 18 O $475 to $499 19 O $500 to $524 20 O $525 to $549 21 O $550 to $599 22 D $600 to $649 23 D $650 to $699 24 O $700 to $749 25 O $750 to $999 26 O $1,000 or more b .Does the monthly rent Include any meals? lOYes 2ON0 FOR ENUMERATOR USE CI. Vacancy status 1 D For rent 2 O For sale only 3 O Rented or sold, not occupied 4 O For seas/rec/occ 5 O For migrant workers 6 O Other vacant C2. Is this unit boarded up? lO Yes 2D No D. Months vacant lD Less than 1 2D lupto2 30 2upto6 4O 6 up to 12 50 12 up to 24 6D 24 or more E-4 FACSIMILE OF QUESTIONNAIRE PAGES ALSO ASK THESE H8. When did (Person fisted Incolumn 1 on page 2) move Into this (house/apartment)? 1 1989orl990 2 1985 to 1988 3 1980tol984 4 1970 to 1979 5 O 1960tol969 6 O 1959orearBer H14. Which FUEL bused MOST for cooking in mis (house/apartment)? 1 O Gas: bottled or tank 2 D Electricity 3 O Fuel oil, kerosene, etc. 4 Wood or charcoal 5 Ootherfuel 6 O No fuel used H20a. What Is the average monthly cost for electricity for this (house/apartment/mobile home/boat)? r ~l Average monthly cost — Dollars OR 1 O Included In rent or In condominium fee 2 O No charge or electricity not used H15a. Do you get water from — 1 O A public system only? 2 O A public system and cistern? 3 O A cistern, tanks, or drams only? 4 ApubBcstandptoe? 5 Some other source such as an individual weO or a spring? H9. How mam; bedrooms do you have; that Is. how many bedrooms would you list If this (house/ apartment) were on me market for sale or rent? O No bedroom 1 O 1 bedroom 2 O 2 bedrooms 3 O 3 bedrooms 4 O 4 bedrooms 5 5 or more bedrooms b. What is the average monthly cost for gas for this (house/apartment/mobile home/boat)? r i |$ .00] Average monthly cost — Dollars OR 1 O Included in rent or in condominium fee 2 O No charge or gas not used b. Did you purchase any water from a water vendor during the past year? 1 0y« 2 ONo H16. is this bnfldmg connected to a public sewer? 1 O Yes, connected to pubfc sewer 2 LI No, connected to septic tank or cesspool 3 O No, use other means H10. Do you have COMPLETE plumbing faculties in this (house/apartment); that is, piped water, a Bush toilet, and a bathtub or shower? 1 Yes, have all three facilities 2 ONo H17. Aboin when was this building first buttt? 1 Ol989orl990 2 1985 to 1988 3 1980 to 1984 4 1970 to 1979 5 1960 to 1969 6 O 1950 to 1959 7 1940 to 1949 8 O 1939 or earlier 9 O Don't know c. What is the average monthly cost for water for this (house/apartment/mobile home/boat)? r "i i i [$ .00] Average monthly cost — Dollars OR 1 O Included in rent or in condominium fee 2 O No charge Hll. Do you have COMPLETE kitchen facilities; that is, a sink with piped water, a range or cookstovc. and a refrigerator? 1 O Yes 2 O No H12. Do you have a telephone In tms (house/ apartment)? 1 O Yes 2 ONo H18. Is this (house/apartment) part of a condominium? 1 OYes 2 ONo V respondent reported living in an apartment building or boat, sUptoH20. H19a. Is this house on 1 O Less man 1 acre? 2 Olto9acres? 3 O 10 or more acres? d. What is the average monthly cost for oil, coal, kerosene, wood, etc for this (house/apartment/mobile home/boat)? r "I 1$ 00] Average monthly cost — Dollars OR 1 O Included in rent or m condominium fee 2 O No charge or these fuels not used H13. How many automobiles, vans, and trucks of one-ton capacity or less are kept at home for use by members of this household? O None lOl 2 02 3 D3 404 5 05 6 Oe 7 O 7ormore b. In 1989, what were the actual sales of all agricultural products from this property? ONone 1 D$lto$99 2 O $100 to $499 3 O $500 to $999 4 O $1,000 to $2,499 5 O $2,500 or more FACSIMILE OF QUESTIONNAIRE PAGES E-5 QUESTIONS FOR THIS HOUSEHOLD INTERVIEWER INSTRUCTION: Ask questions H21 TO H26 If this Is a one-family house, a condominium, a mobile home, or a boat matsomeone in mis household OWNS OR IS BUYING; (any ofowned categories in H4). Otherwise, go topage 6. H21. What were the real estate taxes on THIS property last year? I I 1*__ -. £o_l Yearly amount — Dollars OR D None H22. What was the annual payment for fire, hazard, and flood Insurance on THIS property? .00 Yearly amount — Dollars OR D None H23a. Is there a mortgage, deed of trust, contract to purchase, or similar debt on THIS property? 1 D Yes, mortgage, deed of trust, ^ or similar debt V 2 LJ Yes, contract to purchase I 3 D No - Skip to H24a GotoH23b b. How mud is the regular monthly mortgage payment on THIS property? Include payment only on first mortgage or contract to purchase. I« .00 Monthly amount — Dollars OR D No regular payment required — Skip to H24a c. Does the regular monthly mortgage payment include payments for real estate taxes on THIS property? 1 D Yes, taxes included in payment 2 U No, taxes paid separately or taxes not required d. Does me regular monthly mortgage payment include payments for fire, hazard, or flood Insurance on THIS property? 1 D Yes, insurance included in payment 2 LJ No, Insurance paid separately or no insurance H24a. Is there a second or Junior mortgage or a home equity loan on THIS property? lD Yes 2D Ho-SktptoH2S b. How much Is the regular monthly payment on all second or Junior mortgages and all home equity loans? H26. l! °°J Monthly amount — Dollars OR D No regular payment required Ask ONLY ifmis is a CONDOMINIUM- H25. What is the monthly condominium fee? I I 'ii °°J Monthly amount — Dollars Ask ONLYif this is a MOBILEHOME ora BOAT- What was the total cost for personal property taxes, site rent, marina fee, registration fees, and license fees on this (mobile home/boat) and its (site/slip) last year? Exclude real estate taxes. l! oo_j Yearly amount — Dollars Please torn to page 6 and ask questions for person 1 listed on page 2. E-6 FACSIMILE OF QUESTIONNAIRE PAGES ASK THESE QUESTIONS PERSON 1 Last name First name Middle Initial 8. Where was ... bom? Print the name of the Island In the U.S. Virgin Islands, or the name ofthe U.S. State, commonwealth, territory, or foreign country In the space behw. J- I 9. Ifthe answer to question 8 appears In one ofthe first two "Yes" categories fisted behw, mark (X) the appropriate "Yes" category. Otherwise, ask — I* ... a CITIZEN ofthe United States? That is, does ... have at least one American parent or is ... a citizen by naturalization? 1 Yes, born in the U.S. Virgin Islands - SUp to 1 1 2 D Yes, bom in the United States, Puerto Rico, Guam, or Northern Marianas 3 LI Yes, bom abroad of American parent or parents 4 D Yes, U.S. citizen by naturalization 5 D No, not a dtizen of the United States 10. When did... come to the U.S. Virgin Islands to stay? If entered country mors than once, ask—What is the latest year? 1989 or 1990 5 1970to 1974 1 D 1985 to 1988 6D 1965to 1969 2 1982to 1984 7 1960to 1964 3 1980 or 1981 8 1950 to 1959 4 1975 to 1979 9 Before 1950 11. At any tune since February 1,1990, has... attended regular school or college? Include only nursery school, kindergarten, elementary school, and schooBng which leads to a high school diploma or a coDege degree. H "Yes. "ask -Public or private? 1 D No, has not attended since February 1 2 D Yes, public school, pubfic college 3 D Yes, private school, private college 12. How much school has ... COMPLETED? Read categories Ifperson Is unsure. Mark (X) ONE box for the highest level COMPLETED or degree RECEIVED. B currently enrolled, mark the level ofprevious grade attended or highest degree received. 31 D No school completed 32D Nursery school 33D Kindergarten 34D 1st, 2nd, 3rd, or 4lh grade 35 5th, 6th, 7th, or 8th grade 36D 9th grade 37D 10th grade 38D 11th grade 39 12th grade, NO DIPLOMA 40D HIGH SCHOOL GRADUATE - high school DIPLOMA or the equivalent (For example: GED) 4lD Some college but no degree 42 Associate degree in college - Occupational program 43U Associate degree in college- Academic program 44 Bachelor's degree (For example: BA, AB, BS) 45 Master's degree (For example: MA, MS, MEng, MEd,MSW,MBA) 46D Professional school degree (For example: MD, DDS, DVM, LLB, JD) 47 Doctorate degree (For example: PhD, EdD) 13. What is. . .*s ancestry or ethnic origin? Ancestry means ethnic origin or descent, "roots," or heritage. For example: Crucian, St Johnlan, St. Thomlan, Dane, British Virgin Islander, Nigerian, Angolan, Nevtslan, Anogiian, British, Barbadian, French, Puerto Rican, Haitian, KitUtian, Asian Indian, Lebanese, Polish, Canadian, German, etc. -7 I 1 I I 14a. If the person was bom after April 1, 1985, mark (X) that box without asking 14a, andgo to nextperson. Did. ..live in this house or apartment 5 years ago (on April 1, 1985)? 1 Born after April 1, 1985- Goto questions for die next person 2 Yes - Skip to 15a 3 DNo r b. Where did... live 5 years ago? Print the name ofthe Island in me U.S. Virgin Islands, or the nameofthe U.S. State, commonwealth, territory, or foreign country In the space behw. -j r 15a. Does... speak a language other than English at home? 1 DYes 2 No -Slop to 16 b. What is this language? 7 I I I I For example: French, Spanish, Chinese, Italian c. How well does. . .speak English — very wefl, well, not weB, or not at all? 1 D Very well 3 D Not weD 2D Well 4LlNotatall 16. INTERVIEWER CHECK ITEM - Mark (X) ONE box based on question 5. 1 D Bom before April 1,1975 -Go to 17a 2 Bom April 1,1975 01 later — Go to questions for the next person 17a. Has. . .ever been on active-duty military service In the Armed Forces of the United States or ever been in the United States muftary Reserves or the National Guard? "Active duty" does NOT include training for the military Reserves or National Guard. 1 Q Yes, now on active duty 2 D Yes, on active duty in past, but not now 3 D Yes, service in Reserves or National Guard only — Skip to 18 4 DNo -Sfcto to 18 Did . . . serve on active duty during —Read each category and mark (X) each box for which the answer Is "Yes." 1 D September 1980 or later 2 May 1975 to August 1980 3 D Vietnam era (August 1964-April 1975) 4 D February 1955-July 1964 5 D Korean conflict (June 1950—January 1955) 6 World War U (September 1940-July 1947) 7 D World War I (April 1917-November 1918) 8 D Any other time In total, how marry years of active-duty military service has. ..had? Years 18. Does... have a physical, mental, or other health condition that has lasted for 6 or more months and which — a. Limits the kind or amount of work... can do at a Job? 1 D Yes 2 D No b. Prevents . . . from working at a Job? 1 D Yes 2 D No 19. Because of a health condition that has lasted for 6 or more months, does . . . have any difficulty — a. Going outside the home alone, for example, to shop or visit a doctor's office? 1 D Yes 2 D No b. Taking care of his or her own personal needs, such as bathing, dressing, or setting around inside the home? 1 n Yes 2 D No 20. If this person Is female, ask — How many babies has ... ever had, not counting stillbirths? Do not count stepchildren or children ... has adopted. oDNone lDl sD5 9D 9 2D2 6D6 10D 10 3D3 7D7 11D11 4D4 8D8 12 12 or more 21a. Did... work at any time LAST WEEK, ettherfull time or part time? Work includes part-time work such as delivering papers, or helping without pay in a family business or farm; it also includes active duty in the Armed Forces. Work does NOT include own housework, school work, or volunteer work. 1 DYes 2LlNo-S*foto25 b. How many hours did... work LAST WEEK at all Jobs? Subtract any time off and add any overtime or extra hours worked. I Hours 22a. Where did... usually work LAST WEEK? U. . . worked at more than one location, ask — Where did ... work most last week? 1 In U.S. State, Puerto Rico, or foreign country — SUpto22e 2 D In U.S. Virgin Islands -Continue with 22b •»• What is the name of the island where... worked?- What is the street address where... worked? If the exact address is not known, ask for a description ofthe location such as the building name or shopping center. -3 d. What is the name of the town or area of the island where . . . worked? -7 Skipto23a e. What Is the name ofthe U.S. State, commonwealth, territory, or foreign country where... worked? -j FACSIMILE OF QUESTIONNAIRE PAGES E-7 FOR PERSON 1 0NPAGE2 23a. What type oftransportation did...usually use to get to work LAST WEEK? Ifmore than one method of transportation usually was used during the trip, mark (X) the box of the one used for most ofthe distance. 1 U Car, truck, or van 2 D Bus 3 D Taxfcab 4 U Motorcycle 5 D Safari or taxi bus 6 Ferryboat or water taxi 7 Walked 8 D Worked at home -Skip to 28 9 D Other method Ask only If "car, truck, or van" Is marked in 23a. b. How many people. Including . . ., usually rode to work together LAST WEEK? 28a. For whom did... work? Ifnow on active duty In the Armed Forces, mark (X) this box *- lQ and print the branch ofthe Armed Forces. Ifnot the Armed Forces, print the name ofcompany, business, or other employer, -j I 1 D Drove alone 2 D 2 people 3 3people 4 D 4 people 5 D 5 people 6 D 6 people 7 7to9peop!e 8 D 10 or more people 24a. What time did. ..usually leave home to go to work LAST WEEK? "Usually'' means on most days last week. | ! 1 a.m. I 1 2 Dp.m. b. How many minutes did It usually take... to get from home to work LAST WEEK? I 1 I j Minutes — Slop to 28 b. What kind of business or Industry was this? Describe the activity at location where employed. For example: hospital, newspaper publishing, department store, shirt manufacturer, retail bakery. c. Is this mainly manufacturing, wholesale trade, retail trade, or something else? 1 D Manufacturing 4 D Other (agriculture, 2 D Wholesale trade construction, service, 3 U Retail trade government, etc) 29a. What kind of work was... doing? - For example: registered nurse, personnel manager, supervisor of order department, sewing machine operator, cake leer. 25. Was... on layoff from a job or business LAST WEEK? If "No, "ask - Was ... temporarily absent or on vacation from a Job or business last week? 1 Yes,onlayoff 2 U Yes, on vacation, temporary Illness, labor dispute, etc. 3D No 26a. Has... been looking for work during the last 4 weeks? r. 1 Yes 2 No - Sfcto to27 b. Could... have taken a Job LAST WEEK if one had been offered? If "No, "ask- For what reason? 1 D No, already has a job 2 D No, temporarily ill 3 D No, other reasons (in school, etc.) 4 Q Yes, could have taken a job b. What were...*s most important activities or duties? -» For example: patient care, directing hiring policies, supervising order clerks, sewing shirts, icing cakes. 30. Was... - Read fist. Mar* (X) ONE box. 1 D Employee of a PRIVATE FOR PROFIT company or business or ofan individual, for wages, salary, or commissions 2 Employee of a PRIVATE NOT-FOR-PROFIT, tax-exempt, or charitable organization 3 D Local GOVERNMENT employee (territorial, etc.) 4 D Federal GOVERNMENT employee 5 D SELF-EMPLOYED in own NOT INCORPORATED business, professional practice, or firm 6 D SELF-EMPLOYED in own INCORPORATED business, professional practice, or farm 7 D Working WITHOUT PAY in family business or farm 27. When did... last work, even for a few days? lDl990 \„ 5Dl980tol984 1979 or earner ! Never worked J n 199° lGo 5 D 1980 to 1984 "I „ Slop 32 28-30. The following questions ask about the job worked last week. If ... had more than one job, describe the one ... worked the most hours. H ... didn't work, the questions refer to the most recent job or business since 1985. 31a. Last year (1989), did... work, even for a few days, at a paid Job or in a business or farm? lDYes 2D No -Skip to32 b. How many weeks did... work in 1989? Count paid vacation, paid sick leave, and military service. Weeks c. During the weeks WORKED in 1989, how many hours did— usually work each week? I I I | Hours 32. The following questions are about income received during 1989. Ifan exactamount Is not known, accept a best estimate. Ifnet Income in b, c, d, or question 33 was a loss, write "Loss" above the dollar amount. a. Did ... earn income from wages, salary, commissions, bonuses, or tips? Report amount before deductions for taxes, bonds, dues, or other items. 1 D Yes— How much from anjobs? 2D No I 1 j$ .00] Annual amount — Dollars Did . . . earn any income from (his/her) own nonfann business, proprietorship, or partnership? Report net income after business expenses. i 1 !$ .oqj Annual amount — Dollars lD Yes- How much? 2D No Did ... earn any income from (his/her) own farm business? Include earnings as a tenant fanner or sharecropper. Report net Income alter operating expenses. I 1 !$ .ooj Annual amount — Dollars 1 D Yes - How much? 2D No d. Did., .receive any interest, dividends, net rental or royalty income, or Income from estates and trusts? Include even small amounts credited to an t 1 D Yes - How much? 2D No I 1 !$ .ooj Annual amount — Dollars e. Did . . . receive any Social Security or Railroad Retirement payments?Include payments to retired workers, dependents, and to disabled workers. 1 Yes - How much? 2D No I I $_ .UU| Annual amount — Dollars .00 DM. . . receive any income from government programs for Supplemental Security Income (SSI), Aid to Families wtth Dependent Children (AFDC), or other public assistance or puboc welfare payments? 1 Yes - How much? 2D No !$ .oqj Annual amount — Dollars 9 * Did . . . receive any income from retirement, survivor, or (Bsabfflty penskns? Intrude payments from companies, noons, Pffffml, Staly, and kwal jwrniiiifnit, and the U.S. mflllsiy. Do NOT include Social Security. 1 D Yes - How much? 2D No |$ -00] Annual amount — Dollars h. Did... receive any Income from Veterans' (VA) payments, unemployment compensation, chfld support or ."""y, or any other regular source of income? DoNOTindude tump-sum payments such as money from an inheiilance or the sale of a home. lD Yes- 2D No How much? 1 .ooj Annual amount — Dollars 33. Do not ask this question if32a through 32h are complete. Instead, sum these entries and enter the amount below. Whati .'s total income In 1989? D None OR |$ .oqj Annual amount — Dollars E-8 Please turn to the nextpage and ask the questions for Person 2 on page 2. Ifthis is the lastperson Ustedm question la on r^gel, go to the l^ck ofthe fo FACSIMILE OF QUESTIONNAIRE PAGES INTERVIEWER INSTRUCTIONS Before you leave this housing unit, be sure you have recorded — 1 . Information in items Al, A3, A4 and B through E, Fl (when necessary) , G and H on the front cover of the questionnaire. 2 . The respondent's name in item I and the respondent's telephone number (if any) in item J on the front cover of the questionnaire. 3. Your signature (name) and the date under item O on the front cover of the questionnaire. Also, be sure you have 4. Completed as many of the census questions as possible, including the last resort questions. 5 . Completed the FOR ENUMERATOR USE section on page 3, for vacant units only. 6. Entered the required information on the address listing page on the address register and on the map(s) . FACSIMILE OF QUESTIONNAIRE PAGES E-9 APPENDIX F. Data Products and User Assistance CONTENTS Data Products F-1 Geographic Products F-2 Other Census Bureau Resources F-4 Reference Materials F-3 Sources of Assistance F-4 The 1 990 census data products for the Virgin Islands of the United States (Virgin Islands) are being released during 1991-93 and are available in a variety of new and tradi- tional media. The Census Bureau increased the product options available to data users to meet a variety of requirements and maximize the usefulness of the data. For example, flexible diskettes for microcomputers are a new data delivery medium for the Virgin Islands. The Census Bureau also expanded services and sources of assistance available to data users. For example, the data center program has over 1,400 organizations (includ- ing several in the Virgin Islands) to provide data and services to the public. This appendix provides a detailed introduction to the 1 990 census data products and related materials, such as maps and reference publications. It concludes by describ- ing sources of assistance and other Census Bureau data available to the public. DATA PRODUCTS Printed reports and computer tape files traditionally are the most widely used products. The Census Bureau also offers some data on microfiche and flexible diskettes. These various products are described in this section. For information about prices and how to order, write or call Customer Services. (See the "Sources of Assistance" section for the address and phone number.) The data products present statistics about the subjects covered in the 1 990 census questionnaires for the Virgin Islands. These subjects are listed in figure 1, page F-6. Printed Reports Printed reports are the most convenient and readily available source of data for most census users. The Census Bureau releases the reports for the Virgin Islands in several series (see figure 2, page F-7) that are grouped under three broad titles: 1990 Census of Population and Housing (1990 CPH), 1990 Census of Population (1990 CP), and 1990 Census of Housing (1990 CH). In addition, there are reports, not reflected in figure 2, for the United States, Puerto Rico, and the Pacific Outlying Areas (Amer- ican Samoa, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, Guam, and the Republic of Palau). The reports are sold by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Govern- ment Printing Office. (See the "Sources of Assistance" section for the address and phone number.) The geographic coverage of the Virgin Islands reports is listed in figure 2. Report series that present data for small areas, such as block numbering areas, contain limited subject-matter detail (for example, counts of people by age ranges—under 5 years, 5 to 9 years, etc.—rather than by single years). Report series that include greater amounts of subject-matter detail include less geographic detail. Computer Tape Files The Census Bureau provides more data on tape and other machine-readable products than in printed reports. These products are sold by the Census Bureau's Cus- tomer Services. There are several general types of data files released on computer tape (available on both reels and cartridges). They are introduced below, and more information is presented in figures 3 and 4, page F-8. Summary Tape Files (STF's)—These computer tape files provide statistics with greater subject-matter detail than printed reports. They also present statistics for some types of areas, such as block groups and blocks, that are not included in the reports. (See figure 3.) Here are some important features of STF's for the Virgin Islands: • Each STF presents a particular set of data tables for specific types of geographic areas. • An STF may have two file types (indicated by a letter suffix attached to the STF number) that differ in the geographic levels reported, but contain the same data detail. • STF 1 contains population and housing counts and basic or stateside 100-percent equivalent population (age, race, sex, marital status, relationship, Hispanic origin) and housing (tenure and vacancy data) characteristics. There are two files: File A contains data for the Virgin Islands and its component areas in a geographic hierarchy of island/ census subdistrict/place/BNA/block group. File B contains data for the Virgin Islands and its component areas in a geographic hierarchy of island/ census subdistrict/place/BNA/block group/block. DATA PRODUCTS AND USER ASSISTANCE F-1 • STF 2 contains more detailed data on the basic popu- lation and housing characteristics than those shown in STF 1 . The file provides data for the Virgin Islands in a geographic hierarchy of island/island subdivision/place/ block numbering area (BNA). It also presents BNA summaries for split BNA's. The file includes records for the total population and iterations for race and Hispanic origin. • STF 3 contains demographic, social, economic, and housing characteristics. The file provides data for the Virgin Islands and its component areas in a geographic hierarchy of island/census subdistrict/place/BNA/block group. • STF 4 contains more detailed distributions of the popu- lation and housing characteristics than those shown in STF 3. This file includes records for the total population and iterations for race and Hispanic origin. It will provide data for BNA's in the Virgin Islands in a geographic hierarchy of island/island subdivision/place/BNA. It also presents BNA summaries for split BNA's. Public Use Microdata Sample (PUMS) File—This com- puter tape file (see figure 4) contains data from samples of housing-unit records ("microdata"). Each sample housing- unit record includes essentially all the 1990 census data collected about each person in a sample household and the characteristics of the housing unit. Information that could be used to identify an individual or a housing unit is not included in the file. The microdata file enables users to prepare customized tabulations and cross-tabulations of most items on the census questionnaire. There is one PUMS file for the Virgin Islands. It presents a 10-percent sample of housing units. Flexible Diskettes STF's and the PUMS file for the Virgin Islands also will be offered on flexible diskettes ("floppies") for IBM and compatible microcomputers using the PC DOS 1.1 or higher operating systems. Microfiche Block statistics are available on microfiche that present, in table format, a subset of the tabulations for census blocks found in STF 1B (see figure 3). In the 1990 census, for the first time, the Census Bureau block-numbered the entire Virgin Islands. This greatly increases the number of small areas for which the Census Bureau provides 1990 census data for the Virgin Islands. STF's 1A and 3 are available on microfiche as well. As noted in figure 3, they provide data for a variety of geographic areas. Also, printed reports are available on microfiche from Customer Services soon after they are published. Online Information Systems The Census Bureau began CENDATA™, its online information service, in 1984. CENDATA™ is accessible through two information vendors, CompuServe and DIA- LOG. A number of Census Bureau reports, in whole or in part, are offered online. For the 1990 census, CENDATA™ provides up-to-date information about the availability of data products and carries selections of data from STF's 1 and 3. Custom Data Products These products are for users who require unique tabu- lations that are not included in standard products; for example, information for locally defined geographic areas. Users also can order special microdata files. The cost of preparing custom products must be paid by the users who request them. Any data that the Census Bureau provides in these products are subject to the same standards applied to other data to ensure that confidential individual information is not revealed. User-Defined Areas Program (UDAP) Tabulations— UDAP can provide data for locally defined areas that do not correspond to standard 1 990 census geographic areas. Users identify the geographic areas of interest to them by delineating boundaries around groupings of census blocks on 1990 census County Block Maps or by electronically submitting the geographic components of their area of interest. (A contact for more information is given in the "Sources of Assistance" section.) Special Tabulations—The Census Bureau can prepare special data tabulations for any specific geographic or subject-matter area. Users should rely on standard reports, tapes, microfiche, diskettes, or user-defined area tabula- tions whenever possible, since special tabulations tend to be substantially more expensive and take time to arrange and produce. (Contacts for more information are given in the "Sources of Assistance" section.) GEOGRAPHIC PRODUCTS Maps Census Bureau maps are necessary for virtually all uses of small-area 1 990 census data. They are needed to locate the specific geographic areas for which the census pro- vides data and to study the spatial relationship of the data for analytic purposes. The Census Bureau prepares a variety of 1 990 census maps for the Virgin Islands. Among the most useful are these three series: County Block Maps (1990)—These maps show census blocks and their numbers; boundaries for statistical and legally defined entities, such as census subdistricts, places, F-2 DATA PRODUCTS AND USER ASSISTANCE and block numbering areas; and physical features. The maps are prepared on electrostatic plotters by island (the Virgin Islands' equivalent of a county for reporting statis- tics), with one or more map sheets each, depending on the size and shape of the area and the density of the block pattern. Data users may purchase these maps from Cus- tomer Services. County Subdivision Outline Map—This map of the Virgin Islands shows the islands (the equivalent of counties for reporting statistics) and the names and boundaries of the census subdistricts and places. Electrostatic-plotter copies are available for purchase from Customer Services. The map, in page size, also appears in the following Virgin Islands census reports: 1990 CPH-1-55, 1990 CPH-2-55, 1990 CPH-5-55, 1990 CP-1-55, 1990 CP-2-55, 1990 CH-1- 55, and 1990CH-2-55. Census Tract/Block Numbering Area (BNA) Outline Maps—Maps in this island-based series depict BNA bound- aries and numbers (there are no census tracts in the Virgin Islands), the features underlying these boundaries, and the names and boundaries of the census subdistricts and places. Customer Services sells electrostatic-plotter cop- ies, and the Superintendent of Documents sells printed copies. Geographic Publications The Geographic Identification Code Scheme report in the 1990 CPH-R series shows the 1990 census geo- graphic area codes and Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) codes, as appropriate, for the Virgin Islands and its islands, island subdivisions, and places, as well as for States, Puerto Rico, the Pacific Outlying Areas, and other entities, along with some descriptive information about the codes. The code scheme also is offered on computer tape. Machine-Readable Geographic Files All 1 990 census summary tape files include 1 990 cen- sus geographic area codes, FIPS codes, certain area names, land and total water area in square kilometers, geographic coordinates for an internal point for each entity, and other geographic information. The Census Bureau developed an automated geo- graphic data base, known as the TIGER (Topologically Integrated Geographic Encoding and Referencing) Sys- tem, to produce the geographic products for the 1990 census. TIGER provides coordinate-based digital map information for the Virgin Islands, the entire United States, Puerto Rico, and the Pacific Outlying Areas. The TIGER System has significantly improved the utility of 1 990 census maps and geographic reference products. Extract files generated from the TIGER System permit users, with appropriate software, to perform such tasks as linking the statistical data in the STF's and displaying selected characteristics on maps or a video display screen at different scales and with whatever boundaries they select for any geographic area included in TIGER. For example, a map for a particular island could show the distribution of the population selected by age groups by block. The first extract of selected geographic and carto- graphic information intended for computer applications, such as plotting maps and building geographic information systems, is called the TIGER/Line™files. TIGER/ Line™ files contain attributes for the segments of each boundary and feature (for example, roads and rivers), including 1 990 census geographic codes for adjacent areas, latitude/lon- gitude coordinates of segment end points and the curva- ture of segments, the name and type of the feature, and the relevant census feature class code identifying the feature segment by category. TIGER/Line™ files also provide the names of landmarks, such as lakes and cemeteries, and include other information. TIGER/Line™files and other TIGER System extracts, such as TIGER/Boundary™and TIGER/SDTS™(Spatial Data Transfer Standard), are released on computer tape and, in some cases, CD-ROM. For information on TIGER extract files, contact Customer Services. REFERENCE MATERIALS The Census Bureau issues several reference publica- tions for data users. Some are sold by the Superintendent of Documents; others are distributed free by Customer Services. Addresses and phone numbers for the Superin- tendent of Documents and Customer Services are given in the following section. • 1990 Census ofPopulation and Housing Tabulation and Publication Program for the Virgin Islands of the United States. A free report describing 1 990 census products for the Virgin Islands, comparing 1990 products with those of the 1980 census, and more. Request from Customer Services. • 1990 Census of Population and Housing Tabulation and Publication Program. A free report describing 1990 census products for the States, comparing 1990 prod- ucts with those of the 1 980 census, and more. Request from Customer Services. • Census ABC's—Applications in Business and Commu- nity. A free booklet that highlights key information about the 1990 census and illustrates a variety of ways the data can be used. Request from Customer Services. • TIGER: The Coast-to-Coast Digital Map Data Base. A free booklet describing the structure and uses of the Census Bureau's TIGER System. Request from Cus- tomer Services. • Census and You. The Census Bureau's monthly news- letter for data users. It reports on the latest 1990 census developments, selected new publications and computer DATA PRODUCTS AND USER ASSISTANCE F-3 tape files, other censuses and surveys, developments in services to users, and upcoming conferences and train- ing courses. Subscriptions are sold by the Superinten- dent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office. • Monthly Product Announcement. A free monthly listing of all new Census Bureau publications; microfiche; maps; data files on tape, diskettes, or CD-ROM; and technical documentation. To subscribe, contact Customer Ser- vices. • Census Catalog and Guide. A comprehensive annual description of data products, statistical programs, and services of the Census Bureau. It provides abstracts of the publications, data files, microfiche, maps, and items online. In addition, the Catalog/Guide offers such fea- tures as information about censuses and surveys and telephone contact lists of data specialists at the Census Bureau, the State Data Centers, and other data process- ing service centers. It is sold by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office. Users also can get listings of new Census Bureau products, updated daily, by subscribing to the Daily List. This information and selected statistics are available online through CENDATA™, the Census Bureau's online infor- mation service. For more information, contact Customer Services. SOURCES OF ASSISTANCE U.S. Bureau of the Census The Census Bureau's Customer Services sells most of the machine-readable data products, microfiche, and maps described earlier. (The 1990 census printed reports are sold by the Superintendent of Documents, as noted below.) Also, users may consult with specialists at the Census Bureau's Washington headquarters and the New York Regional Office, which serves the Virgin Islands. From time to time, the specialists also conduct workshops, seminars, and training courses. Washington, DC Contacts—To order products, for a telephone contacts list of Census Bureau specialists, and for general information: Customer Services, U.S. Bureau of the Census, Washington, DC 20233, telephone 301-763- 4100 (FAX number, 301-763-4794). For User-Defined Areas Program (UDAP) information: UDAP Staff, Decennial Management Division, U.S. Bureau of the Census, Washington, DC 20233, telephone 301 -763- 4282. For special tabulation information: Population—Rose- marie Cowan, Population Division, U.S. Bureau of the Census, Washington, DC 20233, telephone 301-763-5476; Housing—William Downs, Housing and Household Eco- nomic Statistics Division, U.S. Bureau of the Census, Washington, DC 20233, telephone 301-763-8553. Regional Office Contact- New York, NY 212-264-4730 Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office The Superintendent of Documents handles the sale of most of the Federal Government's publications, including 1 990 census reports. To order reports and for information: Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402, telephone 202-783-3238. Other Sources of Products and Services State Data Center—The Census Bureau furnishes data products, training in data access and use, technical assis- tance, and consultation to the Virgin Islands, all States, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and Guam. Data centers, in turn, offer publications for reference, printouts from computer tape, specially prepared reports, maps, and other products and assistance to data users. The lead agency of the Virgin Islands data center program is the Eastern Caribbean Center, University of the Virgin Islands, Charlotte Amalie, St. Thomas, VI 00802, telephone 809- 776-9200, ext. 1238. For a list of all State Data Centers, see the Census Catalog and Guide or contact Customer Services. National Clearinghouse—The National Clearinghouse for Census Data Services is a listing of private companies and other organizations that offer assistance in obtaining and using data released by the Census Bureau. For a list of participants in the National Clearinghouse, see the Census Catalog and Guide or contact Customer Services. Depository Libraries—There are 1,400 libraries in the United States, Virgin Islands, and other areas that receive (from the Government Printing Office) Federal publications that they think their patrons will need. Often some of these publications are Census Bureau reports. The Census Bureau provides free reports to an additional 1 20 census deposi- tory libraries. Also, many libraries purchase census reports and maps for their areas. The Census Catalog and Guide includes a list of all depository libraries. OTHER CENSUS BUREAU RESOURCES The Census Bureau has more to offer than just the results of the census of population and housing for the Virgin Islands, the United States, Puerto Rico, and the Pacific Outlying Areas. Through other censuses, surveys, and estimates programs, it compiles and issues (in reports, computer tape, and other media) data for the United States and sometimes the Virgin Islands, Puerto Rico, and the Pacific Outlying Areas on subjects as diverse as appliance sales, neighborhood conditions, and exports to other coun- tries. Here are examples of the information published about— F-4 DATA PRODUCTS AND USER ASSISTANCE • People: Age, race, sex, income, poverty, child care, child support, fertility, noncash benefits, education, commut- ing habits, pension coverage, unemployment, ancestry. • Business and industry: Number of employees, total payroll, sales and receipts, products manufactured or sold. • Housing and construction: Value of new construction, numbers of owners and renters, property value or rent paid, housing starts, fuels used, mortgage costs. • Farms: Number, acreage, livestock, crop sales. • Governments: Revenues and expenditures, taxes, employ- ment, pension funds. • Foreign trade: Exports and imports, origin and destina- tion, units shipped. • Other nations: Population, birth rates, death rates, liter- acy, fertility. The other censuses, such as agriculture, retail trade, manufactures, and governments, are collected for years ending in "2" and "7." Survey and estimates programs generate results as often as every month. Many of the monthly "economic indicators" that mea- sure how the Nation is doing come directly or indirectly from the Census Bureau. Examples: employment and unemployment; housing starts; wholesale and retail trade; manufactures' shipments, inventories, and orders; export and import trade; and sales of single-family homes. Statistical activities of the Census Bureau relevant to the Virgin Islands are described below. Data users will find more information about them and descriptions of their data products in the annual Census Catalog and Guide. Also, special guides and brochures are prepared for most of them. Contact the Census Bureau's Customer Services for more information. Economic Censuses and Surveys The economic censuses provide statistics about busi- ness establishments once every 5 years, covering years ending in "2" and "7." The 1987 Economic Censuses include the censuses of retail trade, wholesale trade, service industries, transportation, manufactures, mineral industries, and construction industries. Several key statistics are tabulated for all industries covered in the censuses. They are number of establish- ments, number of employees, payroll, and measure of output (sales or receipts, and value of shipments or of work done). Other items vary from sector to sector. Agriculture Census The agriculture census is conducted every 5 years (for years ending in 2 and 7) in the Virgin Islands. It is the only source of uniform agriculture data at the island level. It provides data on such subjects as the number and size of farms; land use and ownership; livestock, poultry, and crops; and value of products sold. Foreign Trade Statistics Monthly U.S. merchandise trade data compiled by the Census Bureau summarize export and import transactions and are based on the official documents filed by shippers and receivers. These figures reflect the flow of merchan- dise but not intangibles like services and financial commit- ments. The trade figures trace commodity movements out of and into the U.S. Customs jurisdiction, which includes the Virgin Islands and Puerto Rico as well as the 50 States and the District of Columbia. Data are published separately on trade between the United States, the Virgin Islands, Puerto Rico, and the Pacific Outlying Areas. Other Statistical Activities The Census Bureau also offers international data. It maintains an international data base, which is available to the public on computer tape and is used to produce the biennial World Population Profile report. It prepares studies dealing with the demographic and economic characteris- tics of other countries and world regions. Statistical compendia are another important data prod- uct. These publications (sometimes also offered in machine- readable form) draw data from many sources and reorga- nize them for convenient use. The most widely used compendia are the annual StatisticalAbstract of the United States, the County and City Data Book (published every 5 years), and the State and Metropolitan Area Data Book (published approximately every 4 years). DATA PRODUCTS AND USER ASSISTANCE F-5 Figure 1. Content of the 1990 Census of the Virgin Islands of the United States BASIC SUBJECTS * Population Household relationship Sex Race Age Marital status Hispanic origin Housing Number of units in structure Number of rooms in unit Tenure—owned or rented Value of home or monthly rent Congregate housing (meals included in rent) Vacancy characteristics DETAILED SUBJECTS * Population Social characteristics: Place of birth, citizenship, and year of entry into the Virgin Islands Education—enrollment and attainment Ancestry Migration (residence in 1985) Language spoken at home Veteran status Disability Fertility Economic characteristics: Labor force Place of work and journey to work Year last worked Occupation, industry, and class of worker Work experience in 1989 Income in 1989 Housing Year householder moved into residence Number of bedrooms Complete plumbing and complete kitchen facilities Telephone in unit Vehicles available Cooking fuel Source of water and method of sewage disposal Purchase of water from water vendor Year structure built Condominium status Farm residence Shelter costs, including utilities *ln the Virgin Islands, all questions were asked of all persons and of all housing units. The basic subjects are equivalent to the stateside 100-percent subjects and the detailed subjects are equivalent to the stateside sample subjects. F-6 DATA PRODUCTS AND USER ASSISTANCE Figure 2. 1990 Census Printed Reports for the Virgin Islands of the United States Series Title Description Geographic areas 1990CPH-1-55 1990 CENSUS OF POPULATION AND HOUSING (1990 CPH) Summary Popula- tion and Housing Characteristics Population and housing unit counts, and summary statistics on age, sex, race, Hispanic origin, household rela- tionship, units in structure, number of rooms, tenure, value and rent, and vacancy characteristics Virgin Islands and its islands, census subdistricts, and places 1990CPH-2-55 Population and Housing Unit Counts Total population and housing unit counts for 1 990 and previous cen- suses Virgin Islands; its islands, census sub- districts, and places; and summary geographic areas 1990CPH-3-55 Population and Housing Charac- teristics for Cen- sus Tracks and Block Numbering Areas Statistics on most of the population and housing subjects Statistics presented in a geographic hierarchy of Virgin Islands—island- place—block numbering area 1990CPH-5-55 Summary Social, Economic, and Housing Charac- teristics Statistics on population and housing subjects Virgin Islands and its islands, census subdistricts, and places 1990CP-1-55 General Population Characteristics 1990 CENSUS OF POPULATION (1990 CP) Detailed statistics on age, sex, race, Hispanic origin, marital status, and household relationship characteristics Virgin Islands; its islands, census sub- districts, and places; and summary geographic areas 1990CP-2-55 Social and Eco- nomic Characteris- tics Statistics generally on population sub- jects Virgin Islands; its islands, census sub- districts, and places; and summary geographic areas 1990CH-1-55 General Housing Characteristics 1990 CENSUS OF HOUSING (1990 CH) Detailed statistics on units in struc- ture, value and rent, number of rooms, tenure, and vacancy charac- teristics Virgin Islands; its islands, census sub- districts, and places; and summary geographic areas 1990CH-2-55 Detailed Housing Characteristics Statistics generally on housing sub- jects Virgin Islands; its islands, census sub- districts, and places; and summary geographic areas DATA PRODUCTS AND USER ASSISTANCE F-7 Figure 3. 1990 Census Summary Tape Files for the Virgin islands of the United States Summary Tape File (STF 1A, 1B, etc.) Geographic areas Description STF1 A 1 Virgin Islands and its component areas in a geographic hierarchy of island/cen- sus subdistrict/ place/block numbering area (BNA)/block group (BG) B 1 Virgin Islands of the United States and its component areas in a geographic hierarchy of island/census subdistrict/ place/BNA/BG/block Over 700 cells/items of basic population and hous- ing counts and characteristics for each geographic area STF 2 Virgin Islands and its component areas in a geographic hierarchy of island/cen- sus subdistrict/place/BNA. It also pre- sents BNA summaries for split BNA's. Over 2,000 cells/items of basic population and hous- ing counts and characteristics for each geographic area. The STF 2 file will include a set of tabulations for the total population and separate presentations of tabulations by race and Hispanic origin STF 3 A 1 Virgin Islands and its component areas in a geographic hierarchy of island/cen- sus subdistrict/place/BNA/BG Over 2,600 cells/items of detailed population and housing characteristics for each geographic area STF 4 Data for BNA's and larger areas in the Virgin Islands in a geographic hierarchy of island/census subdistrict/place/BNA. It also presents BNA summaries for split BNA's. Several thousand cells/items of detailed population and housing characteristics for each geographic area. The STF 4 file will include a set of tabulations for the total population and separate presentations of tabulations by race and Hispanic origin 1 Also available on microfiche. STF 1B microfiche provides only part of the data for blocks and other areas in the tape file. Figure 4. Other 1990 Census Data Products for the Virgin Islands of the United States Title Description Geographic areas Census/Equal Opportu- nity (EEO) Special File Public Use Microdata Sample (PUMS) File 10 Percent—PUMS Area User-Defined Areas Tabulations Special Tabulations Special Supplementary A series of cross-tabulations of detailed popu- Virgin Islands Report lation and housing data Sample tabulations showing detailed occupa- tions and educational attainment data by age; cross tabulations by sex, Hispanic origin, and race Virgin Islands Machine-readable file containing a sample of individual census records showing most popu- lation and housing characteristics but with identifying information removed Sample data provided on printouts, tapes, or other products, with maps and narrative (if requested) User-defined tabulations for specified geo- graphic areas provided on printouts, tapes, or other products Virgin Islands User-defined areas created by aggregating census blocks User-defined areas or standard areas F-8 DATA PRODUCTS AND USER ASSISTANCE APPENDIX G Maps Virgin Islands and the Caribbean Area U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE Economics and Statistics Administration Bureau of the Census MAPS VIRGIN ISLANDS G-1 Islands BRITISH VIRGIN ISLANDS (U.K.) Caribbean Sea LEGEND Boundaries as of January 1, 1990 International boundary representation is not necessarily authoritative. N II SCALE 16 Kilometers 16 Miles o> U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE Economics and Statistics Administration Bureau ot the Census G-2 VIRGIN ISLANDS MAPS Island Subdivision Outline Map Legend SYMBOLS MAP LEGEND TYPE STYLES GEOGRAPHIC AREAS ST. JOHN Island southcenirai Island subdivision christiansted Incorporated place grove place Census designated place Asterisk following place name indicates place is coextensive with a census subdivision. Subdivision name is shown only when it differs from place name. Note: All boundaries are as of January 1 , 1990. Boundaries of small areas may not be depicted exactly due to scale of the map. Where boundaries coincide, boundary symbol of higher-level geographic area is shown. U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE Economics and Statistics Administration Bureau of the Census MAPS VIRGIN ISLANDS G-3 Islands, Island Subdivisions, and Places 1 65°00'W ST. THOMAS <? ° ^ Northside(Part) ^ ) \ Northside (Part) West End (Part) <? x> -18"20'N 1 2 t I 3 4 4 J I SCALE West End (Part) u o 8 Kilometers J <>—^ r ^ A Northside ^%_/ i West End (Part) S^ (Part) charlotte /"^-\\ AMALIE J^ CHARLOTTE 1 _L S/UMt/f WE$ly^_f~~~~" Charlotte Amalie -^U ''Vh Yj) > o° <f^ T e West€nd(Part) <j Awater Islanc ) v\. East End ( Part ) CHARLOTTE /J~^r - AMALIE EAST £ . ^-—~= 4~TutU > ^N i yW/W'S -V \ _ V>K^__HflfTfl6p>7 ^^? \r >c ^ ast ^"d \ ) Southside > (Par,) ^^ ^^ (Part) /—-^V— U 1 ^-^-vSu ° ° ° ^ \. Neves' VS East End Vi (Part) 18°20'N- 1 2 3 4 1 8 Miles ^^A Southside(Part) 65°00'W 1 ST. JOHN Central (Part) Q^ SCALE 12 3 6 1 2 3 64°45'W I (3^ East End (Part) ST. CROIX 17°45'N - 12 3 4 U S DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE Economics and Statistics Administration Bureau of the Census G-4 VIRGIN ISLANDS <r U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE:1 993-341 -825/801 06 MAPS Just Published! PART B, GLOSSARY 1990 Census of Population and Housing Guide electronic media. (The geographic, population, and housing definitions are drawn from appendixes to 1990 census reports and technical documentation.) Part B, Glossary (1990 CPH-R-1B) is the second part of the 3-part 1990 Census ofPopulation and Housing Guide. It defines terms used in the census. • Geographic definitions cover specific characteristics of an entity, such as type of geographic code and how boundaries are determined. • Population and housing definitions identify the related item numbers on the 1990 census questionnaire (included as an appendix), define the concepts involved, and note the items comparability to previous censuses. • Technical terms associated with the collection, processing, and tabulation of 1990 census data also are included, along with terms used in working with data files on Previously Published -Part A, TEXT If you are using 1990 census results, you will find the Guide, Part A, Text an indispensable reference. It offers the information you need on such subjects as: • Data products • Geographic terms and products • Where to And assistance • Population and housing concepts • Census procedures Still to come is an index to the 1990 census Summary Tape Files, which will be Part C. Cut on dotted line Order Processing Code: *6357 Superintendent of Documents Publications Order Form P3 I I YES, please send me the following: Charge your order. It's Easy! To fax your orders (202) 512-2250 copies of 1990 Census of Population and Housing Guide, Part A, Text, S/N 003-024-08574-7 at $11.00 each. copies of 1990 Census of Population and Housing Guide, Part B, Glossary, S/N 003-024-08679-4 at $5.50 each. The total cost of my order is $ . International customers please add 25%. Prices include regular domestic postage and handling and are subject to change. Please Choose Method of Payment: I I Check Payable to the Superintendent of Documents I I GPO Deposit Account I I I I I I I I _ I I I I VISA or MasterCard Account (Company or Personal Name) (Please type or print) (Additional address/attention line) (Street address) (City, State, ZIP Code) (Daytime phone including area code) j 1 (Credit card expiration date) Thankyoufor your order! (Authorizing Signature) 1/93 (Purchase Order No.) Mail To: New Orders, Superintendent of Documents P.O. Box 371954, Pittsburgh, PA 15250-7954 f yf Census REF HA 201 1990 A57 5x CPH-5"(53&55) Census of population and housing (1990). _. ^r-f-ial economic. Summary social, kuui . , 1—- - -. i- + a r 1 ST"! Census REF HA 201 1990 .A575x CPH-5-(53&55) Census of population and housing ( 1990) . Summary social, economic, and housing characteristics BUREAU OF THE CENSUS LIBRARY Washington, D.C. 20233